From 66dbc325afcef909043c30e90930a36823fc734c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mimi Zohar Date: Tue, 15 Mar 2011 16:12:09 -0400 Subject: evm: re-release EVM protects a file's security extended attributes(xattrs) against integrity attacks. This patchset provides the framework and an initial method. The initial method maintains an HMAC-sha1 value across the security extended attributes, storing the HMAC value as the extended attribute 'security.evm'. Other methods of validating the integrity of a file's metadata will be posted separately (eg. EVM-digital-signatures). While this patchset does authenticate the security xattrs, and cryptographically binds them to the inode, coming extensions will bind other directory and inode metadata for more complete protection. To help simplify the review and upstreaming process, each extension will be posted separately (eg. IMA-appraisal, IMA-appraisal-directory). For a general overview of the proposed Linux integrity subsystem, refer to Dave Safford's whitepaper: http://downloads.sf.net/project/linux-ima/linux-ima/Integrity_overview.pdf. EVM depends on the Kernel Key Retention System to provide it with a trusted/encrypted key for the HMAC-sha1 operation. The key is loaded onto the root's keyring using keyctl. Until EVM receives notification that the key has been successfully loaded onto the keyring (echo 1 > /evm), EVM can not create or validate the 'security.evm' xattr, but returns INTEGRITY_UNKNOWN. Loading the key and signaling EVM should be done as early as possible. Normally this is done in the initramfs, which has already been measured as part of the trusted boot. For more information on creating and loading existing trusted/encrypted keys, refer to Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt. A sample dracut patch, which loads the trusted/encrypted key and enables EVM, is available from http://linux-ima.sourceforge.net/#EVM. Based on the LSMs enabled, the set of EVM protected security xattrs is defined at compile. EVM adds the following three calls to the existing security hooks: evm_inode_setxattr(), evm_inode_post_setxattr(), and evm_inode_removexattr. To initialize and update the 'security.evm' extended attribute, EVM defines three calls: evm_inode_post_init(), evm_inode_post_setattr() and evm_inode_post_removexattr() hooks. To verify the integrity of a security xattr, EVM exports evm_verifyxattr(). Changelog v7: - Fixed URL in EVM ABI documentation Changelog v6: (based on Serge Hallyn's review) - fix URL in patch description - remove evm_hmac_size definition - use SHA1_DIGEST_SIZE (removed both MAX_DIGEST_SIZE and evm_hmac_size) - moved linux include before other includes - test for crypto_hash_setkey failure - fail earlier for invalid key - clear entire encrypted key, even on failure - check xattr name length before comparing xattr names Changelog: - locking based on i_mutex, remove evm_mutex - using trusted/encrypted keys for storing the EVM key used in the HMAC-sha1 operation. - replaced crypto hash with shash (Dmitry Kasatkin) - support for additional methods of verifying the security xattrs (Dmitry Kasatkin) - iint not allocated for all regular files, but only for those appraised - Use cap_sys_admin in lieu of cap_mac_admin - Use __vfs_setxattr_noperm(), without permission checks, from EVM Signed-off-by: Mimi Zohar Acked-by: Serge Hallyn --- Documentation/ABI/testing/evm | 23 +++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/evm (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/evm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/evm new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8374d4557e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/evm @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +What: security/evm +Date: March 2011 +Contact: Mimi Zohar +Description: + EVM protects a file's security extended attributes(xattrs) + against integrity attacks. The initial method maintains an + HMAC-sha1 value across the extended attributes, storing the + value as the extended attribute 'security.evm'. + + EVM depends on the Kernel Key Retention System to provide it + with a trusted/encrypted key for the HMAC-sha1 operation. + The key is loaded onto the root's keyring using keyctl. Until + EVM receives notification that the key has been successfully + loaded onto the keyring (echo 1 > /evm), EVM + can not create or validate the 'security.evm' xattr, but + returns INTEGRITY_UNKNOWN. Loading the key and signaling EVM + should be done as early as possible. Normally this is done + in the initramfs, which has already been measured as part + of the trusted boot. For more information on creating and + loading existing trusted/encrypted keys, refer to: + Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt. (A sample dracut + patch, which loads the trusted/encrypted key and enables + EVM, is available from http://linux-ima.sourceforge.net/#EVM.) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7102ebcd65c1cdb5d5a87c7c5cf7a46f5afb0cac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mimi Zohar Date: Thu, 12 May 2011 18:33:20 -0400 Subject: evm: permit only valid security.evm xattrs to be updated In addition to requiring CAP_SYS_ADMIN permission to modify/delete security.evm, prohibit invalid security.evm xattrs from changing, unless in fixmode. This patch prevents inadvertent 'fixing' of security.evm to reflect offline modifications. Changelog v7: - rename boot paramater 'evm_mode' to 'evm' Reported-by: Roberto Sassu Signed-off-by: Mimi Zohar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index fd248a31821..db97ff1da8c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -48,6 +48,7 @@ parameter is applicable: EDD BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled EFI EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled EIDE EIDE/ATAPI support is enabled. + EVM Extended Verification Module FB The frame buffer device is enabled. GCOV GCOV profiling is enabled. HW Appropriate hardware is enabled. @@ -750,6 +751,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. This option is obsoleted by the "netdev=" option, which has equivalent usage. See its documentation for details. + evm= [EVM] + Format: { "fix" } + Permit 'security.evm' to be updated regardless of + current integrity status. + failslab= fail_page_alloc= fail_make_request=[KNL] -- cgit v1.2.3 From a7f96e4dc6bb5f45d0612782419e6a63032a2ac0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Tue, 26 Jul 2011 21:00:13 +0100 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8731 Tested with the famous "hey, look! this compiles" test plan. Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood Acked by: Grant Likely --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..15f70048469 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8731.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8731 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8731" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8731@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8731"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 58e494247a9f09f0ae8d9867fcfb672a9bcdd6ae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Fri, 22 Jul 2011 00:28:51 +0800 Subject: ASoC: sgtl5000: add device tree probe support It adds device tree probe support for sgtl5000 driver. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo Acked-by: Grant Likely Acked-by: Liam Girdwood Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- .../devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt | 11 +++++++++++ 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2c3cd413f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/soc/codecs/fsl-sgtl5000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +* Freescale SGTL5000 Stereo Codec + +Required properties: +- compatible : "fsl,sgtl5000". + +Example: + +codec: sgtl5000@0a { + compatible = "fsl,sgtl5000"; + reg = <0x0a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 49d859d78c5aeb998b6936fcb5f288f78d713489 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "H. Peter Anvin" Date: Sun, 31 Jul 2011 14:02:19 -0700 Subject: x86, random: Verify RDRAND functionality and allow it to be disabled If the CPU declares that RDRAND is available, go through a guranteed reseed sequence, and make sure that it is actually working (producing data.) If it does not, disable the CPU feature flag. Allow RDRAND to be disabled on the command line (as opposed to at compile time) for a user who has special requirements with regards to random numbers. Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin Cc: Matt Mackall Cc: Herbert Xu Cc: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index aa47be71df4..397ee05132a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1764,6 +1764,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. noresidual [PPC] Don't use residual data on PReP machines. + nordrand [X86] Disable the direct use of the RDRAND + instruction even if it is supported by the + processor. RDRAND is still available to user + space applications. + noresume [SWSUSP] Disables resume and restores original swap space. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 79f88ee9836d482891ba41b1a553e2baacf31b02 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Sat, 30 Jul 2011 08:26:00 +0000 Subject: net/smsc911x: add device tree probe support It adds device tree probe support for smsc911x driver. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo Cc: Grant Likely Cc: Steve Glendinning Cc: David S. Miller Reviewed-by: Grant Likely Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt | 38 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 38 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..adb5b5744ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc911x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +* Smart Mixed-Signal Connectivity (SMSC) LAN911x/912x Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "smsc,lan", "smsc,lan9115" +- reg : Address and length of the io space for SMSC LAN +- interrupts : Should contain SMSC LAN interrupt line +- interrupt-parent : Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller + that services interrupts for this device +- phy-mode : String, operation mode of the PHY interface. + Supported values are: "mii", "gmii", "sgmii", "tbi", "rmii", + "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "rgmii-rxid", "rgmii-txid", "rtbi", "smii". + +Optional properties: +- reg-shift : Specify the quantity to shift the register offsets by +- reg-io-width : Specify the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that + should be performed on the device. Valid value for SMSC LAN is + 2 or 4. If it's omitted or invalid, the size would be 2. +- smsc,irq-active-high : Indicates the IRQ polarity is active-high +- smsc,irq-push-pull : Indicates the IRQ type is push-pull +- smsc,force-internal-phy : Forces SMSC LAN controller to use + internal PHY +- smsc,force-external-phy : Forces SMSC LAN controller to use + external PHY +- smsc,save-mac-address : Indicates that mac address needs to be saved + before resetting the controller +- local-mac-address : 6 bytes, mac address + +Examples: + +lan9220@f4000000 { + compatible = "smsc,lan9220", "smsc,lan9115"; + reg = <0xf4000000 0x2000000>; + phy-mode = "mii"; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <31>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + smsc,irq-push-pull; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 18e10aba7f2a41767b9aa97911696c28d0f29083 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Michal=20Mal=C3=BD?= Date: Thu, 4 Aug 2011 16:27:18 +0200 Subject: HID: lg4ff - Document sysfs interface for range setting MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Adds documentation of the sysfs interface used to set the wheel range. Signed-off-by: Michal MalĂœ Signed-off-by: Simon Wood Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9aec8ef228b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +What: /sys/module/hid_logitech/drivers/hid:logitech//range. +Date: July 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.2 +Contact: Michal Malę +Description: Display minimum, maximum and current range of the steering + wheel. Writing a value within min and max boundaries sets the + range of the wheel. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2ae66c26550cd94b0e2606a9275eb0ab7070ad0e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Pierre-Louis Bossart Date: Thu, 4 Aug 2011 10:12:56 -0500 Subject: ALSA: hda: option to enable arbitrary buffer/period sizes Add new parameter to disable rounding of buffer/period sizes to multiples of 128 bytes. This is more efficient in terms of memory access but isn't required by the HDA spec and prevents users from specifying exact period/buffer sizes. For example for 44.1kHz, a period size set to 20ms will be rounded to 19.59ms. Tested and enabled on Intel HDA controllers. Option is disabled by default for other controllers. Tested-by: Wu Fengguang Signed-off-by: Pierre-Louis Bossart Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 89757012c7f..27126c469f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -886,6 +886,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. disable) power_save_controller - Reset HD-audio controller in power-saving mode (default = on) + align_buffer_size - Force rounding of buffer/period sizes to multiples + of 128 bytes. This is more efficient in terms of memory + access but isn't required by the HDA spec and prevents + users from specifying exact period/buffer sizes. + (default = on) This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. -- cgit v1.2.3 From d11b7fa3d5b6d4b3a730f563e7b14dfc859c40c6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 5 Aug 2011 12:49:46 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add documentation for tracepoints Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 47 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 47 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index c82beb00763..ba2a155f3a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -524,6 +524,53 @@ power-saving. See /sys/module/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to check the current value. If it's non-zero, the feature is turned on. +Tracepoints +~~~~~~~~~~~ +The hd-audio driver gives a few basic tracepoints. +`hda:hda_send_cmd` traces each CORB write while `hda:hda_get_response` +traces the response from RIRB (only when read from the codec driver). +`hda:hda_bus_reset` traces the bus-reset due to fatal error, etc, and +`hda:hda_power_down` and `hda:hda_power_up` trace the power down/up +via power-saving behavior. + +Enabling all tracepoints can be done like +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/hda/enable +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +then after some commands, you can traces from +/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace file. For example, when you want to +trace what codec command is sent, enable the tracepoint like: +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + # tracer: nop + # + # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION + # | | | | | + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.774889: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a019 + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.774893: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e39019 + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.999542: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a01a + <...>-7807 [002] 105147.999543: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3901a + <...>-26764 [001] 349222.837143: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a019 + <...>-26764 [001] 349222.837148: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e39019 + <...>-26764 [001] 349223.058539: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3a01a + <...>-26764 [001] 349223.058541: hda_send_cmd: [0:0] val=e3901a +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Here `[0:0]` indicates the card number and the codec address, and +`val` shows the value sent to the codec, respectively. The value is +a packed value, and you can decode it via hda-decode-verb program +included in hda-emu package below. For example, the value e3a019 is +to set the left output-amp value to 25. +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + % hda-decode-verb 0xe3a019 + raw value = 0x00e3a019 + cid = 0, nid = 0x0e, verb = 0x3a0, parm = 0x19 + raw value: verb = 0x3a0, parm = 0x19 + verbname = set_amp_gain_mute + amp raw val = 0xa019 + output, left, idx=0, mute=0, val=25 +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + + Development Tree ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ The latest development codes for HD-audio are found on sound git tree: -- cgit v1.2.3 From e117d10d315970d0a3d4120c7f83b8337728ce1b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jesper Juhl Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 00:53:09 +0200 Subject: Documentation/ABI/: update version number references from 2.6.x to 3.x Update the version number references from 2.6.x to 3.x Also correct spelling of "May" (was spelled "Mai"). Signed-off-by: Jesper Juhl Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb | 2 +- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma | 8 ++++---- .../ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 | 16 ++++++++-------- 3 files changed, 13 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb b/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb index 7f5daa46509..20c91adca6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/o2cb symlink Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com Description: This is a symlink: /sys/o2cb to /sys/fs/o2cb. The symlink is removed when new versions of ocfs2-tools which know to look diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma index 06b62badddd..721b4aea302 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../manuf Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaƂ MiƂecki Description: Each BCMA core has it's manufacturer id. See @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../id Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaƂ MiƂecki Description: There are a few types of BCMA cores, they can be identified by @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../rev Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaƂ MiƂecki Description: BCMA cores of the same type can still slightly differ depending @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Description: What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../class Date: May 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: RafaƂ MiƂecki Description: Each BCMA core is identified by few fields, including class it diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 index aa11dbdd794..4a9c545bda4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-backlight-driver-adp8870 @@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ What: /sys/class/backlight//l2_bright_max What: /sys/class/backlight//l3_office_max What: /sys/class/backlight//l4_indoor_max What: /sys/class/backlight//l5_dark_max -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Control the maximum brightness for @@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ What: /sys/class/backlight//l2_bright_dim What: /sys/class/backlight//l3_office_dim What: /sys/class/backlight//l4_indoor_dim What: /sys/class/backlight//l5_dark_dim -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Control the dim brightness for @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ Description: this . What: /sys/class/backlight//ambient_light_level -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Get conversion value of the light sensor. @@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ Description: 8000 (max ambient brightness) What: /sys/class/backlight//ambient_light_zone -Date: Mai 2011 -KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.0 Contact: device-drivers-devel@blackfin.uclinux.org Description: Get/Set current ambient light zone. Reading returns -- cgit v1.2.3 From dfb09f9b7ab03fd367740e541a5caf830ed56726 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Borislav Petkov Date: Fri, 5 Aug 2011 15:15:08 +0200 Subject: x86, amd: Avoid cache aliasing penalties on AMD family 15h This patch provides performance tuning for the "Bulldozer" CPU. With its shared instruction cache there is a chance of generating an excessive number of cache cross-invalidates when running specific workloads on the cores of a compute module. This excessive amount of cross-invalidations can be observed if cache lines backed by shared physical memory alias in bits [14:12] of their virtual addresses, as those bits are used for the index generation. This patch addresses the issue by clearing all the bits in the [14:12] slice of the file mapping's virtual address at generation time, thus forcing those bits the same for all mappings of a single shared library across processes and, in doing so, avoids instruction cache aliases. It also adds the command line option "align_va_addr=(32|64|on|off)" with which virtual address alignment can be enabled for 32-bit or 64-bit x86 individually, or both, or be completely disabled. This change leaves virtual region address allocation on other families and/or vendors unaffected. Signed-off-by: Borislav Petkov Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1312550110-24160-2-git-send-email-bp@amd64.org Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index aa47be71df4..af73c036b7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -299,6 +299,19 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. behaviour to be specified. Bit 0 enables warnings, bit 1 enables fixups, and bit 2 sends a segfault. + align_va_addr= [X86-64] + Align virtual addresses by clearing slice [14:12] when + allocating a VMA at process creation time. This option + gives you up to 3% performance improvement on AMD F15h + machines (where it is enabled by default) for a + CPU-intensive style benchmark, and it can vary highly in + a microbenchmark depending on workload and compiler. + + 1: only for 32-bit processes + 2: only for 64-bit processes + on: enable for both 32- and 64-bit processes + off: disable for both 32- and 64-bit processes + amd_iommu= [HW,X86-84] Pass parameters to the AMD IOMMU driver in the system. Possible values are: -- cgit v1.2.3 From ffd638e0e613578fbe82d5f2d9c1e5ec503a3a2b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sakari Ailus Date: Mon, 18 Jul 2011 11:03:05 -0300 Subject: [media] v4l: Move event documentation from SUBSCRIBE_EVENT to DQEVENT Move documentation of structures used in DQEVENT from SUBSCRIBE_EVENT to DQEVENT. Signed-off-by: Sakari Ailus Acked-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml | 107 +++++++++++++++++++++ .../DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml | 107 --------------------- 2 files changed, 107 insertions(+), 107 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml index 7769642ee43..5200b687465 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml @@ -135,6 +135,113 @@ + + struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname> + + &cs-str; + + + __u8 + field + The upcoming field. See &v4l2-field;. + + + +
+ + + struct <structname>v4l2_event_ctrl</structname> + + &cs-str; + + + __u32 + changes + + A bitmask that tells what has changed. See . + + + __u32 + type + + The type of the control. See &v4l2-ctrl-type;. + + + union (anonymous) + + + + + + + __s32 + value + The 32-bit value of the control for 32-bit control types. + This is 0 for string controls since the value of a string + cannot be passed using &VIDIOC-DQEVENT;. + + + + __s64 + value64 + The 64-bit value of the control for 64-bit control types. + + + __u32 + flags + + The control flags. See . + + + __s32 + minimum + + The minimum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. + + + __s32 + maximum + + The maximum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. + + + __s32 + step + + The step value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. + + + __s32 + default_value + + The default value value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. + + + +
+ + + Changes + + &cs-def; + + + V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_VALUE + 0x0001 + This control event was triggered because the value of the control + changed. Special case: if a button control is pressed, then this + event is sent as well, even though there is not explicit value + associated with a button control. + + + V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_FLAGS + 0x0002 + This control event was triggered because the control flags + changed. + + + +
&return-value; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml index 69c0d8a2a3d..275be9689d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml @@ -183,113 +183,6 @@ - - struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname> - - &cs-str; - - - __u8 - field - The upcoming field. See &v4l2-field;. - - - -
- - - struct <structname>v4l2_event_ctrl</structname> - - &cs-str; - - - __u32 - changes - - A bitmask that tells what has changed. See . - - - __u32 - type - - The type of the control. See &v4l2-ctrl-type;. - - - union (anonymous) - - - - - - - __s32 - value - The 32-bit value of the control for 32-bit control types. - This is 0 for string controls since the value of a string - cannot be passed using &VIDIOC-DQEVENT;. - - - - __s64 - value64 - The 64-bit value of the control for 64-bit control types. - - - __u32 - flags - - The control flags. See . - - - __s32 - minimum - - The minimum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. - - - __s32 - maximum - - The maximum value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. - - - __s32 - step - - The step value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. - - - __s32 - default_value - - The default value value of the control. See &v4l2-queryctrl;. - - - -
- - - Changes - - &cs-def; - - - V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_VALUE - 0x0001 - This control event was triggered because the value of the control - changed. Special case: if a button control is pressed, then this - event is sent as well, even though there is not explicit value - associated with a button control. - - - V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_FLAGS - 0x0002 - This control event was triggered because the control flags - changed. - - - -
&return-value; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 13049537007dee73a76f0a30fcbc24d02c6fa9e4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joseph Handzik Date: Mon, 8 Aug 2011 11:40:15 +0200 Subject: cciss: Adds simple mode functionality Signed-off-by: Joseph Handzik Acked-by: Stephen M. Cameron Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt | 10 ++++++++++ 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt index c00c6a5ab21..71464e09ec1 100644 --- a/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt @@ -78,6 +78,16 @@ The device naming scheme is: /dev/cciss/c1d1p2 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 2 /dev/cciss/c1d1p3 Controller 1, disk 1, partition 3 +CCISS simple mode support +------------------------- + +The "cciss_simple_mode=1" boot parameter may be used to prevent the driver +from putting the controller into "performant" mode. The difference is that +with simple mode, each command completion requires an interrupt, while with +"performant mode" (the default, and ordinarily better performing) it is +possible to have multiple command completions indicated by a single +interrupt. + SCSI tape drive and medium changer support ------------------------------------------ -- cgit v1.2.3 From f963d270cb7bbb8eeb57901d02b22a493e664fd2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joe Handzik Date: Mon, 8 Aug 2011 11:40:17 +0200 Subject: cciss: add transport mode attribute to sys Signed-off-by: Joseph Handzik Acked-by: Stephen M. Cameron Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss index f5bb0a3bb8c..53d99edd1d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss @@ -71,3 +71,10 @@ Description: Value of 1 indicates the controller can honor the reset_devices a dump device, as kdump requires resetting the device in order to work reliably. +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices//ccissX/transport_mode +Date: July 2011 +Kernel Version: 3.0 +Contact: iss_storagedev@hp.com +Description: Value of "simple" indicates that the controller has been placed + in "simple mode". Value of "performant" indicates that the + controller has been placed in "performant mode". -- cgit v1.2.3 From bd74b32b77e0e4af47651da852cb3ced84e423b3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Paul Bolle Date: Sat, 6 Aug 2011 14:33:43 +0200 Subject: Fix documentation and comment typo 'no_hz' Signed-off-by: Paul Bolle Acked-by: Len Brown Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index e74d0a2eb1c..d221781daba 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ The sampling rate is limited by the HW transition latency: transition_latency * 100 Or by kernel restrictions: If CONFIG_NO_HZ is set, the limit is 10ms fixed. -If CONFIG_NO_HZ is not set or no_hz=off boot parameter is used, the +If CONFIG_NO_HZ is not set or nohz=off boot parameter is used, the limits depend on the CONFIG_HZ option: HZ=1000: min=20000us (20ms) HZ=250: min=80000us (80ms) -- cgit v1.2.3 From ecf726f5414489fe749477eb77d6cb12bb93c8bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 9 Aug 2011 14:22:44 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add tracepoint for unsolicited events Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index ba2a155f3a3..850b1b3956a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -529,7 +529,8 @@ Tracepoints The hd-audio driver gives a few basic tracepoints. `hda:hda_send_cmd` traces each CORB write while `hda:hda_get_response` traces the response from RIRB (only when read from the codec driver). -`hda:hda_bus_reset` traces the bus-reset due to fatal error, etc, and +`hda:hda_bus_reset` traces the bus-reset due to fatal error, etc, +`hda:hda_unsol_event` traces the unsolicited events, and `hda:hda_power_down` and `hda:hda_power_up` trace the power down/up via power-saving behavior. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 30343ef1de348cd21cd7d0cebde3c0175b730e0b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jamie Iles Date: Mon, 1 Aug 2011 17:25:19 +0100 Subject: crypto: picoxcell - support for device tree matching Allow the crypto engines to be matched from device tree bindings. Cc: devicetree-discuss@lists.ozlabs.org Cc: Herbert Xu Signed-off-by: Jamie Iles Signed-off-by: Herbert Xu --- .../devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt | 23 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d8609ece1f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Picochip picoXcell SPAcc (Security Protocol Accelerator) bindings + +Picochip picoXcell devices contain crypto offload engines that may be used for +IPSEC and femtocell layer 2 ciphering. + +Required properties: + - compatible : "picochip,spacc-ipsec" for the IPSEC offload engine + "picochip,spacc-l2" for the femtocell layer 2 ciphering engine. + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device + - interrupt-parent : The interrupt controller that controls the SPAcc + interrupt. + - interrupts : The interrupt line from the SPAcc. + - ref-clock : The input clock that drives the SPAcc. + +Example SPAcc node: + +spacc@10000 { + compatible = "picochip,spacc-ipsec"; + reg = <0x100000 0x10000>; + interrupt-parent = <&vic0>; + interrupts = <24>; + ref-clock = <&ipsec_clk>, "ref"; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 96242116d483cd98ab55fb989ca096f6f9cc3738 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bjorn Helgaas Date: Thu, 11 Aug 2011 12:14:05 -0600 Subject: PNP: update pnp.debug usage (needs value on command line) Commit cdefba03e44 changed pnp.debug from a boot param to a module param, which means it needs a value when used on the command line. CC: Thomas Renninger Signed-off-by: Bjorn Helgaas Signed-off-by: Len Brown --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index e279b724291..130713f7187 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2081,9 +2081,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Override pmtimer IOPort with a hex value. e.g. pmtmr=0x508 - pnp.debug [PNP] - Enable PNP debug messages. This depends on the - CONFIG_PNP_DEBUG_MESSAGES option. + pnp.debug=1 [PNP] + Enable PNP debug messages (depends on the + CONFIG_PNP_DEBUG_MESSAGES option). Change at run-time + via /sys/module/pnp/parameters/debug. We always show + current resource usage; turning this on also shows + possible settings and some assignment information. pnpacpi= [ACPI] { off } -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0a422e1a19e1583913d6f762882f115605109107 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 13:03:04 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8510 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fa1a32b8557 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8510.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8510 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8510" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8510@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8510"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From bf5a85be9739ea26f05874992cb05a9c774f359f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 13:08:13 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8523 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..04746186b28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8523.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +WM8523 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8523" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. + +Example: + +codec: wm8523@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8523"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 733eef3e96726350888bd0ec1526f2561bec44ed Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 13:22:36 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree support for WM8580 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7d9821f348d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8580.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +WM8580 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8580" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. + +Example: + +codec: wm8580@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8580"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1552c8f67ea70803b18e2c7c525a8da5f90384c1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Wed, 3 Aug 2011 16:52:47 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8711 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8ed9998cd23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8711.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8711 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8711" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8711@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8711"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 45b4d043da571c71500add0fa3ea17c9b8f1f648 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Wed, 3 Aug 2011 16:53:02 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8728 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a8b5c3668e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8728.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8728 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8728" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8728@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8728"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 53a5a83d24d8ee9567bfcbaf3b37ca5a00ab16a9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Wed, 3 Aug 2011 16:53:22 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8737 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4bc2cea3b14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8737.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8737 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8737" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8737@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8737"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From ce31a0f5a6d2c73b61d04f7d886a1f8101eed29f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Wed, 3 Aug 2011 17:34:59 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8750 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8db239fd5ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8750.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8750 and WM8987 audio CODECs + +These devices support both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8750" or "wlf,wm8987" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8750@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8750"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 70e141228a24a538dfcd5ba641f92c1bdc239eb0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Mon, 8 Aug 2011 12:44:27 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8753 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Acked-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e65277a0fb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8753.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8753 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8753" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8737@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8753"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 88ebc08ea9f721d1345d5414288a308ea42ac458 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bharata B Rao Date: Thu, 21 Jul 2011 09:43:43 -0700 Subject: sched: Add documentation for bandwidth control Basic description of usage and effect for CFS Bandwidth Control. Signed-off-by: Bharata B Rao Signed-off-by: Paul Turner Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/20110721184758.498036116@google.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt | 122 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 122 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f6b1873f68a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +CFS Bandwidth Control +===================== + +[ This document only discusses CPU bandwidth control for SCHED_NORMAL. + The SCHED_RT case is covered in Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt ] + +CFS bandwidth control is a CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED extension which allows the +specification of the maximum CPU bandwidth available to a group or hierarchy. + +The bandwidth allowed for a group is specified using a quota and period. Within +each given "period" (microseconds), a group is allowed to consume only up to +"quota" microseconds of CPU time. When the CPU bandwidth consumption of a +group exceeds this limit (for that period), the tasks belonging to its +hierarchy will be throttled and are not allowed to run again until the next +period. + +A group's unused runtime is globally tracked, being refreshed with quota units +above at each period boundary. As threads consume this bandwidth it is +transferred to cpu-local "silos" on a demand basis. The amount transferred +within each of these updates is tunable and described as the "slice". + +Management +---------- +Quota and period are managed within the cpu subsystem via cgroupfs. + +cpu.cfs_quota_us: the total available run-time within a period (in microseconds) +cpu.cfs_period_us: the length of a period (in microseconds) +cpu.stat: exports throttling statistics [explained further below] + +The default values are: + cpu.cfs_period_us=100ms + cpu.cfs_quota=-1 + +A value of -1 for cpu.cfs_quota_us indicates that the group does not have any +bandwidth restriction in place, such a group is described as an unconstrained +bandwidth group. This represents the traditional work-conserving behavior for +CFS. + +Writing any (valid) positive value(s) will enact the specified bandwidth limit. +The minimum quota allowed for the quota or period is 1ms. There is also an +upper bound on the period length of 1s. Additional restrictions exist when +bandwidth limits are used in a hierarchical fashion, these are explained in +more detail below. + +Writing any negative value to cpu.cfs_quota_us will remove the bandwidth limit +and return the group to an unconstrained state once more. + +Any updates to a group's bandwidth specification will result in it becoming +unthrottled if it is in a constrained state. + +System wide settings +-------------------- +For efficiency run-time is transferred between the global pool and CPU local +"silos" in a batch fashion. This greatly reduces global accounting pressure +on large systems. The amount transferred each time such an update is required +is described as the "slice". + +This is tunable via procfs: + /proc/sys/kernel/sched_cfs_bandwidth_slice_us (default=5ms) + +Larger slice values will reduce transfer overheads, while smaller values allow +for more fine-grained consumption. + +Statistics +---------- +A group's bandwidth statistics are exported via 3 fields in cpu.stat. + +cpu.stat: +- nr_periods: Number of enforcement intervals that have elapsed. +- nr_throttled: Number of times the group has been throttled/limited. +- throttled_time: The total time duration (in nanoseconds) for which entities + of the group have been throttled. + +This interface is read-only. + +Hierarchical considerations +--------------------------- +The interface enforces that an individual entity's bandwidth is always +attainable, that is: max(c_i) <= C. However, over-subscription in the +aggregate case is explicitly allowed to enable work-conserving semantics +within a hierarchy. + e.g. \Sum (c_i) may exceed C +[ Where C is the parent's bandwidth, and c_i its children ] + + +There are two ways in which a group may become throttled: + a. it fully consumes its own quota within a period + b. a parent's quota is fully consumed within its period + +In case b) above, even though the child may have runtime remaining it will not +be allowed to until the parent's runtime is refreshed. + +Examples +-------- +1. Limit a group to 1 CPU worth of runtime. + + If period is 250ms and quota is also 250ms, the group will get + 1 CPU worth of runtime every 250ms. + + # echo 250000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 250ms */ + # echo 250000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 250ms */ + +2. Limit a group to 2 CPUs worth of runtime on a multi-CPU machine. + + With 500ms period and 1000ms quota, the group can get 2 CPUs worth of + runtime every 500ms. + + # echo 1000000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 1000ms */ + # echo 500000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 500ms */ + + The larger period here allows for increased burst capacity. + +3. Limit a group to 20% of 1 CPU. + + With 50ms period, 10ms quota will be equivalent to 20% of 1 CPU. + + # echo 10000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 10ms */ + # echo 50000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 50ms */ + + By using a small period here we are ensuring a consistent latency + response at the expense of burst capacity. + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 311aab73d273eb22be976055f6cab224f7279d5e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Colin Cross Date: Mon, 8 Aug 2011 23:39:36 +0200 Subject: PM / Runtime: Add might_sleep() to runtime PM functions Some of the entry points to pm runtime are not safe to call in atomic context unless pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called. Inspecting the code, it is not immediately obvious that the functions sleep at all, as they run inside a spin_lock_irqsave, but under some conditions they can drop the lock and turn on irqs. If a driver incorrectly calls the pm_runtime apis, it can cause sleeping and irq processing when it expects to stay in atomic context. Add might_sleep_if to the majority of the __pm_runtime_* entry points to enforce correct usage. Add pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend to the list of functions that can be called in atomic context. Signed-off-by: Colin Cross Reviewed-by: Kevin Hilman Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 4ce5450ab6e..62f37bc3866 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -484,6 +484,7 @@ pm_runtime_resume() pm_runtime_get_sync() pm_runtime_put_sync() pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend() +pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend() 5. Runtime PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3823328d550e991f5994354a4e1427fd5fdc06e9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Mon, 15 Aug 2011 12:56:54 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC262 HP and sony-assamd quirks HP and sony-assamd models work with the BIOS auto-parser nowadays, so let's reduce the unnecessary code. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 5 ----- 1 file changed, 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index d70c93bdcad..84fba44381a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -46,15 +46,10 @@ ALC260 ALC262 ====== fujitsu Fujitsu Laptop - hp-bpc HP xw4400/6400/8400/9400 laptops - hp-bpc-d7000 HP BPC D7000 - hp-tc-t5735 HP Thin Client T5735 - hp-rp5700 HP RP5700 benq Benq ED8 benq-t31 Benq T31 hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection - sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 tyan Tyan Thunder n6650W (S2915-E) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0d8cb303a984afe4a7f0b68e47fe1958e1fd75e0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Mon, 15 Aug 2011 13:00:56 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC260 HP model quirks ALC260 HP models work with the BIOS auto-parser. Let's cut them off. Also move alc260_hp_master_*() to alc262_quirks.c as these are still referred from there. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 84fba44381a..0c22531db46 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -29,9 +29,6 @@ ALC880 ALC260 ====== - hp HP machines - hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) - hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 acer Acer TravelMate will Will laptops (PB V7900) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 80080ec5399acb4e83f1216b24fd07e93c5c4b2c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Wed, 3 Aug 2011 17:31:26 +0900 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8741 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..74bda58c1bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8741.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8741 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8741" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8741@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8741"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 082632e235ecc4cf189366967037ed832a8ee523 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 14:07:59 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove dell, dell-zm1 and samsung-nc10 models for ALC272 The auto-parser works for these models. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 0c22531db46..6263c012fe4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -103,9 +103,6 @@ ALC662/663/272 asus-mode6 ASUS asus-mode7 ASUS asus-mode8 ASUS - dell Dell with ALC272 - dell-zm1 Dell ZM1 with ALC272 - samsung-nc10 Samsung NC10 mini notebook auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC680 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 46e11ac7947a5be763acf711194b2b3371799441 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 14:30:50 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove acer, acer-aspire and acer-dmic models for ALC268 Moved some code to alc269_quirks.c for dependency, too. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 6 ------ 1 file changed, 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 6263c012fe4..ac2ab9cef5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -60,12 +60,6 @@ ALC267/268 ========== quanta-il1 Quanta IL1 mini-notebook 3stack 3-stack model - toshiba Toshiba A205 - acer Acer laptops - acer-dmic Acer laptops with digital-mic - acer-aspire Acer Aspire One - dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) - zepto Zepto laptops test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y -- cgit v1.2.3 From d62f50dc7c6e4c0974591db25ff116fc412c1735 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 14:47:36 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC269 model=futjisu and Acer Both are supported by the auto-parser. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index ac2ab9cef5f..7f98aa2cd6a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -71,7 +71,6 @@ ALC269 quanta Quanta FL1 laptop-amic Laptops with analog-mic input laptop-dmic Laptops with digital-mic input - fujitsu FSC Amilo lifebook Fujitsu Lifebook S6420 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 24519911673eb5ef3eafcee5d247a52f36347f79 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 15:08:49 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Replace ALC269 quanta and lifebook models with fixups Implement new fixup entries for Quanta FL1 and Fujitsu Lifebook specific COEF and pin configurations. Removed the model entries from alc269_quirks.c. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 2 -- 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 7f98aa2cd6a..e444c0d852a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -68,10 +68,8 @@ ALC267/268 ALC269 ====== basic Basic preset - quanta Quanta FL1 laptop-amic Laptops with analog-mic input laptop-dmic Laptops with digital-mic input - lifebook Fujitsu Lifebook S6420 auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC662/663/272 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6ebb80530b0ed6b2e93f2e6497890b4437807055 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 15:15:40 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC268 model quirks Get rid of the rest of ALC268 model quirks. They are all confirmed to work with the auto-parser, too. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 7 +------ 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index e444c0d852a..b6af77efbee 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -58,12 +58,7 @@ ALC262 ALC267/268 ========== - quanta-il1 Quanta IL1 mini-notebook - 3stack 3-stack model - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can - adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A ALC269 ====== -- cgit v1.2.3 From 664ef2123f4abc05857bf9b2dcccb800fa6fce26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Cesar Eduardo Barros Date: Mon, 15 Aug 2011 19:26:50 -0300 Subject: x86-64, doc: Remove int 0xcc from entry_64.S documentation Commit 3ae36655b97a03fa1decf72f04078ef945647c1a (x86-64: Rework vsyscall emulation and add vsyscall= parameter) removed the special use of the 0xcc IDT vector. Remove it from Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt also. Signed-off-by: Cesar Eduardo Barros Acked-by: Andy Lutomirski Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1313447210-9149-1-git-send-email-cesarb@cesarb.net Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt index 7869f14d055..bc7226ef505 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt @@ -27,9 +27,6 @@ Some of these entries are: magically-generated functions that make their way to do_IRQ with the interrupt number as a parameter. - - emulate_vsyscall: int 0xcc, a special non-ABI entry used by - vsyscall emulation. - - APIC interrupts: Various special-purpose interrupts for things like TLB shootdown. -- cgit v1.2.3 From fbc854027c91fa2813ae7f9de43cc0b5c1119f41 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Lukas Czerner Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 18:08:06 +0200 Subject: ext3: remove deprecated oldalloc For a long time now orlov is the default block allocator in the ext3. It performs better than the old one and no one seems to claim otherwise so we can safely drop it and make oldalloc and orlov mount option deprecated. Signed-off-by: Lukas Czerner Signed-off-by: Jan Kara --- Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt | 8 -------- 1 file changed, 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt index 22f3a0eda1d..b100adc38ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt @@ -73,14 +73,6 @@ nobarrier (*) This also requires an IO stack which can support also be used to enable or disable barriers, for consistency with other ext3 mount options. -orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is - enabled by default. - -oldalloc This disables the Orlov block allocator and enables - the old block allocator. Orlov should have better - performance - we'd like to get some feedback if it's - the contrary for you. - user_xattr Enables Extended User Attributes. Additionally, you need to have extended attribute support enabled in the kernel configuration (CONFIG_EXT3_FS_XATTR). See the -- cgit v1.2.3 From b81693d9149c598302e8eb9c20cb20330d922c8e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jiri Pirko Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 06:29:02 +0000 Subject: net: remove ndo_set_multicast_list callback Remove no longer used operation. Signed-off-by: Jiri Pirko Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt index 87b3d15f523..89358341682 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ dev->hard_start_xmit: has to lock by itself when needed. It is recommended to use a try lock for this and return NETDEV_TX_LOCKED when the spin lock fails. The locking there should also properly protect against - set_multicast_list. Note that the use of NETIF_F_LLTX is deprecated. + set_rx_mode. Note that the use of NETIF_F_LLTX is deprecated. Don't use it for new drivers. Context: Process with BHs disabled or BH (timer), @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ dev->tx_timeout: Context: BHs disabled Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed true -dev->set_multicast_list: +dev->set_rx_mode: Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock. Context: BHs disabled -- cgit v1.2.3 From 243abbf2a610d801904bf1e44917e9ac4ccf823e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "holt@sgi.com" Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 17:32:21 +0000 Subject: flexcan: Fix up fsl-flexcan device tree binding. This patch cleans up the documentation of the device-tree binding for the Flexcan devices on Freescale's PowerPC and ARM cores. Extra properties are not used by the driver so we are removing them. Signed-off-by: Robin Holt Acked-by: Marc Kleine-Budde , Acked-by: Wolfgang Grandegger , Cc: U Bhaskar-B22300 Cc: Scott Wood Cc: Grant Likely Cc: Kumar Gala Cc: socketcan-core@lists.berlios.de, Cc: netdev@vger.kernel.org, Cc: PPC list Cc: devicetree-discuss@lists.ozlabs.org Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- .../devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt | 61 ++++------------------ 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 50 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt index 1a729f08986..8dfb98b6e3e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt @@ -1,61 +1,22 @@ -CAN Device Tree Bindings ------------------------- -2011 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. +Flexcan CAN contoller on Freescale's ARM and PowerPC system-on-a-chip (SOC). -fsl,flexcan-v1.0 nodes ------------------------ -In addition to the required compatible-, reg- and interrupt-properties, you can -also specify which clock source shall be used for the controller. +Required properties: -CPI Clock- Can Protocol Interface Clock - This CLK_SRC bit of CTRL(control register) selects the clock source to - the CAN Protocol Interface(CPI) to be either the peripheral clock - (driven by the PLL) or the crystal oscillator clock. The selected clock - is the one fed to the prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). - The PRESDIV field of CTRL(control register) controls a prescaler that - generates the Serial Clock (Sclock), whose period defines the - time quantum used to compose the CAN waveform. +- compatible : Should be "fsl,-flexcan" -Can Engine Clock Source - There are two sources for CAN clock - - Platform Clock It represents the bus clock - - Oscillator Clock + An implementation should also claim any of the following compatibles + that it is fully backwards compatible with: - Peripheral Clock (PLL) - -------------- - | - --------- ------------- - | |CPI Clock | Prescaler | Sclock - | |---------------->| (1.. 256) |------------> - --------- ------------- - | | - -------------- ---------------------CLK_SRC - Oscillator Clock + - fsl,p1010-flexcan -- fsl,flexcan-clock-source : CAN Engine Clock Source.This property selects - the peripheral clock. PLL clock is fed to the - prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). - Valid values are "oscillator" and "platform" - "oscillator": CAN engine clock source is oscillator clock. - "platform" The CAN engine clock source is the bus clock - (platform clock). +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device +- interrupts : Interrupt tuple for this device -- fsl,flexcan-clock-divider : for the reference and system clock, an additional - clock divider can be specified. -- clock-frequency: frequency required to calculate the bitrate for FlexCAN. +Example: -Note: - - v1.0 of flexcan-v1.0 represent the IP block version for P1010 SOC. - - P1010 does not have oscillator as the Clock Source.So the default - Clock Source is platform clock. -Examples: - - can0@1c000 { - compatible = "fsl,flexcan-v1.0"; + can@1c000 { + compatible = "fsl,p1010-flexcan"; reg = <0x1c000 0x1000>; interrupts = <48 0x2>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; - fsl,flexcan-clock-source = "platform"; - fsl,flexcan-clock-divider = <2>; - clock-frequency = ; }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 97efe9aef1ae8922666d32f28d712745a86859e9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "holt@sgi.com" Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 17:32:23 +0000 Subject: flexcan: Prefer device tree clock frequency if available. If our CAN device's device tree node has a clock-frequency property, then use that value for the can devices clock frequency. If not, fall back to asking the platform/mach code for the clock frequency associated with the flexcan device. Signed-off-by: Robin Holt Acked-by: Wolfgang Grandegger , Cc: Kumar Gala Cc: Marc Kleine-Budde , Cc: U Bhaskar-B22300 Cc: Scott Wood Cc: Grant Likely Cc: socketcan-core@lists.berlios.de, Cc: netdev@vger.kernel.org, Cc: PPC list Cc: devicetree-discuss@lists.ozlabs.org Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt index 8dfb98b6e3e..1ad80d5865a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties: - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device - interrupts : Interrupt tuple for this device +- clock-frequency : The oscillator frequency driving the flexcan device Example: @@ -19,4 +20,5 @@ Example: reg = <0x1c000 0x1000>; interrupts = <48 0x2>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + clock-frequency = <200000000>; // filled in by bootloader }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9fbbc94fe0f0a85d048b74fced3cfca404d78a3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 18 Aug 2011 15:43:38 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC861 uniwill-m31, toshiba, asus and asus-laptop models These are confirmed to work with the auto-parser. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 4 ---- 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index b6af77efbee..12c7ea02e5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -154,10 +154,6 @@ ALC861/660 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF I/O 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660) - uniwill-m31 Uniwill M31 laptop - toshiba Toshiba laptop support - asus Asus laptop support - asus-laptop ASUS F2/F3 laptops auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC861VD/660VD -- cgit v1.2.3 From 91baa2c7170ffaec7d7267923ff025036f4f5c61 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 18 Aug 2011 15:47:37 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Get rid of left-over chunks by previous cleanups Also update the model description, too. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 7 +------ 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 12c7ea02e5d..bb728885882 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -93,8 +93,7 @@ ALC662/663/272 ALC680 ====== - base Base model (ASUS NX90) - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A ALC882/883/885/888/889 ====================== @@ -163,10 +162,6 @@ ALC861VD/660VD 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF OUT 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660VD) 3stack-660-digout 3-jack with SPDIF OUT (for ALC660VD) - lenovo Lenovo 3000 C200 - dallas Dallas laptops - hp HP TX1000 - asus-v1s ASUS V1Sn auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) CMI9880 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2996bdbaa40c52c76ec9b981dfa1c9f3a6191fc3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 18 Aug 2011 16:02:24 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC662 eeepc-p701 and ecs models These are confirmed to work with the auto-parser with pincfg fixups. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 2 -- 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index bb728885882..5a17a52469b 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -74,9 +74,7 @@ ALC662/663/272 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop - eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 - ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo m51va ASUS M51VA g71v ASUS G71V h13 ASUS H13 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 188cd2b5c624880e31b49f93edd2669b51d118f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 19 Aug 2011 09:23:26 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC662 model=levono-101e model quirk Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 5a17a52469b..2df34442fe2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -73,7 +73,6 @@ ALC662/663/272 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF - lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 m51va ASUS M51VA g71v ASUS G71V -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5b1b0b812a7b1a5b968c5d06d90d1cb88621b941 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Fri, 19 Aug 2011 23:49:48 +0200 Subject: PM / Runtime: Add macro to test for runtime PM events This patch (as1482) adds a macro for testing whether or not a pm_message value represents an autosuspend or autoresume (i.e., a runtime PM) event. Encapsulating this notion seems preferable to open-coding the test all over the place. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/usb/power-management.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index c9ffa9ced7e..e8662a5fbc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -439,10 +439,10 @@ cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the driver needs to use the device. External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way, -only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by checking -the PM_EVENT_AUTO bit in the message.event argument to the suspend -method; this bit will be set for internal PM events (autosuspend) and -clear for external PM events. +only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by applying +the PMSG_IS_AUTO() macro to the message argument to the suspend +method; it will return True for internal PM events (autosuspend) and +False for external PM events. Mutual exclusion -- cgit v1.2.3 From 59b699cdee039d75915c354da06937102d1f9a84 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Antonio Quartulli Date: Thu, 7 Jul 2011 15:35:36 +0200 Subject: batman-adv: implement AP-isolation on the receiver side When a node receives a unicast packet it checks if the source and the destination client can communicate or not due to the AP isolation Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli Signed-off-by: Marek Lindner --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh index 748fe1701d2..b02001488ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh @@ -22,6 +22,14 @@ Description: mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU. +What: /sys/class/net//mesh/ap_isolation +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Antonio Quartulli +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going from a + wireless client to another wireless client will be + silently dropped. + What: /sys/class/net//mesh/gw_bandwidth Date: October 2010 Contact: Marek Lindner -- cgit v1.2.3 From 72246da40f3719af3bfd104a2365b32537c27d83 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Felipe Balbi Date: Fri, 19 Aug 2011 18:10:58 +0300 Subject: usb: Introduce DesignWare USB3 DRD Driver The DesignWare USB3 is a highly configurable IP Core which can be instantiated as Dual-Role Device (DRD), Peripheral Only and Host Only (XHCI) configurations. Several other parameters can be configured like amount of FIFO space, amount of TX and RX endpoints, amount of Host Interrupters, etc. The current driver has been validated with a virtual model of version 1.73a of that core and with an FPGA burned with version 1.83a of the DRD core. We have support for PCIe bus, which is used on FPGA prototyping, and for the OMAP5, more adaptation (or glue) layers can be easily added and the driver is half prepared to handle any possible configuration the HW engineer has chosen considering we have the information on one of the GHWPARAMS registers to do runtime checking of certain features. More runtime checks can, and should, be added in order to make this driver even more flexible with regards to number of endpoints, FIFO sizes, transfer types, etc. While this supports only the device side, for now, we will add support for Host side (xHCI - see the updated series Sebastian has sent [1]) and OTG after we have it all stabilized. [1] http://marc.info/?l=linux-usb&m=131341992020339&w=2 Signed-off-by: Felipe Balbi Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt | 53 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 53 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2f658532b9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + TODO +~~~~~~ +Please pick something while reading :) + +- Implement streaming support for BULK endpoints + Tatyana's patch "usb: Add streams support to the gadget framework" + introduces streaming support for the gadget driver. + Every usb_request has new field called stream_id which holds its id. + Every usb_ep has a field num_supported_strms which describes the max + number of streams supported (for this ep). + UAS is AFAIK the only gadget with streaming support. + +- Convert interrupt handler to per-ep-thread-irq + + As it turns out some DWC3-commands ~1ms to complete. Currently we spin + until the command completes which is bad. + + Implementation idea: + - dwc core implements a demultiplexing irq chip for interrupts per + endpoint. The interrupt numbers are allocated during probe and belong + to the device. If MSI provides per-endpoint interrupt this dummy + interrupt chip can be replaced with "real" interrupts. + - interrupts are requested / allocated on usb_ep_enable() and removed on + usb_ep_disable(). Worst case are 32 interrupts, the lower limit is two + for ep0/1. + - dwc3_send_gadget_ep_cmd() will sleep in wait_for_completion_timeout() + until the command completes. + - the interrupt handler is split into the following pieces: + - primary handler of the device + goes through every event and calls generic_handle_irq() for event + it. On return from generic_handle_irq() in acknowledges the event + counter so interrupt goes away (eventually). + + - threaded handler of the device + none + + - primary handler of the EP-interrupt + reads the event and tries to process it. Everything that requries + sleeping is handed over to the Thread. The event is saved in an + per-endpoint data-structure. + We probably have to pay attention not to process events once we + handed something to thread so we don't process event X prio Y + where X > Y. + + - threaded handler of the EP-interrupt + handles the remaining EP work which might sleep such as waiting + for command completion. + + Latency: + There should be no increase in latency since the interrupt-thread has a + high priority and will be run before an average task in user land + (except the user changed priorities). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 86028619b9f653a30f5aa0d331fdedd899a1eea5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bart Van Assche Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 18:42:22 +0200 Subject: docs/sysfs: Specify ABI documentation requirements Although it is expected nowadays that every new sysfs attribute is documented under Documentation/ABI, this is not yet mentioned in the kernel documentation. This patch adds a note in the sysfs documentation about that requirement. Signed-off-by: Bart Van Assche Cc: Andrew Morton Cc: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt | 10 +++++++++- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 597f728e7b4..07235caec22 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ sysfs - _The_ filesystem for exporting kernel objects. Patrick Mochel Mike Murphy -Revised: 15 July 2010 +Revised: 16 August 2011 Original: 10 January 2003 @@ -370,3 +370,11 @@ int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *); void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *); +Documentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The sysfs directory structure and the attributes in each directory define an +ABI between the kernel and user space. As for any ABI, it is important that +this ABI is stable and properly documented. All new sysfs attributes must be +documented in Documentation/ABI. See also Documentation/ABI/README for more +information. -- cgit v1.2.3 From cb4e482415a2fd09e75a33516b8578ec6885240d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 17:34:25 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove all ALC861 and ALC861-VD quirks Let's remove the rest of ALC861 and ALC861-VD quirks. If any breakage is found, it can be fixed easily via the pin-config table update. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 13 ++----------- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 2df34442fe2..4161fb0e630 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -146,20 +146,11 @@ ALC882/883/885/888/889 ALC861/660 ========== - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF I/O - 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660) - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A ALC861VD/660VD ============== - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF OUT - 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF OUT - 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660VD) - 3stack-660-digout 3-jack with SPDIF OUT (for ALC660VD) - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + N/A CMI9880 ======= -- cgit v1.2.3 From a4297b5db0da0122d932969caf1108e3442c677e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 18:40:12 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Rewrite ALC269 laptop-amic,dmic,&co quirks with fixups Similarly like ALC662 asus-mode* models, rewrite the laptop-amic and dmic models with the static pin-config tables. Now we can get rid of all alc269_quirks.c. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 2 -- 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 4161fb0e630..fbec67f29a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -62,10 +62,8 @@ ALC267/268 ALC269 ====== - basic Basic preset laptop-amic Laptops with analog-mic input laptop-dmic Laptops with digital-mic input - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC662/663/272 ============== -- cgit v1.2.3 From 14a8d47d4e9f51372996914c16bdbf1c34e209b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jamie Iles Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 17:47:47 +0100 Subject: tty: of_serial: add support for the DesignWare 8250 Support the DesignWare 8250 by a new compatible string and registering the DesignWare helpers. If the registration of the helpers fails, then continue as a normal 8250 as we may still get some useful debug out. Cc: Alan Cox Cc: Arnd Bergmann Signed-off-by: Jamie Iles Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt index b8b27b0aca1..b7ceaaa7602 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt @@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : one of: - "ns8250" + - "ns8250dw" - "ns16450" - "ns16550a" - "ns16550" -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3a7bda830fad427768ed71c0ebf3448849c006b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dave Jiang Date: Fri, 29 Jul 2011 17:17:00 -0700 Subject: [SCSI] isci: Adding documentation to API change and fixup sysfs registration Adding API update for adding isci_id entry scsi_host sysfs entry. Also fixing up the sysfs registration to the scsi_host template Signed-off-by: Dave Jiang Signed-off-by: Dan Williams Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-scsi_host | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-scsi_host (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-scsi_host b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-scsi_host new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..29a4f892e43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-scsi_host @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +What: /sys/class/scsi_host/hostX/isci_id +Date: June 2011 +Contact: Dave Jiang +Description: + This file contains the enumerated host ID for the Intel + SCU controller. The Intel(R) C600 Series Chipset SATA/SAS + Storage Control Unit embeds up to two 4-port controllers in + a single PCI device. The controllers are enumerated in order + which usually means the lowest number scsi_host corresponds + with the first controller, but this association is not + guaranteed. The 'isci_id' attribute unambiguously identifies + the controller index: '0' for the first controller, + '1' for the second. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5e8e1a9b05ccad82ac48cf63c8f96ff42f53f561 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 10:43:36 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC662 ASUS M51VA, G71V, H13 and G50V model quirks These models work now with the BIOS auto-parser, so let's drop them. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 4 ---- 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index fbec67f29a1..57e80eb78d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -72,10 +72,6 @@ ALC662/663/272 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 - m51va ASUS M51VA - g71v ASUS G71V - h13 ASUS H13 - g50v ASUS G50V asus-mode1 ASUS asus-mode2 ASUS asus-mode3 ASUS -- cgit v1.2.3 From d3189545ee69527e949769b89a4cbb331de97b4a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stuart Hopkins Date: Sun, 21 Aug 2011 13:34:17 -0700 Subject: udlfb: Add module option to do without shadow framebuffer By default, udlfb allocates a 2nd buffer to shadow what's across the bus on the USB device. It can operate without this shadow, but then it cannot tell which pixels have changed, and must send all. Saves host memory, but worsens the USB 2.0 bus bottleneck. This option allows users in very low memory situations (e.g. bifferboard) to optionally turn off this shadow framebuffer. Signed-off-by: Stuart Hopkins Signed-off-by: Bernie Thompson Signed-off-by: Florian Tobias Schandinat --- Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt index 7fdde2a02a2..473ceed9e4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -105,6 +105,11 @@ console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the user wants in the case of USB displays. +shadow Allocate a 2nd framebuffer to shadow what's currently across + the USB bus in device memory. If any pixels are unchanged, + do not transmit. Spends host memory to save USB transfers. + Enabled by default. Only disable on very low memory systems. + Sysfs Attributes ================ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9f811b72c669e29f8c01e258d912254065e58f11 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bernie Thompson Date: Sun, 21 Aug 2011 13:35:38 -0700 Subject: udlfb: Enable fb_defio by default Enables page fault based detection of mmap writes to the framebuffer, which allows standard fbdev apps (like the generic fbdev xorg driver) to work on DisplayLink devices. Not all bugs are shaken out of the fb_defio path of udlfb, but it's tantalizingly close, so this seems a good time to enable by default. Alternatively, option can be disabled when running with an xorg driver that can more directly communicate damaged regions of the framebuffer via IOCTL. This is a simpler, higher perf option, when available. Signed-off-by: Bernie Thompson Signed-off-by: Florian Tobias Schandinat --- Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt | 24 ++++++++++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt index 473ceed9e4e..c6d90a6fb90 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -87,20 +87,28 @@ Special configuration for udlfb is usually unnecessary. There are a few options, however. From the command line, pass options to modprobe -modprobe udlfb defio=1 console=1 +modprobe udlfb fb_defio=0 console=1 shadow=1 -Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/options with text -options udlfb defio=1 console=1 +Or modify options on the fly at /sys/module/udlfb/parameters directory via +sudo nano fb_defio +change the parameter in place, and save the file. -Accepted options: +Unplug/replug USB device to apply with new settings + +Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/udlfb.conf with text +options udlfb fb_defio=0 console=1 shadow=1 + +Accepted boolean options: fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel module to track changed areas of the framebuffer by page faults. - Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not - report damage, may be able to work with this enabled. - Disabled by default because of overhead and other issues. + Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not + report damage, should be able to work with this enabled. + Disable when running with X server that supports reporting + changed regions via ioctl, as this method is simpler, + more stable, and higher performance. -console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This +console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This is disabled by default because fbcon will aggressively consume the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the user wants in the case of USB displays. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4aa7faffe44bda5db54c214f5b3f789ec805cb9b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bernie Thompson Date: Sun, 21 Aug 2011 13:35:39 -0700 Subject: udlfb: Enable fbcon access to framebuffer by default Signed-off-by: Bernie Thompson Signed-off-by: Florian Tobias Schandinat --- Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt index c6d90a6fb90..57d2f2908b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -107,16 +107,18 @@ fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel Disable when running with X server that supports reporting changed regions via ioctl, as this method is simpler, more stable, and higher performance. + default: fb_defio=1 -console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This - is disabled by default because fbcon will aggressively consume - the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the - user wants in the case of USB displays. +console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. + Can be disabled if fbcon and other clients + (e.g. X with --shared-vt) are in conflict. + default: console=1 shadow Allocate a 2nd framebuffer to shadow what's currently across the USB bus in device memory. If any pixels are unchanged, do not transmit. Spends host memory to save USB transfers. Enabled by default. Only disable on very low memory systems. + default: shadow=1 Sysfs Attributes ================ -- cgit v1.2.3 From e92d4b08d756e11f89a5d7e7d45a3ab9387bd25a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 16:22:21 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Rewrite Lenovo X200 quirk with pincfg-fix using auto-parser Introduce the pincfg table to patch_conexant.c for fixing up the extra pin-configuration for auto-parser. As an example, Lenovo X200 model is replaced with this new mechanism. (This also fixes the wrong mixer elements for docking-station I/O in the previous model quirk automagically.) Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 57e80eb78d7..708543699f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -237,7 +237,6 @@ Conexant 5051 hp-dv6736 HP dv6736 hp-f700 HP Compaq Presario F700 ideapad Lenovo IdeaPad laptop - lenovo-x200 Lenovo X200 laptop toshiba Toshiba Satellite M300 Conexant 5066 -- cgit v1.2.3 From a9b36153a4f75c2977271578df8a82715e803c17 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 18:05:06 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove ALC662 ASUS eeepc-ep20 model quirk Since the recent fixes, this device works with the auto-parser well. Let's kill it. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 708543699f7..8bd5034c9a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -71,7 +71,6 @@ ALC662/663/272 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF - eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 asus-mode1 ASUS asus-mode2 ASUS asus-mode3 ASUS -- cgit v1.2.3 From b9c5106cd26867c2c4e00200f8df8e0f9ce8ec4f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 18:08:07 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Remove the rest of ALC662 quirks The rest of ALC662 quirks are only for desktops, and they should work with the auto-parser. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 5 ----- 1 file changed, 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 8bd5034c9a4..4f3443230d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -67,10 +67,6 @@ ALC269 ALC662/663/272 ============== - 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF - 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) - 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF - 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF asus-mode1 ASUS asus-mode2 ASUS asus-mode3 ASUS @@ -79,7 +75,6 @@ ALC662/663/272 asus-mode6 ASUS asus-mode7 ASUS asus-mode8 ASUS - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC680 ====== -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0b37004dd0113db3b23840b4fd8835dae2395acc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Greg Kroah-Hartman Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 15:24:54 -0700 Subject: Revert "tty: of_serial: add support for the DesignWare 8250" This reverts commit 14a8d47d4e9f51372996914c16bdbf1c34e209b5. It causes a build error that needs to be resolved differently. Cc: Alan Cox Cc: Arnd Bergmann Cc: Jamie Iles Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt index b7ceaaa7602..b8b27b0aca1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/of-serial.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : one of: - "ns8250" - - "ns8250dw" - "ns16450" - "ns16550a" - "ns16550" -- cgit v1.2.3 From 83cac9f3b45ba8e99c5305be42c67f1c83adf0aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bernhard Roth Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 09:48:23 +0200 Subject: atmel_serial: RS485: receiving enabled when sending data By default the atmel_serial driver in RS485 mode disables receiving data until all data in the send buffer has been sent. This flag allows to receive data even whilst sending data. Signed-off-by: Bernhard Roth Signed-off-by: Claudio Scordino Acked-by: Alan Cox Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt index a4932387bbf..c8878f821d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -104,6 +104,9 @@ rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; + /* Set this flag if you want to receive data even whilst sending data */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RX_DURING_TX; + if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) { /* Error handling. See errno. */ } -- cgit v1.2.3 From d58cb9cc8a46c9e539cbf8007cd5ede3c09c3524 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bart Van Assche Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 19:27:27 +0200 Subject: docs/driver-model: Document device.groups Several drivers use device_create_file() where device.groups should be used instead. This patch documents that and also removes the comments about device classes since these should not be used in new code in the way documented until now in Documentation/driver-model/device.txt. Signed-off-by: Bart Van Assche Cc: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/driver-model/device.txt | 65 +++++++++++++++++------------------ 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 33 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt index bdefe728a73..1e70220d20f 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt @@ -45,33 +45,52 @@ struct device_attribute { const char *buf, size_t count); }; -Attributes of devices can be exported via drivers using a simple -procfs-like interface. +Attributes of devices can be exported by a device driver through sysfs. Please see Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt for more information on how sysfs works. +As explained in Documentation/kobject.txt, device attributes must be be +created before the KOBJ_ADD uevent is generated. The only way to realize +that is by defining an attribute group. + Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR: #define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store) Example: -DEVICE_ATTR(power,0644,show_power,store_power); +static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL); +static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power); -This declares a structure of type struct device_attribute named -'dev_attr_power'. This can then be added and removed to the device's -directory using: +This declares two structures of type struct device_attribute with respective +names 'dev_attr_type' and 'dev_attr_power'. These two attributes can be +organized as follows into a group: -int device_create_file(struct device *device, struct device_attribute * entry); -void device_remove_file(struct device * dev, struct device_attribute * attr); +static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = { + &dev_attr_type.attr, + &dev_attr_power.attr, + NULL, +}; -Example: +static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = { + .attrs = dev_attrs, +}; + +static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = { + &dev_attr_group, + NULL, +}; + +This array of groups can then be associated with a device by setting the +group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked: -device_create_file(dev,&dev_attr_power); -device_remove_file(dev,&dev_attr_power); + dev->groups = dev_attr_groups; + device_register(dev); -The file name will be 'power' with a mode of 0644 (-rw-r--r--). +The device_register() function will use the 'groups' pointer to create the +device attributes and the device_unregister() function will use this pointer +to remove the device attributes. Word of warning: While the kernel allows device_create_file() and device_remove_file() to be called on a device at any time, userspace has @@ -84,24 +103,4 @@ not know about the new attributes. This is important for device driver that need to publish additional attributes for a device at driver probe time. If the device driver simply calls device_create_file() on the device structure passed to it, then -userspace will never be notified of the new attributes. Instead, it should -probably use class_create() and class->dev_attrs to set up a list of -desired attributes in the modules_init function, and then in the .probe() -hook, and then use device_create() to create a new device as a child -of the probed device. The new device will generate a new uevent and -properly advertise the new attributes to userspace. - -For example, if a driver wanted to add the following attributes: -struct device_attribute mydriver_attribs[] = { - __ATTR(port_count, 0444, port_count_show), - __ATTR(serial_number, 0444, serial_number_show), - NULL -}; - -Then in the module init function is would do: - mydriver_class = class_create(THIS_MODULE, "my_attrs"); - mydriver_class.dev_attr = mydriver_attribs; - -And assuming 'dev' is the struct device passed into the probe hook, the driver -probe function would do something like: - device_create(&mydriver_class, dev, chrdev, &private_data, "my_name"); +userspace will never be notified of the new attributes. -- cgit v1.2.3 From b7565fa3a4b84460ce1765cc468700a6bfd82746 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bart Van Assche Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 19:28:43 +0200 Subject: docs/driver-model: Update device class docs The driver model documentation was added to the kernel tree before struct class was added to . Hence this patch that updates the paragraph about struct class in Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt. Signed-off-by: Bart Van Assche Cc: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt | 4 ---- 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt index f7ec9d625bf..abfc8e290d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt @@ -48,10 +48,6 @@ devclass_add_device is called to enumerate the device within the class and actually register it with the class, which happens with the class's register_dev callback. -NOTE: The device class structures and core routines to manipulate them -are not in the mainline kernel, so the discussion is still a bit -speculative. - Driver ~~~~~~ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 242d621964dd8641df53f7d51d4c6ead655cc5a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Christoph Hellwig Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2011 05:57:51 +0000 Subject: xfs: deprecate the nodelaylog mount option Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig Reviewed-by: Dave Chinner Signed-off-by: Alex Elder --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index c4a6e148732..4dc46547766 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -592,3 +592,11 @@ Why: In 3.0, we can now autodetect internal 3G device and already have interface that was used by acer-wmi driver. It will replaced by information log when acer-wmi initial. Who: Lee, Chun-Yi + +---------------------------- +What: The XFS nodelaylog mount option +When: 3.3 +Why: The delaylog mode that has been the default since 2.6.39 has proven + stable, and the old code is in the way of additional improvements in + the log code. +Who: Christoph Hellwig -- cgit v1.2.3 From a78f6787a3dd7223bf185895fdcea661b408dc0a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 17:18:08 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Eradicate inappropriate uses of the future tense Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 50 +++++++++++++++++++++--------------------- 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index c2791589397..0527ff2be37 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ existing drivers. - First, we'll go over some typical driver initialization + First, we go over some typical driver initialization requirements, like setting up command buffers, creating an initial output configuration, and initializing core services. - Subsequent sections will cover core internals in more detail, + Subsequent sections cover core internals in more detail, providing implementation notes and examples. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_driver. Drivers - will typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure, + typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure, then pass it to drm_init() at load time. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ In the example above, taken from the i915 DRM driver, the driver sets several flags indicating what core features it supports. - We'll go over the individual callbacks in later sections. Since + We go over the individual callbacks in later sections. Since flags indicate which features your driver supports to the DRM core, you need to set most of them prior to calling drm_init(). Some, like DRIVER_MODESET can be set later based on user supplied parameters, @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ In this specific case, the driver requires AGP and supports - IRQs. DMA, as we'll see, is handled by device specific ioctls + IRQs. DMA, as discussed later, is handled by device specific ioctls in this case. It also supports the kernel mode setting APIs, though unlike in the actual i915 driver source, this example unconditionally exports KMS capability. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Configuring the device - Obviously, device configuration will be device specific. + Obviously, device configuration is device specific. However, there are several common operations: finding a device's PCI resources, mapping them, and potentially setting up an IRQ handler. @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ drm_get_resource_len() can be used to find BARs on the given drm_device struct. Once those values have been retrieved, the driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new - mapping for the BAR in question. Note you'll probably want a + mapping for the BAR in question. Note you probably want a drm_local_map_t in your driver private structure to track any mappings you create. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ - Once your interrupt handler is registered (it'll use your + Once your interrupt handler is registered (it uses your drm_driver.irq_handler as the actual interrupt handling function), you can safely enable interrupts on your device, assuming any other state your interrupt handler uses is also @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ should support a memory manager. - If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you'll + If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you need to set that up at load time as well. How you initialize it depends on which memory manager you're using, TTM or GEM. @@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ have a type of TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_MEM. The size field for the global object should be sizeof(struct ttm_mem_global), and the init and release hooks should point at your driver specific init and - release routines, which will probably eventually call + release routines, which probably eventually call ttm_mem_global_init and ttm_mem_global_release respectively. Once your global TTM accounting structure is set up and initialized (done by calling ttm_global_item_ref on the global object you - just created), you'll need to create a buffer object TTM to + just created), you need to create a buffer object TTM to provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the kernel itself. The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO, and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global). Again, @@ -455,8 +455,8 @@ than TTM, but has no VRAM management capability. Core GEM initialization is comprised of a basic drm_mm_init call to create a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for - object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver will - need to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following + object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver + needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following basic GEM initialization. Most UMA devices have a so-called "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the @@ -464,16 +464,16 @@ be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object. - Initialization will be driver specific, and will depend on + Initialization is driver specific, and depends on the architecture of the device. In the case of Intel integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can be done by calling the internal GEM init function, i915_gem_do_init(). Since the 965GM is a UMA device - (i.e. it doesn't have dedicated VRAM), GEM will manage + (i.e. it doesn't have dedicated VRAM), GEM manages making regular RAM available for GPU operations. Memory set aside by the BIOS (called "stolen" memory by the i915 - driver) will be managed by the DRM memrange allocator; the - rest of the aperture will be managed by GEM. + driver) is managed by the DRM memrange allocator; the + rest of the aperture is managed by GEM. /* Basic memrange allocator for stolen space (aka vram) */ drm_memrange_init(&dev_priv->vram, 0, prealloc_size); @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL should be called by application level drivers before and after mode setting, since on many devices the - vertical blank counter will be reset at that time. Internally, + vertical blank counter is reset at that time. Internally, the DRM snapshots the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go backwards (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used). @@ -632,8 +632,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) register. The enable and disable vblank callbacks should enable and disable vertical blank interrupts, respectively. In the absence of DRM clients waiting on vblank events, the core DRM - code will use the disable_vblank() function to disable - interrupts, which saves power. They'll be re-enabled again when + code uses the disable_vblank() function to disable + interrupts, which saves power. They are re-enabled again when a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above. @@ -699,14 +699,14 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy, i.e. an active render target; in that case the set domain function - will block the client and wait for rendering to complete before + blocks the client and waits for rendering to complete before performing any necessary flushing operations). Perhaps the most important GEM function is providing a command execution interface to clients. Client programs construct command buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects - and submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM will take care to bind + and submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM takes care to bind all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers. This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding @@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) In order to set a mode on a given CRTC, encoder and connector configuration, clients need to provide a framebuffer object which - will provide a source of pixels for the CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) + provides a source of pixels for the CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) and ultimately the connector(s) in the configuration. A framebuffer is fundamentally a driver specific memory object, made into an opaque handle by the DRM addfb function. Once an fb has been created this @@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers wanting full suspend/resume support should provide save() and - restore() functions. These will be called at suspend, + restore() functions. These are called at suspend, hibernate, or resume time, and should perform any state save or restore required by your device across suspend or hibernate states. @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here. Only need high - level info, since man pages will cover the rest. + level info, since man pages should cover the rest. -- cgit v1.2.3 From f11aca045c165b9d4c9c4fce29f51ec24bcf64d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 17:21:31 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: can -> may Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 20 ++++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 0527ff2be37..b9079386040 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ The Linux DRM layer contains code intended to support the needs of complex graphics devices, usually containing programmable pipelines well suited to 3D graphics acceleration. Graphics - drivers in the kernel can make use of DRM functions to make + drivers in the kernel may make use of DRM functions to make tasks like memory management, interrupt handling and DMA easier, and provide a uniform interface to applications. @@ -293,12 +293,12 @@ can be used for tracking various device specific bits of information, like register offsets, command buffer status, register state for suspend/resume, etc. At load time, a - driver can simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv + driver may simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv appropriately; at unload the driver can free it and set drm_device.dev_priv to NULL. - The DRM supports several counters which can be used for rough + The DRM supports several counters which may be used for rough performance characterization. Note that the DRM stat counter system is not often used by applications, and supporting additional counters is completely optional. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Finding & mapping resources is fairly straightforward. The DRM wrapper functions, drm_get_resource_start() and - drm_get_resource_len() can be used to find BARs on the given + drm_get_resource_len() may be used to find BARs on the given drm_device struct. Once those values have been retrieved, the driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new mapping for the BAR in question. Note you probably want a @@ -335,12 +335,12 @@ if compatibility with other operating systems isn't a concern (DRM drivers can run under various BSD variants and OpenSolaris), - native Linux calls can be used for the above, e.g. pci_resource_* + native Linux calls may be used for the above, e.g. pci_resource_* and iomap*/iounmap. See the Linux device driver book for more info. - Once you have a register map, you can use the DRM_READn() and + Once you have a register map, you may use the DRM_READn() and DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or use driver specific versions to offset into your MMIO space relative to a driver specific base pointer (see I915_READ for @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the kernel itself. The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO, and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global). Again, - driver specific init and release functions can be provided, + driver specific init and release functions may be provided, likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init and ttm_bo_global_release, respectively. Also like the previous object, ttm_global_item_ref is used to create an initial reference @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ - Once the memory manager has been set up, we can allocate the + Once the memory manager has been set up, we may allocate the command buffer. In the i915 case, this is also done with a GEM function, i915_gem_init_ringbuffer(). @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) devices with PC-style architectures (i.e. a set of display planes for feeding pixels to encoders which are in turn routed to connectors). Devices with more complex requirements needing - finer grained management can opt to use the core callbacks + finer grained management may opt to use the core callbacks directly. @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above. - Devices that don't provide a count register can simply use an + Devices that don't provide a count register may simply use an internal atomic counter incremented on every vertical blank interrupt, and can make their enable and disable vblank functions into no-ops. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7d4008ebb1c971ce4baf57e45993690b0fa6d9f9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jamie Iles Date: Fri, 26 Aug 2011 19:04:50 +0100 Subject: tty: add a DesignWare 8250 driver The Synopsys DesignWare 8250 is an 8250 that has an extra interrupt that gets raised when writing to the LCR when busy. To handle this we need special serial_out, serial_in and handle_irq methods. Add a new platform driver that uses these accessors. Cc: Alan Cox Cc: Arnd Bergmann Signed-off-by: Jamie Iles Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- .../bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt | 25 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f13f1c5be91 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/snps-dw-apb-uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : "snps,dw-apb-uart" +- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts : should contain uart interrupt. +- clock-frequency : the input clock frequency for the UART. + +Optional properties: +- reg-shift : quantity to shift the register offsets by. If this property is + not present then the register offsets are not shifted. +- reg-io-width : the size (in bytes) of the IO accesses that should be + performed on the device. If this property is not present then single byte + accesses are used. + +Example: + + uart@80230000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x80230000 0x100>; + clock-frequency = <3686400>; + interrupts = <10>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 52cb3e2757baefddaa159c3d3157a2c4a9e5f694 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Malcolm Priestley Date: Mon, 25 Jul 2011 15:34:45 -0300 Subject: [media] it9137: Fimrware retrival information for Kworld UB499-2T T09 (id 1b80:e409) Firmware information for Kworld UB499-2T T09 based on IT913x series. This device uses file dvb-usb-it9137-01.fw. Signed-off-by: Malcolm Priestley Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt | 9 +++++++++ 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt b/Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9e6726eead9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dvb/it9137.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +To extract firmware for Kworld UB499-2T (id 1b80:e409) you need to copy the +following file(s) to this directory. + +IT9135BDA.sys Dated Mon 22 Mar 2010 02:20:08 GMT + +extract using dd +dd if=IT9135BDA.sys ibs=1 skip=69632 count=5731 of=dvb-usb-it9137-01.fw + +copy to default firmware location. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3188d5485e8a0650fd877a54ada70581c29cd505 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benjamin Larsson Date: Wed, 27 Jul 2011 08:43:38 -0300 Subject: [media] get_dvb_firmware: Firmware extraction for IT9135 based devices Signed-off-by: Benjamin Larsson Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware | 23 ++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 22 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index c466f5831f1..65ebe20b4b8 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -27,7 +27,8 @@ use IO::Handle; "or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird", "opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718", "af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395", - "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5"); + "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5", + "it9135" ); # Check args syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1); @@ -665,6 +666,26 @@ sub drxk_terratec_h5 { "$fwfile" } +sub it9135 { + my $url = "http://kworld.server261.com/kworld/CD/ITE_TiVme/V1.00/"; + my $zipfile = "Driver_V10.323.1.0412.100412.zip"; + my $hash = "79b597dc648698ed6820845c0c9d0d37"; + my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 0); + my $drvfile = "Driver_V10.323.1.0412.100412/Data/x86/IT9135BDA.sys"; + my $fwfile = "dvb-usb-it9137-01.fw"; + + checkstandard(); + + wgetfile($zipfile, $url . $zipfile); + verify($zipfile, $hash); + unzip($zipfile, $tmpdir); + extract("$tmpdir/$drvfile", 69632, 5731, "$fwfile"); + + "$fwfile" +} + + + # --------------------------------------------------------------- # Utilities -- cgit v1.2.3 From a72c5e5eb738033938ab30d6a634b74d1d060f10 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nao Nishijima Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:04:06 +0900 Subject: [SCSI] genhd: add a new attribute "alias" in gendisk This patch allows the user to set an "alias" of the disk via sysfs interface. This patch only adds a new attribute "alias" in gendisk structure. To show the alias instead of the device name in kernel messages, we need to revise printk messages and use alias_name() in them. Example: (current) printk("disk name is %s\n", disk->disk_name); (new) printk("disk name is %s\n", alias_name(disk)); Users can use alphabets, numbers, '-' and '_' in "alias" attribute. A disk can have an "alias" which length is up to 255 bytes. This attribute is write-once. Suggested-by: James Bottomley Suggested-by: Jon Masters Signed-off-by: Nao Nishijima Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index c1eb41cb987..2b5d56127fc 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -206,3 +206,16 @@ Description: when a discarded area is read the discard_zeroes_data parameter will be set to one. Otherwise it will be 0 and the result of reading a discarded area is undefined. +What: /sys/block//alias +Date: Aug 2011 +Contact: Nao Nishijima +Description: + A raw device name of a disk does not always point a same disk + each boot-up time. Therefore, users have to use persistent + device names, which udev creates when the kernel finds a disk, + instead of raw device name. However, kernel doesn't show those + persistent names on its messages (e.g. dmesg). + This file can store an alias of the disk and it would be + appeared in kernel messages if it is set. A disk can have an + alias which length is up to 255bytes. Users can use alphabets, + numbers, "-" and "_" in alias name. This file is writeonce. -- cgit v1.2.3 From eab00a0da292fa7118aaf20da78e834866de00ae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sakari Ailus Date: Mon, 18 Jul 2011 08:40:03 -0300 Subject: [media] v4l: events: Define V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC Define a frame sync event to tell user space when the reception of a frame starts. Signed-off-by: Sakari Ailus Acked-by: Laurent Pinchart Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml | 22 ++++++++++++++++++++++ .../DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 38 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml index 5200b687465..e8714aa1643 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml @@ -86,6 +86,12 @@ Event data for event V4L2_EVENT_CTRL. + + + &v4l2-event-frame-sync; + frame + Event data for event V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC. + __u8 @@ -220,6 +226,22 @@ + + struct <structname>v4l2_event_frame_sync</structname> + + &cs-str; + + + __u32 + frame_sequence + + The sequence number of the frame being received. + + + + +
+ Changes diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml index 275be9689d8..5c70b616d81 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml @@ -138,6 +138,22 @@ field of the oldest event. + + V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC + 4 + + Triggered immediately when the reception of a + frame has begun. This event has a + &v4l2-event-frame-sync; associated with it. + + If the hardware needs to be stopped in the case of a + buffer underrun it might not be able to generate this event. + In such cases the frame_sequence + field in &v4l2-event-frame-sync; will not be incremented. This + causes two consecutive frame sequence numbers to have n times + frame interval in between them. + + V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START 0x08000000 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 69d232ae8e95a229e7544989d6014e875deeb121 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sakari Ailus Date: Wed, 15 Jun 2011 15:58:48 -0300 Subject: [media] omap3isp: ccdc: Use generic frame sync event instead of private HS_VS event The ccdc block in the omap3isp produces events whenever it starts receiving a new frame. A private HS_VS event was used for this previously. Now, the generic V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC event is being used for the purpose. This patch also provides the frame sequence number to user space. Signed-off-by: Sakari Ailus Acked-by: Laurent Pinchart Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt index 69be2c782b9..5dd1439b61f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/omap3isp.txt @@ -70,10 +70,11 @@ Events The OMAP 3 ISP driver does support the V4L2 event interface on CCDC and statistics (AEWB, AF and histogram) subdevs. -The CCDC subdev produces V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_HS_VS type event on HS_VS -interrupt which is used to signal frame start. The event is triggered exactly -when the reception of the first line of the frame starts in the CCDC module. -The event can be subscribed on the CCDC subdev. +The CCDC subdev produces V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC type event on HS_VS +interrupt which is used to signal frame start. Earlier version of this +driver used V4L2_EVENT_OMAP3ISP_HS_VS for this purpose. The event is +triggered exactly when the reception of the first line of the frame starts +in the CCDC module. The event can be subscribed on the CCDC subdev. (When using parallel interface one must pay account to correct configuration of the VS signal polarity. This is automatically correct when using the serial -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0c54781bc5aaec1e23bc50a4ef757b8e8bfc693b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 17:55:54 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Clean up code comment Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index b9079386040..4ddc9992866 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ static struct drm_driver driver = { - /* don't use mtrr's here, the Xserver or user space app should - * deal with them for intel hardware. + /* Don't use MTRRs here; the Xserver or userspace app should + * deal with them for Intel hardware. */ .driver_features = DRIVER_USE_AGP | DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP | -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2c267e9e016da3e19a95261875a5f3b19dd6e9f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:10:12 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use a semicolon Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 4ddc9992866..aa13e088351 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -154,8 +154,8 @@ In the example above, taken from the i915 DRM driver, the driver - sets several flags indicating what core features it supports. - We go over the individual callbacks in later sections. Since + sets several flags indicating what core features it supports; + we go over the individual callbacks in later sections. Since flags indicate which features your driver supports to the DRM core, you need to set most of them prior to calling drm_init(). Some, like DRIVER_MODESET can be set later based on user supplied parameters, @@ -647,8 +647,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Memory management - The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations, and - is also required to support advanced client features like OpenGL + The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations; it + is required to support advanced client features like OpenGL pbuffers. The DRM currently contains two memory managers, TTM and GEM. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 02391f1fe7b4e5434e4c558dcae99b9368c84bf3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:20:54 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: a -> an Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index aa13e088351..5b815b83c30 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ DRIVER_HAVE_IRQDRIVER_IRQ_SHARED - DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has a IRQ + DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ handler, DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of PCI drivers). -- cgit v1.2.3 From b1f95bdc1eb10e3d3c8a85b2f0bc08fa6c08ae5d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:21:29 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: , -> . Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 5b815b83c30..a0f0f984f04 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has an IRQ - handler, DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & + handler. DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device & handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of PCI drivers). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 80c84e6f3c2c707ccb5d7b500e25bda69f0e1895 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:23:21 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Move `should be set' to the beginning of the sentence Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index a0f0f984f04..42368f4f7ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -214,8 +214,8 @@ DRIVER_DMA_QUEUE - If the driver queues DMA requests and completes them - asynchronously, this flag should be set. Deprecated. + Should be set if the driver queues DMA requests and completes them + asynchronously. Deprecated. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 58f1d652def02db0bdcdf03d01f3483fc18ec392 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:31:42 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Clean up `pre-memory management aware' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 42368f4f7ba..e9242c09ac5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ conflict with DRM client requirements. For instance, if user level mode setting drivers are in use, it would be problematic to perform output discovery & configuration at load time. - Likewise, if pre-memory management aware user level drivers are + Likewise, if user-level drivers unaware of memory management are in use, memory management and command buffer setup may need to be omitted. These requirements are driver specific, and care needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and -- cgit v1.2.3 From 75aa9df5a2bf2ae90a1f0f6f283278f634ca4233 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:34:49 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Rearrange wording to make more sense Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index e9242c09ac5..eb28cc02d41 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -281,9 +281,9 @@ module parameter to control whether advanced features are enabled at load time or in legacy fashion. If compatibility is a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over to the new interfaces - from the old ones), care must be taken to prevent incompatible - device initialization and control with the currently active - userspace drivers. + from the old ones), care must be taken to prevent device + initialization and control that is incompatible with + currently active userspace drivers. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6e375f44b6073dd320895753ff05cbfd3f410f66 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:37:05 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Replace the paragraph's first sentence with its last sentence Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 12 +++++------- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index eb28cc02d41..9eda9b6df51 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -269,8 +269,10 @@ initial output configuration. - Note that the tasks performed at driver load time must not - conflict with DRM client requirements. For instance, if user + If compatibility is a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over + to the new interfaces from the old ones), care must be taken to + prevent device initialization and control that is incompatible with + currently active userspace drivers. For instance, if user level mode setting drivers are in use, it would be problematic to perform output discovery & configuration at load time. Likewise, if user-level drivers unaware of memory management are @@ -279,11 +281,7 @@ needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and libraries working. The i915 driver supports the "modeset" module parameter to control whether advanced features are - enabled at load time or in legacy fashion. If compatibility is - a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over to the new interfaces - from the old ones), care must be taken to prevent device - initialization and control that is incompatible with - currently active userspace drivers. + enabled at load time or in legacy fashion. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 06fa7b8066d4dc3f6c9d4c4bf34f385d5a823f13 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:40:55 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Better wording Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 9eda9b6df51..b4196c1a239 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -292,8 +292,8 @@ information, like register offsets, command buffer status, register state for suspend/resume, etc. At load time, a driver may simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv - appropriately; at unload the driver can free it and set - drm_device.dev_priv to NULL. + appropriately; it should be freed and drm_device.dev_priv set + to NULL when the driver is unloaded. The DRM supports several counters which may be used for rough -- cgit v1.2.3 From 57a15fd663d6680dc100a537f0ed328993c33af2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:42:36 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Clearer wording with `for consumption by' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index b4196c1a239..33290e3e3ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -305,8 +305,8 @@ These interfaces are deprecated and should not be used. If performance monitoring is desired, the developer should investigate and potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing infrastructure to export - GPU related performance information to performance monitoring - tools and applications. + GPU related performance information for consumption by performance + monitoring tools and applications. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8814630f0b59421e558f4403b79f5dc3a025a386 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:46:10 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert missing `that' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 33290e3e3ff..25e0f460a97 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -321,10 +321,10 @@ Finding & mapping resources is fairly straightforward. The DRM wrapper functions, drm_get_resource_start() and - drm_get_resource_len() may be used to find BARs on the given + drm_get_resource_len(), may be used to find BARs on the given drm_device struct. Once those values have been retrieved, the driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new - mapping for the BAR in question. Note you probably want a + mapping for the BAR in question. Note that you probably want a drm_local_map_t in your driver private structure to track any mappings you create. -- cgit v1.2.3 From f07faf693c59b449b6637ea056e5826c85dcd265 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:48:15 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert missing `an' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 25e0f460a97..1b2e3c37e37 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or use driver specific versions to offset into your MMIO space relative to a driver specific base pointer (see I915_READ for - example). + an example). If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5b658bf2bf9e47f9a67cd26b1c69e4441eaf04fc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:49:11 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: `setup' is the noun; `to set up' is the verb Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 1b2e3c37e37..d2f1ddaa3ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to - setup an interrupt handler at driver load time as well. This + set up an interrupt handler at driver load time as well. This is done using the drm_irq_install() function. If your device supports vertical blank interrupts, it should call drm_vblank_init() to initialize the core vblank handling code before -- cgit v1.2.3 From bb49a6a1f3303f9cf23a19f403c9b90cdff0e7da Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:50:14 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: `at driver load time' -> `when the driver is loaded' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index d2f1ddaa3ca..7001937f6b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to - set up an interrupt handler at driver load time as well. This + set up an interrupt handler when the driver is loaded. This is done using the drm_irq_install() function. If your device supports vertical blank interrupts, it should call drm_vblank_init() to initialize the core vblank handling code before -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9c2416adac986d7d90814d7985a0ea80ebea416f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:56:12 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use the passive voice Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 7001937f6b7..03321ebaf4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -369,9 +369,9 @@ using the pci_map_rom() call, a convenience function that takes care of mapping the actual ROM, whether it has been shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) or exists - on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that once you've - mapped the ROM and extracted any necessary information, be - sure to unmap it; on many devices the ROM address decoder is + on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that after the ROM + has been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted, + it should be unmapped; on many devices the ROM address decoder is shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped can cause undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 118bdd70bdd73b08dcc3920fa30a21be5bbbffae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:57:04 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Offset modifiers with commas Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 03321ebaf4a..ce145babef6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) or exists on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that after the ROM has been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted, - it should be unmapped; on many devices the ROM address decoder is + it should be unmapped; on many devices, the ROM address decoder is shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped can cause undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global). Again, driver specific init and release functions may be provided, likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init and - ttm_bo_global_release, respectively. Also like the previous + ttm_bo_global_release, respectively. Also, like the previous object, ttm_global_item_ref is used to create an initial reference count for the TTM, which will call your initialization function. @@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL should be called by application level - drivers before and after mode setting, since on many devices the + drivers before and after mode setting, since on many devices, the vertical blank counter is reset at that time. Internally, the DRM snapshots the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) set domain function, which evaluates an object's current domain and performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy, - i.e. an active render target; in that case the set domain function + i.e. an active render target; in that case, the set domain function blocks the client and waits for rendering to complete before performing any necessary flushing operations). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8d36ffae67d89a86e37e7745503743fec1ac695c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:57:37 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: can -> could Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index ce145babef6..60ddf4be11c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ on the PCI device in the ROM BAR. Note that after the ROM has been mapped and any necessary information has been extracted, it should be unmapped; on many devices, the ROM address decoder is - shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped can cause + shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped could cause undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption. -- cgit v1.2.3 From cfdad2aba7398021f6eec415b9271b9cb40065f9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brown Date: Thu, 4 Aug 2011 01:55:24 -0700 Subject: msm_serial: Add devicetree support Add devicetree support to the msm_serial driver. Clocks are still queried by direct name from the driver until device tree clock support is implemented. Change-Id: Ia6b2ddfcf1e5dc3bd25dd502662f971202e6d56f Signed-off-by: David Brown Acked-by: Arnd Bergmann --- .../devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt | 27 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 27 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aef383eb887 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/msm_serial.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* Qualcomm MSM UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : + - "qcom,msm-uart", and one of "qcom,msm-hsuart" or + "qcom,msm-lsuart". +- reg : offset and length of the register set for the device + for the hsuart operating in compatible mode, there should be a + second pair describing the gsbi registers. +- interrupts : should contain the uart interrupt. + +There are two different UART blocks used in MSM devices, +"qcom,msm-hsuart" and "qcom,msm-lsuart". The msm-serial driver is +able to handle both of these, and matches against the "qcom,msm-uart" +as the compatibility. + +The registers for the "qcom,msm-hsuart" device need to specify both +register blocks, even for the common driver. + +Example: + + uart@19c400000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm-hsuart", "qcom,msm-uart"; + reg = <0x19c40000 0x1000>, + <0x19c00000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <195>; + }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From eb2b8d4273fb8b73821ca8dbc9c0de10e9879833 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 18:58:42 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: , -> : Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 60ddf4be11c..953c4cb726b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you need to set that up at load time as well. How you initialize - it depends on which memory manager you're using, TTM or GEM. + it depends on which memory manager you're using: TTM or GEM. TTM initialization @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations; it is required to support advanced client features like OpenGL - pbuffers. The DRM currently contains two memory managers, TTM + pbuffers. The DRM currently contains two memory managers: TTM and GEM. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 005d7f4a01d3c755c3abab38b7e380f0bbff475d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:02:52 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert missing comma Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 953c4cb726b..230c738c22f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ object should be sizeof(struct ttm_mem_global), and the init and release hooks should point at your driver specific init and release routines, which probably eventually call - ttm_mem_global_init and ttm_mem_global_release respectively. + ttm_mem_global_init and ttm_mem_global_release, respectively. Once your global TTM accounting structure is set up and initialized @@ -499,8 +499,8 @@ Output discovery and initialization - Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders and - connectors, namely drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init() and + Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders, and + connectors, namely drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init(), and drm_encoder_init(), along with several "helper" functions to perform common tasks. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) - For each encoder, CRTC and connector, several functions must + For each encoder, CRTC, and connector, several functions must be provided, depending on the object type. Encoder objects need to provide a DPMS (basically on/off) function, mode fixup (for converting requested modes into native hardware timings), @@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Output management At the core of the DRM output management code is a set of - structures representing CRTCs, encoders and connectors. + structures representing CRTCs, encoders, and connectors. A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1c86de2216f678bfb6e2472af6e5c25b0df8d91f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:14:26 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Remove parentheses and unnecessary repetition Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 230c738c22f..6b2a80369f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -433,8 +433,8 @@ Once your global TTM accounting structure is set up and initialized - (done by calling ttm_global_item_ref on the global object you - just created), you need to create a buffer object TTM to + by calling ttm_global_item_ref on it, + you need to create a buffer object TTM to provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the kernel itself. The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO, and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global). Again, -- cgit v1.2.3 From ae63d793a43888eeb1c16422252d987aa37ab96c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:19:18 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert `()' after function name Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 6b2a80369f6..6977cd91779 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -433,15 +433,15 @@ Once your global TTM accounting structure is set up and initialized - by calling ttm_global_item_ref on it, + by calling ttm_global_item_ref() on it, you need to create a buffer object TTM to provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the kernel itself. The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO, and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global). Again, driver specific init and release functions may be provided, - likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init and - ttm_bo_global_release, respectively. Also, like the previous - object, ttm_global_item_ref is used to create an initial reference + likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init() and + ttm_bo_global_release(), respectively. Also, like the previous + object, ttm_global_item_ref() is used to create an initial reference count for the TTM, which will call your initialization function. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 049cc903e714a27805eae0c34a4c34902a385032 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:21:17 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Streamline wording of GEM initialization Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 6977cd91779..7c11d790f74 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ GEM is an alternative to TTM, designed specifically for UMA devices. It has simpler initialization and execution requirements than TTM, but has no VRAM management capability. Core GEM - initialization is comprised of a basic drm_mm_init call to create + is initialized by calling drm_mm_init() to create a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following -- cgit v1.2.3 From 482b2ad8e488e609bb3bb408a8e9ca17b73b17c6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:37:24 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: basic -> core Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 7c11d790f74..d385e902f5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following - basic GEM initialization. Most UMA devices have a so-called + core GEM initialization. Most UMA devices have a so-called "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the device. This space is not typically managed by GEM, and must -- cgit v1.2.3 From 54f2cb8fc930e08fd6156519b28c45d576615f82 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:41:37 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use a singular subject for grammatical cleanliness Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index d385e902f5f..3470c6b2f84 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following - core GEM initialization. Most UMA devices have a so-called + core GEM initialization. A UMA device usually has a so-called "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the device. This space is not typically managed by GEM, and must @@ -635,10 +635,10 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above. - Devices that don't provide a count register may simply use an + A device that doesn't provide a count register may simply use an internal atomic counter incremented on every vertical blank - interrupt, and can make their enable and disable vblank - functions into no-ops. + interrupt (and then treat the enable_vblank() and disable_vblank() + callbacks as no-ops). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9029bd7a42e3c32783866630ee3eb6b82e273544 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:42:20 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: The word `so-called'; I do not think it connotes what you think it connotes From Webster's Revised Unabridged Dictionary (1913) [web1913]: So-called \So"-called`\, a. So named; called by such a name (but perhaps called thus with doubtful propriety). From WordNet (r) 2.0 [wn]: so-called adj : doubtful or suspect; "these so-called experts are no help" [syn: {alleged(a)}, {supposed}] My strong conviction is that widespread use of 'so gennant' or 'sogennant' in German has led to the creeping misuse of 'so-called' in English (especially through technical writings). In English, it would be better to use: what is called or a better translation of 'so gennant': so named Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 3470c6b2f84..66a114a05c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for object allocation. In a KMS configuration, the driver needs to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following - core GEM initialization. A UMA device usually has a so-called + core GEM initialization. A UMA device usually has what is called a "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the device. This space is not typically managed by GEM, and must -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1dbd39c3ea3967c41a09e81c826499f7ae9c8180 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:48:32 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert `it' for smooth reading Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 66a114a05c6..15541b1fc05 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ core GEM initialization. A UMA device usually has what is called a "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the - device. This space is not typically managed by GEM, and must + device. This space is not typically managed by GEM, and it must be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3bf7df615612671271512aada7d83285f3fa731b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 19:49:10 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Remove redundancy Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 15541b1fc05..c24f50ce786 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -462,8 +462,7 @@ be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object. - Initialization is driver specific, and depends on - the architecture of the device. In the case of Intel + Initialization is driver specific. In the case of Intel integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can be done by calling the internal GEM init function, i915_gem_do_init(). Since the 965GM is a UMA device -- cgit v1.2.3 From 327d6fb962f227a31d4b03869774287efca49c50 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 20:18:14 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Clarify `final initialization' via better formatting Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 17 +++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index c24f50ce786..1bbeea72a01 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -490,10 +490,19 @@ Output configuration - The final initialization task is output configuration. This involves - finding and initializing the CRTCs, encoders and connectors - for your device, creating an initial configuration and - registering a framebuffer console driver. + The final initialization task is output configuration. This involves: + + + Finding and initializing the CRTCs, encoders, and connectors + for the device. + + + Creating an initial configuration. + + + Registering a framebuffer console driver. + + Output discovery and initialization -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8a9ba910ac3962e5adb4ce1f086adf1e21fa04d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 20:21:22 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use a colon Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 1bbeea72a01..790e634e563 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Output discovery and initialization Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders, and - connectors, namely drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init(), and + connectors, namely: drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init(), and drm_encoder_init(), along with several "helper" functions to perform common tasks. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 896ee65fb646f9a98243a9f69e5904dff394c78a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 20:26:17 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Remove extraneous commas Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 790e634e563..d2aee84f18a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -562,9 +562,9 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) In the example above (again, taken from the i915 driver), a CRT connector and encoder combination is created. A device - specific i2c bus is also created, for fetching EDID data and + specific i2c bus is also created for fetching EDID data and performing monitor detection. Once the process is complete, - the new connector is registered with sysfs, to make its + the new connector is registered with sysfs to make its properties available to applications. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4dc0152d5780f04573046b06a3fb7c7ad9b81afa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 20:29:32 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert `the' for readability, and change `set' to `setting' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index d2aee84f18a..09e02f7c668 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -573,8 +573,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Since many PC-class graphics devices have similar display output designs, the DRM provides a set of helper functions to make output management easier. The core helper routines handle - encoder re-routing and disabling of unused functions following - mode set. Using the helpers is optional, but recommended for + encoder re-routing and the disabling of unused functions following + mode setting. Using the helpers is optional, but recommended for devices with PC-style architectures (i.e. a set of display planes for feeding pixels to encoders which are in turn routed to connectors). Devices with more complex requirements needing -- cgit v1.2.3 From 65ffef508f23d5e67940cadc8eca2ae34738018a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 20:55:58 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use an itemizedlist for what an encoder needs to provide Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 30 +++++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 09e02f7c668..da011f2af9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -586,17 +586,25 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) - For each encoder, CRTC, and connector, several functions must - be provided, depending on the object type. Encoder objects - need to provide a DPMS (basically on/off) function, mode fixup - (for converting requested modes into native hardware timings), - and prepare, set and commit functions for use by the core DRM - helper functions. Connector helpers need to provide mode fetch and - validity functions as well as an encoder matching function for - returning an ideal encoder for a given connector. The core - connector functions include a DPMS callback, (deprecated) - save/restore routines, detection, mode probing, property handling, - and cleanup functions. + Each encoder object needs to provide: + + + A DPMS (basically on/off) function. + + + A mode-fixup function (for converting requested modes into + native hardware timings). + + + Functions (prepare, set, and commit) for use by the core DRM + helper functions. + + + Connector helpers need to provide functions (mode-fetch, validity, + and encoder-matching) for returning an ideal encoder for a given + connector. The core connector functions include a DPMS callback, + save/restore routines (deprecated), detection, mode probing, + property handling, and cleanup functions. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 51b9500de28a1e5e7a2090de5d345d6d98581617 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 21:11:30 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use a for vblank ioctls Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 39 +++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index da011f2af9c..457d56a1a96 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -619,22 +619,33 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) VBlank event handling The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls: - DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK and DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL. + + + DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK + + + This takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure as its argument, + and it is used to block or request a signal when a specified + vblank event occurs. + + + + + DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL + + + This should be called by application level drivers before and + after mode setting, since on many devices the vertical blank + counter is reset at that time. Internally, the DRM snapshots + the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the + _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go backwards + (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used). + + + + - - DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure - as its argument, and is used to block or request a signal when a - specified vblank event occurs. - - - DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL should be called by application level - drivers before and after mode setting, since on many devices, the - vertical blank counter is reset at that time. Internally, - the DRM snapshots the last vblank count when the ioctl is called - with the _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go - backwards (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used). - To support the functions above, the DRM core provides several helper functions for tracking vertical blank counters, and -- cgit v1.2.3 From f877bd4ad5508e2f0653c31d05ffe0ad4e2bfe11 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2011 21:16:15 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Insert a comma Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 457d56a1a96..0387970234b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) after mode setting, since on many devices the vertical blank counter is reset at that time. Internally, the DRM snapshots the last vblank count when the ioctl is called with the - _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go backwards + _DRM_PRE_MODESET command, so that the counter won't go backwards (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0c2d91a80a156208d2f9f3dfb01871ebcf4a9338 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 15:59:56 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use an for fundamental GEM operations Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 10 +++++++--- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 0387970234b..c358367f9f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -709,9 +709,13 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) read & write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers. - On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations: memory - allocation and freeing, command execution, and aperture management - at command execution time. Buffer object allocation is relatively + On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations: + + Memory allocation and freeing + Command execution + Aperture management at command execution time + + Buffer object allocation is relatively straightforward and largely provided by Linux's shmem layer, which provides memory to back each object. When mapped into the GTT or used in a command buffer, the backing pages for an object are -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2d43f5d667273ba4975cb79782a46aa374dd8607 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 16:00:55 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Improve flow of GPU/CPU coherence sentence Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index c358367f9f8..ba20f9fbb62 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -720,8 +720,9 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) provides memory to back each object. When mapped into the GTT or used in a command buffer, the backing pages for an object are flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to be coherent - with the GPU. Likewise, when the GPU finishes rendering to an object, - if the CPU accesses it, it must be made coherent with the CPU's view + with the GPU. Likewise, if the CPU accesses an object after the GPU + has finished rendering to the object, then the object must be made + coherent with the CPU's view of memory, usually involving GPU cache flushing of various kinds. This core CPU<->GPU coherency management is provided by the GEM set domain function, which evaluates an object's current domain and -- cgit v1.2.3 From b8c6e0fe46fcd60f58089365dd96dcf04f95263b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 17:34:00 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Refer to the domain-setting function as a device-specific ioctl Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index ba20f9fbb62..9ae328aa1dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -724,11 +724,11 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) has finished rendering to the object, then the object must be made coherent with the CPU's view of memory, usually involving GPU cache flushing of various kinds. - This core CPU<->GPU coherency management is provided by the GEM - set domain function, which evaluates an object's current domain and + This core CPU<->GPU coherency management is provided by a + device-specific ioctl, which evaluates an object's current domain and performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy, - i.e. an active render target; in that case, the set domain function + i.e. an active render target; in that case, setting the domain blocks the client and waits for rendering to complete before performing any necessary flushing operations). -- cgit v1.2.3 From e355b2014da06458385902c47edf193a997895fc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 17:38:48 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Better flow with `, and then' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 9ae328aa1dd..0b6c59d6aa5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -735,8 +735,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Perhaps the most important GEM function is providing a command execution interface to clients. Client programs construct command - buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects - and submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM takes care to bind + buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects, + and then submit them to GEM. At that point, GEM takes care to bind all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers. This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding -- cgit v1.2.3 From 964d32dcbefcfda015bc33dc76414b05c6f512de Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 17:41:31 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Use `; otherwise,' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 0b6c59d6aa5..606a989d889 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients. Clients must take care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects - than can fit in the GTT or GEM will reject them and no rendering + than can fit in the GTT; otherwise, GEM will reject them and no rendering will occur. Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require fence registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits on pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5a462d58c84a2f5ed161daced2c7df34357c6d3d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 17:58:46 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Clean up the paragraph on framebuffer objects Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 14 ++++++-------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 606a989d889..a39e76bae03 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -795,14 +795,12 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Framebuffer management - In order to set a mode on a given CRTC, encoder and connector - configuration, clients need to provide a framebuffer object which - provides a source of pixels for the CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) - and ultimately the connector(s) in the configuration. A framebuffer - is fundamentally a driver specific memory object, made into an opaque - handle by the DRM addfb function. Once an fb has been created this - way it can be passed to the KMS mode setting routines for use in - a configuration. + Clients need to provide a framebuffer object which provides a source + of pixels for a CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) and ultimately the + connector(s). A framebuffer is fundamentally a driver specific memory + object, made into an opaque handle by the DRM's addfb() function. + Once a framebuffer has been created this way, it may be passed to the + KMS mode setting routines for use in a completed configuration. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a5294e01f2777649834d218583e7a32b2dacb699 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 18:05:52 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: `(device|driver) specific' -> `(device|driver)-specific' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 34 +++++++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index a39e76bae03..65e14f96f94 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ In this specific case, the driver requires AGP and supports - IRQs. DMA, as discussed later, is handled by device specific ioctls + IRQs. DMA, as discussed later, is handled by device-specific ioctls in this case. It also supports the kernel mode setting APIs, though unlike in the actual i915 driver source, this example unconditionally exports KMS capability. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ to perform output discovery & configuration at load time. Likewise, if user-level drivers unaware of memory management are in use, memory management and command buffer setup may need to - be omitted. These requirements are driver specific, and care + be omitted. These requirements are driver-specific, and care needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and libraries working. The i915 driver supports the "modeset" module parameter to control whether advanced features are @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Driver private & performance counters The driver private hangs off the main drm_device structure and - can be used for tracking various device specific bits of + can be used for tracking various device-specific bits of information, like register offsets, command buffer status, register state for suspend/resume, etc. At load time, a driver may simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Configuring the device - Obviously, device configuration is device specific. + Obviously, device configuration is device-specific. However, there are several common operations: finding a device's PCI resources, mapping them, and potentially setting up an IRQ handler. @@ -340,8 +340,8 @@ Once you have a register map, you may use the DRM_READn() and DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or - use driver specific versions to offset into your MMIO space - relative to a driver specific base pointer (see I915_READ for + use driver-specific versions to offset into your MMIO space + relative to a driver-specific base pointer (see I915_READ for an example). @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ and devices with dedicated video RAM (VRAM), i.e. most discrete graphics devices. If your device has dedicated RAM, supporting TTM is desirable. TTM also integrates tightly with your - driver specific buffer execution function. See the radeon + driver-specific buffer execution function. See the radeon driver for examples. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ created by the memory manager at runtime. Your global TTM should have a type of TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_MEM. The size field for the global object should be sizeof(struct ttm_mem_global), and the init and - release hooks should point at your driver specific init and + release hooks should point at your driver-specific init and release routines, which probably eventually call ttm_mem_global_init and ttm_mem_global_release, respectively. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the kernel itself. The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO, and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global). Again, - driver specific init and release functions may be provided, + driver-specific init and release functions may be provided, likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init() and ttm_bo_global_release(), respectively. Also, like the previous object, ttm_global_item_ref() is used to create an initial reference @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object. - Initialization is driver specific. In the case of Intel + Initialization is driver-specific. In the case of Intel integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can be done by calling the internal GEM init function, i915_gem_do_init(). Since the 965GM is a UMA device @@ -561,8 +561,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) In the example above (again, taken from the i915 driver), a - CRT connector and encoder combination is created. A device - specific i2c bus is also created for fetching EDID data and + CRT connector and encoder combination is created. A device-specific + i2c bus is also created for fetching EDID data and performing monitor detection. Once the process is complete, the new connector is registered with sysfs to make its properties available to applications. @@ -704,8 +704,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) GEM-enabled drivers must provide gem_init_object() and gem_free_object() callbacks to support the core memory - allocation routines. They should also provide several driver - specific ioctls to support command execution, pinning, buffer + allocation routines. They should also provide several driver-specific + ioctls to support command execution, pinning, buffer read & write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers. @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Clients need to provide a framebuffer object which provides a source of pixels for a CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s) and ultimately the - connector(s). A framebuffer is fundamentally a driver specific memory + connector(s). A framebuffer is fundamentally a driver-specific memory object, made into an opaque handle by the DRM's addfb() function. Once a framebuffer has been created this way, it may be passed to the KMS mode setting routines for use in a completed configuration. @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) Command submission & fencing - This should cover a few device specific command submission + This should cover a few device-specific command submission implementations. @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) The DRM core exports several interfaces to applications, generally intended to be used through corresponding libdrm - wrapper functions. In addition, drivers export device specific + wrapper functions. In addition, drivers export device-specific interfaces for use by userspace drivers & device aware applications through ioctls and sysfs files. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7f0925aca586b4a0cce81b06af7383d6aec59cc1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 18:07:13 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: `device aware' -> `device-aware' Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 65e14f96f94..9da9b283137 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) The DRM core exports several interfaces to applications, generally intended to be used through corresponding libdrm wrapper functions. In addition, drivers export device-specific - interfaces for use by userspace drivers & device aware + interfaces for use by userspace drivers & device-aware applications through ioctls and sysfs files. -- cgit v1.2.3 From bcd3cfc1213894ff955771508d46fa18d66e9328 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Witten Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 19:29:16 +0000 Subject: DocBook/drm: Clean up a todo-note Signed-off-by: Michael Witten --- Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 9da9b283137..196b8b9dba1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -850,8 +850,8 @@ void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev) management, memory management, and output management. - Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here. Only need high - level info, since man pages should cover the rest. + Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here. We only need high-level + info, since man pages should cover the rest. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 13c7d08f54cc83c1cd9884c5e142e485b748de18 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 14:12:15 +0100 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8770 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..866e00ca150 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8770.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +WM8770 audio CODEC + +This device supports SPI. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8770" + + - reg : the chip select number. + +Example: + +codec: wm8770@1 { + compatible = "wlf,wm8770"; + reg = <1>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From b6de431556023a6ed901a27284f15fff2e043598 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 14:14:45 +0100 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8776 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3b9ca49abc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8776.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8776 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8776" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8776@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8776"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From d2dd0540c1dab1ebe4192e69d8dbfcf018ff02b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 14:23:05 +0100 Subject: ASoC: Add device tree binding for WM8804 Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4d3a56f38ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8804.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +WM8804 audio CODEC + +This device supports both I2C and SPI (configured with pin strapping +on the board). + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8804" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device for I2C, the chip select + number for SPI. + +Example: + +codec: wm8804@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8804"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From a37933c37c14b64e81c7c9cc44a5d3f5e0c91412 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jason Liu Date: Tue, 30 Aug 2011 14:52:06 +0800 Subject: slub: doc: update the slabinfo.c file path slabinfo.c has been moved from Documentaion/vm/ to tools/slub/ by commit:0d24db337e6d81c0c620ab65cc6947bd6553f742 Update the slub.txt doc to reflect this change too. Signed-off-by: Jason Liu Acked-by: Christoph Lameter Acked-by: David Rientjes Signed-off-by: Pekka Enberg --- Documentation/vm/00-INDEX | 2 -- Documentation/vm/slub.txt | 2 +- 2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX index dca82d7c83d..5481c8ba341 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX @@ -30,8 +30,6 @@ page_migration - description of page migration in NUMA systems. pagemap.txt - pagemap, from the userspace perspective -slabinfo.c - - source code for a tool to get reports about slabs. slub.txt - a short users guide for SLUB. unevictable-lru.txt diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt index 07375e73981..f464f47bc60 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ data and perform operation on the slabs. By default slabinfo only lists slabs that have data in them. See "slabinfo -h" for more options when running the command. slabinfo can be compiled with -gcc -o slabinfo Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c +gcc -o slabinfo tools/slub/slabinfo.c Some of the modes of operation of slabinfo require that slub debugging be enabled on the command line. F.e. no tracking information will be -- cgit v1.2.3 From 83dc314bea4d701e3e5fa048314dfb02f7ef769c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andreas Oberritter Date: Mon, 8 Aug 2011 11:54:35 -0300 Subject: [media] DVB: Add SYS_TURBO for north american turbo code FEC Signed-off-by: Andreas Oberritter Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index 207e1a5bf8f..75bea04e02b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -352,6 +352,7 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system { SYS_CMMB, SYS_DAB, SYS_DVBT2, + SYS_TURBO, } fe_delivery_system_t; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7fc9da2a8f721efe9813fdff5d95a516999615a0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andreas Oberritter Date: Sat, 3 Sep 2011 14:26:33 -0300 Subject: [media] DVB: improve documentation for satellite delivery systems - Move voltage and tone to DVB-S. - Add turbo code. - In DVB-S2 and turbo code sections, refer to DVB-S, as both are extensions to DVB-S. - Add modulation to DVB-S2. Signed-off-by: Andreas Oberritter Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml | 23 +++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index 75bea04e02b..3bc8a61efe3 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -810,6 +810,8 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy { DTV_INVERSION DTV_SYMBOL_RATE DTV_INNER_FEC + DTV_VOLTAGE + DTV_TONE Future implementations might add those two missing parameters: @@ -819,25 +821,18 @@ typedef enum fe_hierarchy {
DVB-S2 delivery system - The following parameters are valid for DVB-S2: + In addition to all parameters valid for DVB-S, DVB-S2 supports the following parameters: - DTV_API_VERSION - DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM - DTV_TUNE - DTV_CLEAR - DTV_FREQUENCY - DTV_INVERSION - DTV_SYMBOL_RATE - DTV_INNER_FEC - DTV_VOLTAGE - DTV_TONE + DTV_MODULATION DTV_PILOT DTV_ROLLOFF - Future implementations might add those two missing parameters: +
+
+ Turbo code delivery system + In addition to all parameters valid for DVB-S, turbo code supports the following parameters: - DTV_DISEQC_MASTER - DTV_DISEQC_SLAVE_REPLY + DTV_MODULATION
-- cgit v1.2.3 From 6fb2bdfa068676f436fd333c460549ed64549c5e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andreas Oberritter Date: Sat, 3 Sep 2011 14:26:34 -0300 Subject: [media] DVB: Change API version in documentation: 3 -> 5.4 Signed-off-by: Andreas Oberritter Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml index c75dc7cc3e9..170064a3dc8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/intro.xml @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ a partial path like: additional include file linux/dvb/version.h exists, which defines the constant DVB_API_VERSION. This document -describes DVB_API_VERSION 3. +describes DVB_API_VERSION 5.4.
-- cgit v1.2.3 From 56889787cfa77dfd96f0b3a3e6a4f26c2e4a5134 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Sat, 3 Sep 2011 18:22:38 -0400 Subject: ext4: improve handling of conflicting mount options If the user explicitly specifies conflicting mount options for delalloc or dioread_nolock and data=journal, fail the mount, instead of printing a warning and continuing (since many user's won't look at dmesg and notice the warning). Also, print a single warning that data=journal implies that delayed allocation is not on by default (since it's not supported), and furthermore that O_DIRECT is not supported. Improve the text in Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt so this is clear there as well. Similarly, if the dioread_nolock mount option is specified when the file system block size != PAGE_SIZE, fail the mount instead of printing a warning message and ignoring the mount option. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 232a575a0c4..168242b5c04 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -160,7 +160,9 @@ noload if the filesystem was not unmounted cleanly, lead to any number of problems. data=journal All data are committed into the journal prior to being - written into the main file system. + written into the main file system. Enabling + this mode will disable delayed allocation and + O_DIRECT support. data=ordered (*) All data are forced directly out to the main file system prior to its metadata being committed to the @@ -419,8 +421,8 @@ written to the journal first, and then to its final location. In the event of a crash, the journal can be replayed, bringing both data and metadata into a consistent state. This mode is the slowest except when data needs to be read from and written to disk at the same time where it -outperforms all others modes. Currently ext4 does not have delayed -allocation support if this data journalling mode is selected. +outperforms all others modes. Enabling this mode will disable delayed +allocation and O_DIRECT support. /proc entries ============= -- cgit v1.2.3 From d91aae1e52e5289a94f4ddff968decfc8d37271e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 22:53:20 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (max16065) Add chip access warning to documentation The chips supported by the max16065 driver should not be accessed using direct i2ctools commands. Add warning to driver documentation to alert users. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Acked-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/max16065 | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 index 44b4f61e04f..c11f64a1f2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 @@ -62,6 +62,13 @@ can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate the devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for details. +WARNING: Do not access chip registers using the i2cdump command, and do not use +any of the i2ctools commands on a command register (0xa5 to 0xac). The chips +supported by this driver interpret any access to a command register (including +read commands) as request to execute the command in question. This may result in +power loss, board resets, and/or Flash corruption. Worst case, your board may +turn into a brick. + Sysfs entries ------------- -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5f30a4ab4ac40a71ce7e2aaaab782284553b21a4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Simon Wunderlich Date: Sun, 21 Aug 2011 15:19:08 +0200 Subject: batman-adv: update README (date & ap isolation sysfs file) Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich Signed-off-by: Marek Lindner --- Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt index 88d4afbdef9..c86d03f18a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -[state: 17-04-2011] +[state: 21-08-2011] BATMAN-ADV ---------- @@ -68,9 +68,9 @@ All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface folder: # ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ -# aggregated_ogms gw_bandwidth hop_penalty -# bonding gw_mode orig_interval -# fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode +# aggregated_ogms fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode +# ap_isolation gw_bandwidth hop_penalty +# bonding gw_mode orig_interval There is a special folder for debugging information: -- cgit v1.2.3 From a40f73419f02e40555f692785ea1c1813d5b4c12 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Brian Norris Date: Tue, 31 May 2011 16:31:22 -0700 Subject: mtd: nand: consolidate redundant flash-based BBT flags This patch works with the following three flags from two headers (nand.h and bbm.h): (1) NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT (nand.h) (2) NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT_NO_OOB (nand.h) (3) NAND_BBT_NO_OOB (bbm.h) These flags are all related and interdependent, yet they were in different headers. Flag (2) is simply the combination of (1) and (3) and can be eliminated. This patch accomplishes the following: * eliminate NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT_NO_OOB (i.e., flag (2)) * move NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT (i.e., flag (1)) to bbm.h It's important to note that because (1) and (3) are now both found in bbm.h, they should NOT be used in the "nand_chip.options" field. I removed a small section from the mtdnand DocBook because it referes to NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT in nand.h, which has been moved to bbm.h. Signed-off-by: Brian Norris Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl | 5 +---- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 17910e2052a..05cc83ea8ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) The simplest way to activate the FLASH based bad block table support - is to set the option NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT in the option field of + is to set the option NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT in the bbt_option field of the nand chip structure before calling nand_scan(). For AG-AND chips is this done by default. This activates the default FLASH based bad block table functionality @@ -1158,9 +1158,6 @@ in this page These constants are defined in nand.h. They are ored together to describe the functionality. -/* Use a flash based bad block table. This option is parsed by the - * default bad block table function (nand_default_bbt). */ -#define NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT 0x00010000 /* The hw ecc generator provides a syndrome instead a ecc value on read * This can only work if we have the ecc bytes directly behind the * data bytes. Applies for DOC and AG-AND Renesas HW Reed Solomon generators */ -- cgit v1.2.3 From bb9ebd4e714385a2592a482845865ef2d58b2868 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Brian Norris Date: Tue, 31 May 2011 16:31:23 -0700 Subject: mtd: nand: rename NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT Recall the recently added prefix requirements: * "NAND_" for flags in nand.h, used in nand_chip.options * "NAND_BBT_" for flags in bbm.h, used in nand_chip.bbt_options or in nand_bbt_descr.options Thus, I am changing NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT to NAND_BBT_USE_FLASH. Again, this flag is found in bbm.h and so should NOT be used in the "nand_chip.options" field. Signed-off-by: Brian Norris Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 05cc83ea8ef..8c07540c181 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) The simplest way to activate the FLASH based bad block table support - is to set the option NAND_USE_FLASH_BBT in the bbt_option field of + is to set the option NAND_BBT_USE_FLASH in the bbt_option field of the nand chip structure before calling nand_scan(). For AG-AND chips is this done by default. This activates the default FLASH based bad block table functionality -- cgit v1.2.3 From b94e757c4b3aafa52f8b82efed8660427a8d2880 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Fri, 15 Jul 2011 16:38:56 +0800 Subject: mtd: dataflash: add device tree probe support It adds device tree probe support for mtd_dataflash driver. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt | 14 ++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ef66ddd01da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/atmel-dataflash.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* Atmel Data Flash + +Required properties: +- compatible : "atmel,", "atmel,", "atmel,dataflash". + +Example: + +flash@1 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "atmel,at45db321d", "atmel,at45", "atmel,dataflash"; + spi-max-frequency = <25000000>; + reg = <1>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 48ee688df09fa3ddf86b5b53508316d18d6fcedd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Brian Norris Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 17:17:33 -0700 Subject: mtd: doc: remove mention of MEMSETOOBSEL It's been gone for a while. Signed-off-by: Brian Norris Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl | 14 -------------- 1 file changed, 14 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 8c07540c181..0c674be0d3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -773,20 +773,6 @@ struct nand_oobinfo { done according to the default builtin scheme. - - User space placement selection - - All non ecc functions like mtd->read and mtd->write use an internal - structure, which can be set by an ioctl. This structure is preset - to the autoplacement default. - - ioctl (fd, MEMSETOOBSEL, oobsel); - - oobsel is a pointer to a user supplied structure of type - nand_oobconfig. The contents of this structure must match the - criteria of the filesystem, which will be used. See an example in utils/nandwrite.c. - - Spare area autoplacement default schemes -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8d64d4f67eb051551c0702501c35e9cc27d8b75d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Jean-Fran=C3=A7ois=20Moine?= Date: Wed, 10 Aug 2011 07:17:13 -0300 Subject: [media] gspca - ov534_9: New sensor ov9712 and new webcam 05a9:8065 MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit The webcam is build from an Omnivision test kit which contains a OV538 bridge and a OV9712 sensor. Signed-off-by: Jean-François Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 5bfa9a777d2..49102fb4758 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -190,6 +190,7 @@ ov519 05a9:0519 OV519 Microphone ov519 05a9:0530 OmniVision ov519 05a9:2800 OmniVision SuperCAM ov519 05a9:4519 Webcam Classic +ov534_9 05a9:8065 OmniVision test kit ov538+ov9712 ov519 05a9:8519 OmniVision ov519 05a9:a511 D-Link USB Digital Video Camera ov519 05a9:a518 D-Link DSB-C310 Webcam -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6a02a3306769c6f0fa8ebd92d5046c841e4e740d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kamil Debski Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 12:53:49 -0300 Subject: [media] v4l2: Fix documentation of the codec device controls Fixed missing ids of the codec controls description in the controls.xml file. Signed-off-by: Kamil Debski Signed-off-by: Kyungmin Park Reported-by: Randy Dunlap Acked-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml | 38 ++++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+), 19 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml index 85164016ed2..23fdf79f8cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml @@ -1455,7 +1455,7 @@ Applicable to the H264 encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_VUI_SAR_IDC  enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_vui_sar_idc @@ -1561,7 +1561,7 @@ Applicable to the H264 encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LEVEL  enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_level @@ -1641,7 +1641,7 @@ Possible values are: - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_LEVEL  enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_level @@ -1689,9 +1689,9 @@ Possible values are: - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_PROFILE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_h264_profile + enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_profile The profile information for H264. Applicable to the H264 encoder. @@ -1774,9 +1774,9 @@ Possible values are: - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MPEG4_PROFILE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_mpeg4_profile + enum v4l2_mpeg_video_mpeg4_profile The profile information for MPEG4. Applicable to the MPEG4 encoder. @@ -1820,9 +1820,9 @@ Applicable to the encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_MULTI_SLICE_MODE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_multi_slice_mode + enum v4l2_mpeg_video_multi_slice_mode Determines how the encoder should handle division of frame into slices. Applicable to the encoder. @@ -1868,9 +1868,9 @@ Applicable to the encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_LOOP_FILTER_MODE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_h264_loop_filter_mode + enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_loop_filter_mode Loop filter mode for H264 encoder. Possible values are: @@ -1913,9 +1913,9 @@ Applicable to the H264 encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_ENTROPY_MODE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_h264_symbol_mode + enum v4l2_mpeg_video_h264_entropy_mode Entropy coding mode for H264 - CABAC/CAVALC. Applicable to the H264 encoder. @@ -2140,9 +2140,9 @@ previous frames. Applicable to the H264 encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_HEADER_MODE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_header_mode + enum v4l2_mpeg_video_header_mode Determines whether the header is returned as the first buffer or is it returned together with the first frame. Applicable to encoders. @@ -2320,9 +2320,9 @@ Valid only when H.264 and macroblock level RC is enabled (V4L2_CID_MPE Applicable to the H264 encoder. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FRAME_SKIP_MODE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_frame_skip_mode + enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_frame_skip_mode Indicates in what conditions the encoder should skip frames. If encoding a frame would cause the encoded stream to be larger then @@ -2361,9 +2361,9 @@ the stream will meet tight bandwidth contraints. Applicable to encoders. - + V4L2_CID_MPEG_MFC51_VIDEO_FORCE_FRAME_TYPE  - enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_force_frame_type + enum v4l2_mpeg_mfc51_video_force_frame_type Force a frame type for the next queued buffer. Applicable to encoders. Possible values are: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 14d01ff5341866773e24c5b54a94f7e2520ca271 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mathieu Desnoyers Date: Sun, 11 Sep 2011 17:59:04 -0400 Subject: ioctl: register LTTng ioctl The LTTng 2.0 kernel tracer (stand-alone module package, available at http://lttng.org) uses the 0xF6 ioctl range for tracer control and transport operations. Signed-off-by: Mathieu Desnoyers Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 845a191004b..54078ed96b3 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -319,4 +319,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 0xF4 00-1F video/mbxfb.h mbxfb +0xF6 all LTTng Linux Trace Toolkit Next Generation + 0xFD all linux/dm-ioctl.h -- cgit v1.2.3 From dba8b46992c55946d3b092934f581a343403118f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Clemens Ladisch Date: Tue, 13 Sep 2011 11:24:41 +0200 Subject: ALSA: mpu401: clean up interrupt specification The semantics of snd_mpu401_uart_new()'s interrupt parameters are somewhat counterintuitive: To prevent the function from allocating its own interrupt, either the irq number must be invalid, or the irq_flags parameter must be zero. At the same time, the irq parameter being invalid specifies that the mpu401 code has to work without an interrupt allocated by the caller. This implies that, if there is an interrupt and it is allocated by the caller, the irq parameter must be set to a valid-looking number which then isn't actually used. With the removal of IRQF_DISABLED, zero becomes a valid irq_flags value, which forces us to handle the parameters differently. This patch introduces a new flag MPU401_INFO_IRQ_HOOK for when the device interrupt is handled by the caller, and makes the allocation of the interrupt to depend only on the irq parameter. As suggested by Takashi, the irq_flags parameter was dropped because, when used, it had the constant value IRQF_DISABLED. Signed-off-by: Clemens Ladisch Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl | 36 +++++++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index 598c22f3b3a..5de23c00707 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -4288,7 +4288,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { @@ -4343,6 +4343,13 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { by itself to start processing the output stream in the irq handler. + + If the MPU-401 interface shares its interrupt with the other logical + devices on the card, set MPU401_INFO_IRQ_HOOK + (see + below). + + Usually, the port address corresponds to the command port and port + 1 corresponds to the data port. If not, you may change @@ -4375,14 +4382,12 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { - The 6th argument specifies the irq number for UART. If the irq - is already allocated, pass 0 to the 7th argument - (irq_flags). Otherwise, pass the flags - for irq allocation - (SA_XXX bits) to it, and the irq will be - reserved by the mpu401-uart layer. If the card doesn't generate - UART interrupts, pass -1 as the irq number. Then a timer - interrupt will be invoked for polling. + The 6th argument specifies the ISA irq number that will be + allocated. If no interrupt is to be allocated (because your + code is already allocating a shared interrupt, or because the + device does not use interrupts), pass -1 instead. + For a MPU-401 device without an interrupt, a polling timer + will be used instead. @@ -4390,12 +4395,13 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { Interrupt Handler When the interrupt is allocated in - snd_mpu401_uart_new(), the private - interrupt handler is used, hence you don't have anything else to do - than creating the mpu401 stuff. Otherwise, you have to call - snd_mpu401_uart_interrupt() explicitly when - a UART interrupt is invoked and checked in your own interrupt - handler. + snd_mpu401_uart_new(), an exclusive ISA + interrupt handler is automatically used, hence you don't have + anything else to do than creating the mpu401 stuff. Otherwise, you + have to set MPU401_INFO_IRQ_HOOK, and call + snd_mpu401_uart_interrupt() explicitly from your + own interrupt handler when it has determined that a UART interrupt + has occurred. -- cgit v1.2.3 From dfcd04b19d16c0016c705ed96a8b3cfa5315a2e9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Thu, 8 Sep 2011 15:09:35 +0800 Subject: i2c-imx: add device tree probe support It adds device tree probe support for i2c-imx driver. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo Cc: Grant Likely Cc: Darius Augulis Cc: Ben Dooks Acked-by: Grant Likely Signed-off-by: Ben Dooks --- .../devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt | 25 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f3cf43b66f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-imx-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* Freescale Inter IC (I2C) and High Speed Inter IC (HS-I2C) for i.MX + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "fsl,-i2c" +- reg : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C registers location and length +- interrupts : Should contain I2C/HS-I2C interrupt + +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency : Constains desired I2C/HS-I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. + The absence of the propoerty indicates the default frequency 100 kHz. + +Examples: + +i2c@83fc4000 { /* I2C2 on i.MX51 */ + compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx1-i2c"; + reg = <0x83fc4000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <63>; +}; + +i2c@70038000 { /* HS-I2C on i.MX51 */ + compatible = "fsl,imx51-i2c", "fsl,imx1-i2c"; + reg = <0x70038000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <64>; + clock-frequency = <400000>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 185efc0f9a1f2d6ad6d4782c5d9e529f3290567f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Weiner Date: Wed, 14 Sep 2011 16:21:58 -0700 Subject: memcg: Revert "memcg: add memory.vmscan_stat" Revert the post-3.0 commit 82f9d486e59f5 ("memcg: add memory.vmscan_stat"). The implementation of per-memcg reclaim statistics violates how memcg hierarchies usually behave: hierarchically. The reclaim statistics are accounted to child memcgs and the parent hitting the limit, but not to hierarchy levels in between. Usually, hierarchical statistics are perfectly recursive, with each level representing the sum of itself and all its children. Since this exports statistics to userspace, this may lead to confusion and problems with changing things after the release, so revert it now, we can try again later. Signed-off-by: Johannes Weiner Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Daisuke Nishimura Cc: Michal Hocko Cc: Ying Han Cc: Balbir Singh Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt | 85 +--------------------------------------- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 84 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 6f3c598971f..06eb6d957c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ will be charged as a new owner of it. 5.2 stat file -5.2.1 memory.stat file includes following statistics +memory.stat file includes following statistics # per-memory cgroup local status cache - # of bytes of page cache memory. @@ -438,89 +438,6 @@ Note: file_mapped is accounted only when the memory cgroup is owner of page cache.) -5.2.2 memory.vmscan_stat - -memory.vmscan_stat includes statistics information for memory scanning and -freeing, reclaiming. The statistics shows memory scanning information since -memory cgroup creation and can be reset to 0 by writing 0 as - - #echo 0 > ../memory.vmscan_stat - -This file contains following statistics. - -[param]_[file_or_anon]_pages_by_[reason]_[under_heararchy] -[param]_elapsed_ns_by_[reason]_[under_hierarchy] - -For example, - - scanned_file_pages_by_limit indicates the number of scanned - file pages at vmscan. - -Now, 3 parameters are supported - - scanned - the number of pages scanned by vmscan - rotated - the number of pages activated at vmscan - freed - the number of pages freed by vmscan - -If "rotated" is high against scanned/freed, the memcg seems busy. - -Now, 2 reason are supported - - limit - the memory cgroup's limit - system - global memory pressure + softlimit - (global memory pressure not under softlimit is not handled now) - -When under_hierarchy is added in the tail, the number indicates the -total memcg scan of its children and itself. - -elapsed_ns is a elapsed time in nanosecond. This may include sleep time -and not indicates CPU usage. So, please take this as just showing -latency. - -Here is an example. - -# cat /cgroup/memory/A/memory.vmscan_stat -scanned_pages_by_limit 9471864 -scanned_anon_pages_by_limit 6640629 -scanned_file_pages_by_limit 2831235 -rotated_pages_by_limit 4243974 -rotated_anon_pages_by_limit 3971968 -rotated_file_pages_by_limit 272006 -freed_pages_by_limit 2318492 -freed_anon_pages_by_limit 962052 -freed_file_pages_by_limit 1356440 -elapsed_ns_by_limit 351386416101 -scanned_pages_by_system 0 -scanned_anon_pages_by_system 0 -scanned_file_pages_by_system 0 -rotated_pages_by_system 0 -rotated_anon_pages_by_system 0 -rotated_file_pages_by_system 0 -freed_pages_by_system 0 -freed_anon_pages_by_system 0 -freed_file_pages_by_system 0 -elapsed_ns_by_system 0 -scanned_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 9471864 -scanned_anon_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 6640629 -scanned_file_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 2831235 -rotated_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 4243974 -rotated_anon_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 3971968 -rotated_file_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 272006 -freed_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 2318492 -freed_anon_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 962052 -freed_file_pages_by_limit_under_hierarchy 1356440 -elapsed_ns_by_limit_under_hierarchy 351386416101 -scanned_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -scanned_anon_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -scanned_file_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -rotated_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -rotated_anon_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -rotated_file_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -freed_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -freed_anon_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -freed_file_pages_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 -elapsed_ns_by_system_under_hierarchy 0 - 5.3 swappiness Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but affecting a hierarchy of groups only. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6b59e3191daade2b975eeec1c71c591eb5c86b7b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marcos Paulo de Souza Date: Tue, 30 Aug 2011 05:33:57 +0000 Subject: Documentation: networking: dmfe.txt: Remove the maintainer of orphan networking driver The dmfe module is a orphan driver, and with this was removed the maintainer of the documentation. Signed-off-by: Marcos Paulo de Souza Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt index 8006c227fda..25320bf19c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer. + Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or @@ -55,7 +57,6 @@ Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases. Authors: Sten Wang : Original Author -Tobias Ringstrom : Current Maintainer Contributors: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4f2f25f9f04a92aab31e3bc1dcb84bec33acc773 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Giuseppe CAVALLARO Date: Thu, 1 Sep 2011 21:51:42 +0000 Subject: stmmac: update the doc with new info about the driver's debug (v3) Signed-off-by: Giuseppe Cavallaro Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt | 33 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 57a24108b84..40ec92ce4c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -235,7 +235,38 @@ reset procedure etc). o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors -5) TODO: +5) Debug Information + +The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, +debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc. + +These can be read in several ways depending on the +type of the information actually needed. + +For example a user can be use the ethtool support +to get statistics: e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX +(that shows the Management counters (MMC) if supported) +or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX + +Compiling the Kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_FS and enabling the +STMMAC_DEBUG_FS option the driver will export the following +debugfs entries: + +/sys/kernel/debug/stmmaceth/descriptors_status + To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings + +Developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get +further debug information. + +In the end, there are other macros (that cannot be enabled +via menuconfig) to turn-on the RX/TX DMA debugging, +specific MAC core debug printk etc. Others to enable the +debug in the TX and RX processes. +All these are only useful during the developing stage +and should never enabled inside the code for general usage. +In fact, these can generate an huge amount of debug messages. + +6) TODO: o XGMAC is not supported. o Review the timer optimisation code to use an embedded device that will be available in new chip generations. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 026359bc6eddfdc2d2e684bf0b51691649b90f33 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tore Anderson Date: Sun, 28 Aug 2011 23:47:33 +0000 Subject: ipv6: Send ICMPv6 RSes only when RAs are accepted This patch improves the logic determining when to send ICMPv6 Router Solicitations, so that they are 1) always sent when the kernel is accepting Router Advertisements, and 2) never sent when the kernel is not accepting RAs. In other words, the operational setting of the "accept_ra" sysctl is used. The change also makes the special "Hybrid Router" forwarding mode ("forwarding" sysctl set to 2) operate exactly the same as the standard Router mode (forwarding=1). The only difference between the two was that RSes was being sent in the Hybrid Router mode only. The sysctl documentation describing the special Hybrid Router mode has therefore been removed. Rationale for the change: Currently, the value of forwarding sysctl is the only thing determining whether or not to send RSes. If it has the value 0 or 2, they are sent, otherwise they are not. This leads to inconsistent behaviour in the following cases: * accept_ra=0, forwarding=0 * accept_ra=0, forwarding=2 * accept_ra=1, forwarding=2 * accept_ra=2, forwarding=1 In the first three cases, the kernel will send RSes, even though it will not accept any RAs received in reply. In the last case, it will not send any RSes, even though it will accept and process any RAs received. (Most routers will send unsolicited RAs periodically, so suppressing RSes in the last case will merely delay auto-configuration, not prevent it.) Also, it is my opinion that having the forwarding sysctl control RS sending behaviour (completely independent of whether RAs are being accepted or not) is simply not what most users would intuitively expect to be the case. Signed-off-by: Tore Anderson Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt | 17 ++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index db2a4067013..f2716df0560 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -1045,6 +1045,11 @@ conf/interface/*: accept_ra - BOOLEAN Accept Router Advertisements; autoconfigure using them. + It also determines whether or not to transmit Router + Solicitations. If and only if the functional setting is to + accept Router Advertisements, Router Solicitations will be + transmitted. + Possible values are: 0 Do not accept Router Advertisements. 1 Accept Router Advertisements if forwarding is disabled. @@ -1115,14 +1120,14 @@ forwarding - BOOLEAN Possible values are: 0 Forwarding disabled 1 Forwarding enabled - 2 Forwarding enabled (Hybrid Mode) FALSE (0): By default, Host behaviour is assumed. This means: 1. IsRouter flag is not set in Neighbour Advertisements. - 2. Router Solicitations are being sent when necessary. + 2. If accept_ra is TRUE (default), transmit Router + Solicitations. 3. If accept_ra is TRUE (default), accept Router Advertisements (and do autoconfiguration). 4. If accept_redirects is TRUE (default), accept Redirects. @@ -1133,16 +1138,10 @@ forwarding - BOOLEAN This means exactly the reverse from the above: 1. IsRouter flag is set in Neighbour Advertisements. - 2. Router Solicitations are not sent. + 2. Router Solicitations are not sent unless accept_ra is 2. 3. Router Advertisements are ignored unless accept_ra is 2. 4. Redirects are ignored. - TRUE (2): - - Hybrid mode. Same behaviour as TRUE, except for: - - 2. Router Solicitations are being sent when necessary. - Default: 0 (disabled) if global forwarding is disabled (default), otherwise 1 (enabled). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 25aa55488c3644b19e33ba79c564191b8e33f477 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Wed, 14 Sep 2011 12:33:16 -0400 Subject: USB: document ehci-hcd's "companion" sysfs attribute This patch (as1484) adds documentation for ehci-hcd's "companion" sysfs attribute, which was added to the kernel over four years ago but never documented. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- .../ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd | 46 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 46 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..60c60fa624b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-drivers-ehci_hcd @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +What: /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ehci_hcd/.../companion + /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbN/../companion +Date: January 2007 +KernelVersion: 2.6.21 +Contact: Alan Stern +Description: + PCI-based EHCI USB controllers (i.e., high-speed USB-2.0 + controllers) are often implemented along with a set of + "companion" full/low-speed USB-1.1 controllers. When a + high-speed device is plugged in, the connection is routed + to the EHCI controller; when a full- or low-speed device + is plugged in, the connection is routed to the companion + controller. + + Sometimes you want to force a high-speed device to connect + at full speed, which can be accomplished by forcing the + connection to be routed to the companion controller. + That's what this file does. Writing a port number to the + file causes connections on that port to be routed to the + companion controller, and writing the negative of a port + number returns the port to normal operation. + + For example: To force the high-speed device attached to + port 4 on bus 2 to run at full speed: + + echo 4 >/sys/bus/usb/devices/usb2/../companion + + To return the port to high-speed operation: + + echo -4 >/sys/bus/usb/devices/usb2/../companion + + Reading the file gives the list of ports currently forced + to the companion controller. + + Note: Some EHCI controllers do not have companions; they + may contain an internal "transaction translator" or they + may be attached directly to a "rate-matching hub". This + mechanism will not work with such controllers. Also, it + cannot be used to force a port on a high-speed hub to + connect at full speed. + + Note: When this file was first added, it appeared in a + different sysfs directory. The location given above is + correct for 2.6.35 (and probably several earlier kernel + versions as well). + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 41750d31fc9599fd81763e685a6b7b42d298c4f8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Suresh Siddha Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 17:05:18 -0700 Subject: x86, x2apic: Enable the bios request for x2apic optout On the platforms which are x2apic and interrupt-remapping capable, Linux kernel is enabling x2apic even if the BIOS doesn't. This is to take advantage of the features that x2apic brings in. Some of the OEM platforms are running into issues because of this, as their bios is not x2apic aware. For example, this was resulting in interrupt migration issues on one of the platforms. Also if the BIOS SMI handling uses APIC interface to send SMI's, then the BIOS need to be aware of x2apic mode that OS has enabled. On some of these platforms, BIOS doesn't have a HW mechanism to turnoff the x2apic feature to prevent OS from enabling it. To resolve this mess, recent changes to the VT-d2 specification: http://download.intel.com/technology/computing/vptech/Intel(r)_VT_for_Direct_IO.pdf includes a mechanism that provides BIOS a way to request system software to opt out of enabling x2apic mode. Look at the x2apic optout flag in the DMAR tables before enabling the x2apic mode in the platform. Also print a warning that we have disabled x2apic based on the BIOS request. Kernel boot parameter "intremap=no_x2apic_optout" can be used to override the BIOS x2apic optout request. Signed-off-by: Youquan Song Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Cc: yinghai@kernel.org Cc: joerg.roedel@amd.com Cc: tony.luck@intel.com Cc: dwmw2@infradead.org Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/20110824001456.171766616@sbsiddha-desk.sc.intel.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 854ed5ca7e3..13865568809 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1014,10 +1014,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. has the capability. With this option, super page will not be supported. intremap= [X86-64, Intel-IOMMU] - Format: { on (default) | off | nosid } on enable Interrupt Remapping (default) off disable Interrupt Remapping nosid disable Source ID checking + no_x2apic_optout + BIOS x2APIC opt-out request will be ignored inttest= [IA-64] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 74a45790861f659058e8f8b565d98e5a1fdd8440 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Fri, 26 Aug 2011 07:31:13 -0300 Subject: [media] videodev2.h: add V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE Add a new VOLATILE control flag that is set for volatile controls. That way applications know whether the value of the control is volatile (i.e. can change continuously) or not. Until now this was an internal property, but it is useful to know in userspace as well. A typical use case is the gain value when autogain is on. In that case the hardware will continuously adjust the gain based various environmental factors. This patch just adds and documents the flag, it's not yet used. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml | 8 ++++++++ Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml | 9 ++++++++- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml | 9 +++++++++ 3 files changed, 25 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml index ce1004a7da5..91410b6e7e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml @@ -2370,6 +2370,14 @@ that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35. +
+ V4L2 in Linux 3.2 + + + V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE was added to signal volatile controls to userspace. + + +
Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml index 0d05e8747c1..40132c27764 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -127,6 +127,13 @@ structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter (compat.xml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and applications. --> + + 3.2 + 2011-08-26 + hv + Added V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE. + + 3.1 2011-06-27 @@ -410,7 +417,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list. Video for Linux Two API Specification - Revision 3.1 + Revision 3.2 &sub-common; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml index 677ea646c29..0ac0057a51c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml @@ -406,6 +406,15 @@ flag is typically present for relative controls or action controls where writing a value will cause the device to carry out a given action (⪚ motor control) but no meaningful value can be returned. + + V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE + 0x0080 + This control is volatile, which means that the value of the control +changes continuously. A typical example would be the current gain value if the device +is in auto-gain mode. In such a case the hardware calculates the gain value based on +the lighting conditions which can change over time. Note that setting a new value for +a volatile control will have no effect. The new value will just be ignored. +
-- cgit v1.2.3 From 88365105d683187e02a4f75220eaf51fd0c0b6e0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Fri, 26 Aug 2011 07:35:14 -0300 Subject: [media] v4l2-ctrls: replace is_volatile with V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE With the new flag there is no need anymore to have a separate is_volatile field. Modify all users to use the new flag. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt | 13 ++++++------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt index 9346fc8cbf2..f92ee305394 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt @@ -285,11 +285,11 @@ implement g_volatile_ctrl like this: Note that you use the 'new value' union as well in g_volatile_ctrl. In general controls that need to implement g_volatile_ctrl are read-only controls. -To mark a control as volatile you have to set the is_volatile flag: +To mark a control as volatile you have to set V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE: ctrl = v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&sd->ctrl_handler, ...); if (ctrl) - ctrl->is_volatile = 1; + ctrl->flags |= V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE; For try/s_ctrl the new values (i.e. as passed by the user) are filled in and you can modify them in try_ctrl or set them in s_ctrl. The 'cur' union @@ -367,8 +367,7 @@ Driver specific controls can be created using v4l2_ctrl_new_custom(): The last argument is the priv pointer which can be set to driver-specific private data. -The v4l2_ctrl_config struct also has fields to set the is_private and is_volatile -flags. +The v4l2_ctrl_config struct also has a field to set the is_private flag. If the name field is not set, then the framework will assume this is a standard control and will fill in the name, type and flags fields accordingly. @@ -506,8 +505,8 @@ operation should return the value that the hardware's automatic mode set up automatically. If the cluster is put in manual mode, then the manual controls should become -active again and the is_volatile flag should be ignored (so g_volatile_ctrl is -no longer called while in manual mode). +active again and V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE should be ignored (so g_volatile_ctrl +is no longer called while in manual mode). Finally the V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_UPDATE should be set for the auto control since changing that control affects the control flags of the manual controls. @@ -520,7 +519,7 @@ void v4l2_ctrl_auto_cluster(unsigned ncontrols, struct v4l2_ctrl **controls, The first two arguments are identical to v4l2_ctrl_cluster. The third argument tells the framework which value switches the cluster into manual mode. The -last argument will optionally set the is_volatile flag for the non-auto controls. +last argument will optionally set V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE for the non-auto controls. The first control of the cluster is assumed to be the 'auto' control. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 465301b10f592bf902650b8d70df8fe10f9d3769 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Antti Palosaari Date: Mon, 1 Aug 2011 23:34:58 -0300 Subject: [media] get_dvb_firmware: add dvb-fe-tda10071.fw TDA10071 firmware version 1.21.31.2 Signed-off-by: Antti Palosaari Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware | 17 ++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index 65ebe20b4b8..f1b27e26c30 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ use IO::Handle; "or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird", "opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718", "af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395", - "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5", + "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5", "tda10071", "it9135" ); # Check args @@ -684,7 +684,22 @@ sub it9135 { "$fwfile" } +sub tda10071 { + my $sourcefile = "PCTV%2070e%2080e%20100e%20320e%20330e%20800e%20880e.zip"; + my $url = "ftp://ftp.pctvsystems.com/TV/driver/PCTV%2070e%2080e%20100e%20320e%20330e%20800e/"; + my $hash = "4403de903bf2593464c8d74bbc200a57"; + my $fwfile = "dvb-fe-tda10071.fw"; + my $tmpdir = tempdir(DIR => "/tmp", CLEANUP => 1); + + checkstandard(); + wgetfile($sourcefile, $url . $sourcefile); + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + unzip($sourcefile, $tmpdir); + extract("$tmpdir/PCTV\ 70e\ 80e\ 100e\ 320e\ 330e\ 800e/32\ bit/emOEM.sys", 0x67d38, 40504, $fwfile); + + "$fwfile"; +} # --------------------------------------------------------------- # Utilities -- cgit v1.2.3 From ead20951fbf3e256c7abee300e28caecab27b1f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Antti Palosaari Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 11:35:06 -0300 Subject: [media] get_dvb_firmware: update tda10071 file url Signed-off-by: Antti Palosaari Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index f1b27e26c30..06ec3846051 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ sub it9135 { } sub tda10071 { - my $sourcefile = "PCTV%2070e%2080e%20100e%20320e%20330e%20800e%20880e.zip"; + my $sourcefile = "PCTV_460e_reference.zip"; my $url = "ftp://ftp.pctvsystems.com/TV/driver/PCTV%2070e%2080e%20100e%20320e%20330e%20800e/"; my $hash = "4403de903bf2593464c8d74bbc200a57"; my $fwfile = "dvb-fe-tda10071.fw"; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9637433cf82e484d76d40c2fca9d0a1307ed08c7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Antti Palosaari Date: Tue, 13 Sep 2011 11:55:18 -0300 Subject: [media] get_dvb_firmware: whitespace fix it9135 was the only one intended with spaces as others are tabs. Signed-off-by: Antti Palosaari Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index 06ec3846051..996f5786099 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ use IO::Handle; "opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718", "af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395", "lme2510c_s7395_old", "drxk", "drxk_terratec_h5", "tda10071", - "it9135" ); + "it9135" ); # Check args syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1); -- cgit v1.2.3 From 882a935c4395a67ea0a6ed6d61531d680190b23f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Fri, 26 Aug 2011 08:35:59 -0300 Subject: [media] v4l2-controls.txt: update auto cluster documentation Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt | 34 ++++++++++------------------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 22 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt index f92ee305394..26aa0573933 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt @@ -495,18 +495,20 @@ Handling autogain/gain-type Controls with Auto Clusters A common type of control cluster is one that handles 'auto-foo/foo'-type controls. Typical examples are autogain/gain, autoexposure/exposure, -autowhitebalance/red balance/blue balance. In all cases you have one controls +autowhitebalance/red balance/blue balance. In all cases you have one control that determines whether another control is handled automatically by the hardware, or whether it is under manual control from the user. If the cluster is in automatic mode, then the manual controls should be -marked inactive. When the volatile controls are read the g_volatile_ctrl -operation should return the value that the hardware's automatic mode set up -automatically. +marked inactive and volatile. When the volatile controls are read the +g_volatile_ctrl operation should return the value that the hardware's automatic +mode set up automatically. If the cluster is put in manual mode, then the manual controls should become -active again and V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE should be ignored (so g_volatile_ctrl -is no longer called while in manual mode). +active again and the volatile flag is cleared (so g_volatile_ctrl is no longer +called while in manual mode). In addition just before switching to manual mode +the current values as determined by the auto mode are copied as the new manual +values. Finally the V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_UPDATE should be set for the auto control since changing that control affects the control flags of the manual controls. @@ -520,6 +522,10 @@ void v4l2_ctrl_auto_cluster(unsigned ncontrols, struct v4l2_ctrl **controls, The first two arguments are identical to v4l2_ctrl_cluster. The third argument tells the framework which value switches the cluster into manual mode. The last argument will optionally set V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_VOLATILE for the non-auto controls. +If it is false, then the manual controls are never volatile. You would typically +use that if the hardware does not give you the option to read back to values as +determined by the auto mode (e.g. if autogain is on, the hardware doesn't allow +you to obtain the current gain value). The first control of the cluster is assumed to be the 'auto' control. @@ -680,16 +686,6 @@ if there are no controls at all. count if nothing was done yet. If it is less than count then only the controls up to error_idx-1 were successfully applied. -3) When attempting to read a button control the framework will return -EACCES -instead of -EINVAL as stated in the spec. It seems to make more sense since -button controls are write-only controls. - -4) Attempting to write to a read-only control will return -EACCES instead of --EINVAL as the spec says. - -5) The spec does not mention what should happen when you try to set/get a -control class controls. The framework will return -EACCES. - Proposals for Extensions ======================== @@ -702,9 +698,3 @@ decimal. Useful for e.g. video_mute_yuv. 2) It is possible to mark in the controls array which controls have been successfully written and which failed by for example adding a bit to the control ID. Not sure if it is worth the effort, though. - -3) Trying to set volatile inactive controls should result in -EACCESS. - -4) Add a new flag to mark volatile controls. Any application that wants -to store the state of the controls can then skip volatile inactive controls. -Currently it is not possible to detect such controls. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a81dd364de50bc1eb1519af0ecfa100753a09351 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant Likely Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2011 09:19:16 -0600 Subject: devicetree: Add a registry of vendor prefixes There is no centralized listing for the in-use vendor prefixes used in compatible strings and property names. This patch adds one. New prefixes should get added to this list to reduce the likelyhood of namespace collisions. Signed-off-by: Grant Likely --- .../devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt | 38 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 38 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..81465c1cc6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +Device tree binding vendor prefix registry. Keep list in alphabetical order. + +This isn't an exhaustive list, but you should add new prefixes to it before +using them to avoid name-space collisions. + +adi Analog Devices, Inc. +amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) +apm Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM) +arm ARM Ltd. +chrp Common Hardware Reference Platform +dallas Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor) +denx Denx Software Engineering +epson Seiko Epson Corp. +est ESTeem Wireless Modems +fsl Freescale Semiconductor +GEFanuc GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. +gef GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. +hp Hewlett Packard +ibm International Business Machines (IBM) +idt Integrated Device Technologies, Inc. +intercontrol Inter Control Group +linux Linux-specific binding +marvell Marvell Technology Group Ltd. +maxim Maxim Integrated Products +mosaixtech Mosaix Technologies, Inc. +national National Semiconductor +nintendo Nintendo +nvidia NVIDIA +nxp NXP Semiconductors +powervr Imagination Technologies +ramtron Ramtron International +samsung Samsung Semiconductor +schindler Schindler +simtek +sirf SiRF Technology, Inc. +stericsson ST-Ericsson +ti Texas Instruments +xlnx Xilinx -- cgit v1.2.3 From e467b6421435f467e274d4f25d62900e1e0e4286 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ohad Ben-Cohen Date: Mon, 5 Sep 2011 16:42:36 +0300 Subject: hwspinlock/core: simplify 'owner' handling Use struct device_driver's owner member instead of asking drivers to explicitly pass the owner again. This simplifies drivers and also save some memory, since there's no point now in maintaining a separate owner pointer per hwspinlock. Signed-off-by: Ohad Ben-Cohen --- Documentation/hwspinlock.txt | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt index 7dcd1a4e726..bbaa4649b63 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt +++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt @@ -256,18 +256,16 @@ underlying hwspinlock implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API. * @ops: vendor-specific hwspinlock handlers * @id: a global, unique, system-wide, index of the lock. * @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core - * @owner: underlying implementation module, used to maintain module ref count */ struct hwspinlock { struct device *dev; const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops; int id; spinlock_t lock; - struct module *owner; }; -The underlying implementation is responsible to assign the dev, ops, id and -owner members. The lock member, OTOH, is initialized and used by the hwspinlock +The underlying implementation is responsible to assign the dev, ops and id +members. The lock member, OTOH, is initialized and used by the hwspinlock core. 6. Implementation callbacks -- cgit v1.2.3 From 93b465c2e186d96fb90012ba0f9372eb9952e732 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Juan Gutierrez Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2011 09:30:16 +0300 Subject: hwspinlock/core: use a mutex to protect the radix tree Since we're using non-atomic radix tree allocations, we should be protecting the tree using a mutex and not a spinlock. Non-atomic allocations and process context locking is good enough, as the tree is manipulated only when locks are registered/ unregistered/requested/freed. The locks themselves are still protected by spinlocks of course, and mutexes are not involved in the locking/unlocking paths. Cc: Signed-off-by: Juan Gutierrez [ohad@wizery.com: rewrite the commit log, #include mutex.h, add minor commentary] [ohad@wizery.com: update register/unregister parts in hwspinlock.txt] Signed-off-by: Ohad Ben-Cohen --- Documentation/hwspinlock.txt | 18 +++++++----------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt index bbaa4649b63..9171f912014 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt +++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt @@ -39,23 +39,20 @@ independent, drivers. in case an unused hwspinlock isn't available. Users of this API will usually want to communicate the lock's id to the remote core before it can be used to achieve synchronization. - Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but - not from within interrupt context. + Should be called from a process context (might sleep). struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request_specific(unsigned int id); - assign a specific hwspinlock id and return its address, or NULL if that hwspinlock is already in use. Usually board code will be calling this function in order to reserve specific hwspinlock ids for predefined purposes. - Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but - not from within interrupt context. + Should be called from a process context (might sleep). int hwspin_lock_free(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); - free a previously-assigned hwspinlock; returns 0 on success, or an appropriate error code on failure (e.g. -EINVAL if the hwspinlock is already free). - Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but - not from within interrupt context. + Should be called from a process context (might sleep). int hwspin_lock_timeout(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout); - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in @@ -232,15 +229,14 @@ int hwspinlock_example2(void) int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); - to be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in - order to register a new hwspinlock instance. Can be called from an atomic - context (this function will not sleep) but not from within interrupt - context. Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure. + order to register a new hwspinlock instance. Should be called from + a process context (this function might sleep). + Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure. struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_unregister(unsigned int id); - to be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order to unregister an existing (and unused) hwspinlock instance. - Can be called from an atomic context (will not sleep) but not from - within interrupt context. + Should be called from a process context (this function might sleep). Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g. if the hwspinlock is sill in use). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 300bab9770e2bd10262bcc78e7249fdce2c74b38 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ohad Ben-Cohen Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2011 15:39:21 +0300 Subject: hwspinlock/core: register a bank of hwspinlocks in a single API call Hardware Spinlock devices usually contain numerous locks (known devices today support between 32 to 256 locks). Originally hwspinlock core required drivers to register (and later, when needed, unregister) each lock separately. That worked, but required hwspinlocks drivers to do a bit extra work when they were probed/removed. This patch changes hwspin_lock_{un}register() to allow a bank of hwspinlocks to be {un}registered in a single invocation. A new 'struct hwspinlock_device', which contains an array of 'struct hwspinlock's is now being passed to the core upon registration (so instead of wrapping each struct hwspinlock, a priv member has been added to allow drivers to piggyback their private data with each hwspinlock). While at it, several per-lock members were moved to be per-device: 1. struct device *dev 2. struct hwspinlock_ops *ops In addition, now that the array of locks is handled by the core, there's no reason to maintain a per-lock 'int id' member: the id of the lock anyway equals to its index in the bank's array plus the bank's base_id. Remove this per-lock id member too, and instead use a simple pointers arithmetic to derive it. As a result of this change, hwspinlocks drivers are now simpler and smaller (about %20 code reduction) and the memory footprint of the hwspinlock framework is reduced. Signed-off-by: Ohad Ben-Cohen --- Documentation/hwspinlock.txt | 58 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++--------------- 1 file changed, 39 insertions(+), 19 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt index 9171f912014..a903ee5e977 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt +++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt @@ -227,42 +227,62 @@ int hwspinlock_example2(void) 4. API for implementors - int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock_device *bank, struct device *dev, + const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops, int base_id, int num_locks); - to be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in - order to register a new hwspinlock instance. Should be called from - a process context (this function might sleep). + order to register a new hwspinlock device (which is usually a bank of + numerous locks). Should be called from a process context (this function + might sleep). Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure. - struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_unregister(unsigned int id); + int hwspin_lock_unregister(struct hwspinlock_device *bank); - to be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order - to unregister an existing (and unused) hwspinlock instance. + to unregister an hwspinlock device (which is usually a bank of numerous + locks). Should be called from a process context (this function might sleep). Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g. if the hwspinlock is sill in use). -5. struct hwspinlock +5. Important structs -This struct represents an hwspinlock instance. It is registered by the -underlying hwspinlock implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API. +struct hwspinlock_device is a device which usually contains a bank +of hardware locks. It is registered by the underlying hwspinlock +implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API. /** - * struct hwspinlock - vendor-specific hwspinlock implementation - * - * @dev: underlying device, will be used with runtime PM api - * @ops: vendor-specific hwspinlock handlers - * @id: a global, unique, system-wide, index of the lock. - * @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core + * struct hwspinlock_device - a device which usually spans numerous hwspinlocks + * @dev: underlying device, will be used to invoke runtime PM api + * @ops: platform-specific hwspinlock handlers + * @base_id: id index of the first lock in this device + * @num_locks: number of locks in this device + * @lock: dynamically allocated array of 'struct hwspinlock' */ -struct hwspinlock { +struct hwspinlock_device { struct device *dev; const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops; - int id; + int base_id; + int num_locks; + struct hwspinlock lock[0]; +}; + +struct hwspinlock_device contains an array of hwspinlock structs, each +of which represents a single hardware lock: + +/** + * struct hwspinlock - this struct represents a single hwspinlock instance + * @bank: the hwspinlock_device structure which owns this lock + * @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core + * @priv: private data, owned by the underlying platform-specific hwspinlock drv + */ +struct hwspinlock { + struct hwspinlock_device *bank; spinlock_t lock; + void *priv; }; -The underlying implementation is responsible to assign the dev, ops and id -members. The lock member, OTOH, is initialized and used by the hwspinlock -core. +When registering a bank of locks, the hwspinlock driver only needs to +set the priv members of the locks. The rest of the members are set and +initialized by the hwspinlock core itself. 6. Implementation callbacks -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2e6ba515f50ef7ddf35b2703d014d3216c9b8b24 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ming Lei Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2011 22:31:33 +0200 Subject: PM / Runtime: pm_runtime_idle() can be called in atomic context Add to pm_runtime_idle the list of functions that can be called in atomic context if pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for the device. Signed-off-by: Ming Lei Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 62f37bc3866..1750740b17e 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -478,6 +478,7 @@ pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper functions may also be used in interrupt context: +pm_runtime_idle() pm_runtime_suspend() pm_runtime_autosuspend() pm_runtime_resume() -- cgit v1.2.3 From a45a8c8571c0be6a6bd72ae5a14255c26b14b504 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 16 Sep 2011 21:24:02 +0200 Subject: hwmon: (coretemp) Let the user force TjMax On old CPUs (and even some recent Atom CPUs) TjMax can't be read from the CPU registers, so it is guessed by the driver using a complex heuristic which isn't reliable. So let users who know their CPU's TjMax pass it as a module parameter. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Cc: Fenghua Yu Cc: "R, Durgadoss" Cc: Guenter Roeck Cc: Alexander Stein Acked-by: Fenghua Yu Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck --- Documentation/hwmon/coretemp | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp index fa8776ab9b1..49c0d42dde8 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp @@ -49,9 +49,10 @@ tempX_label - Contains string "Core X", where X is processor number. For Package temp, this will be "Physical id Y", where Y is the package number. -The TjMax temperature is set to 85 degrees C if undocumented model specific -register (UMSR) 0xee has bit 30 set. If not the TjMax is 100 degrees C as -(sometimes) documented in processor datasheet. +On CPU models which support it, TjMax is read from a model-specific register. +On other models, it is set to an arbitrary value based on weak heuristics. +If these heuristics don't work for you, you can pass the correct TjMax value +as a module parameter (tjmax). Appendix A. Known TjMax lists (TBD): Some information comes from ark.intel.com -- cgit v1.2.3 From f4af6fd6e21792ca4deca3d29c113a575594078e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Mon, 19 Sep 2011 21:41:16 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (coretemp) Don't use threshold registers for tempX_max With commit c814a4c7c4aad795835583344353963a0a673eb0, the meaning of tempX_max was changed. It no longer returns the value of bits 8:15 of MSR_IA32_TEMPERATURE_TARGET, but instead returns the value of CPU threshold register T1. tempX_max_hyst was added to reflect the value of temperature threshold register T0. As it turns out, T0 and T1 are used on some systems, presumably by the BIOS. Also, T0 and T1 don't have a well defined meaning. The thresholds may be used as upper or lower limits, and it is not guaranteed that T0 <= T1. Thus, the new attribute mapping does not reflect the actual usage of the threshold registers. Also, register contents are changed during runtime by an entity other than the hwmon driver, meaning the values cached by the driver do not reflect actual register contents. Revert most of c814a4c7c4aad795835583344353963a0a673eb0 to address the problem. Support for T0 and T1 will be added back in with a separate commit, using new attribute names. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Cc: Fenghua Yu Cc: Durgadoss R Acked-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/coretemp | 7 ------- 1 file changed, 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp index 49c0d42dde8..84d46c0c71a 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp @@ -35,13 +35,6 @@ the Out-Of-Spec bit. Following table summarizes the exported sysfs files: All Sysfs entries are named with their core_id (represented here by 'X'). tempX_input - Core temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). tempX_max - All cooling devices should be turned on (on Core2). - Initialized with IA32_THERM_INTERRUPT. When the CPU - temperature reaches this temperature, an interrupt is - generated and tempX_max_alarm is set. -tempX_max_hyst - If the CPU temperature falls below than temperature, - an interrupt is generated and tempX_max_alarm is reset. -tempX_max_alarm - Set if the temperature reaches or exceeds tempX_max. - Reset if the temperature drops to or below tempX_max_hyst. tempX_crit - Maximum junction temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). tempX_crit_alarm - Set when Out-of-spec bit is set, never clears. Correct CPU operation is no longer guaranteed. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 12b8fc10eaf4e981e9c546d4cfb94d592dc10622 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bhanu Prakash Gollapudi Date: Tue, 13 Sep 2011 11:55:14 -0700 Subject: [SCSI] bnx2fc: Add driver documentation bnx2fc.txt outlines the driver usage model. Signed-off-by: Bhanu Prakash Gollapudi Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt | 75 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 75 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..80823556d62 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/bnx2fc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +Operating FCoE using bnx2fc +=========================== +Broadcom FCoE offload through bnx2fc is full stateful hardware offload that +cooperates with all interfaces provided by the Linux ecosystem for FC/FCoE and +SCSI controllers. As such, FCoE functionality, once enabled is largely +transparent. Devices discovered on the SAN will be registered and unregistered +automatically with the upper storage layers. + +Despite the fact that the Broadcom's FCoE offload is fully offloaded, it does +depend on the state of the network interfaces to operate. As such, the network +interface (e.g. eth0) associated with the FCoE offload initiator must be 'up'. +It is recommended that the network interfaces be configured to be brought up +automatically at boot time. + +Furthermore, the Broadcom FCoE offload solution creates VLAN interfaces to +support the VLANs that have been discovered for FCoE operation (e.g. +eth0.1001-fcoe). Do not delete or disable these interfaces or FCoE operation +will be disrupted. + +Driver Usage Model: +=================== + +1. Ensure that fcoe-utils package is installed. + +2. Configure the interfaces on which bnx2fc driver has to operate on. +Here are the steps to configure: + a. cd /etc/fcoe + b. copy cfg-ethx to cfg-eth5 if FCoE has to be enabled on eth5. + c. Repeat this for all the interfaces where FCoE has to be enabled. + d. Edit all the cfg-eth files to set "no" for DCB_REQUIRED** field, and + "yes" for AUTO_VLAN. + e. Other configuration parameters should be left as default + +3. Ensure that "bnx2fc" is in SUPPORTED_DRIVERS list in /etc/fcoe/config. + +4. Start fcoe service. (service fcoe start). If Broadcom devices are present in +the system, bnx2fc driver would automatically claim the interfaces, starts vlan +discovery and log into the targets. + +5. "Symbolic Name" in 'fcoeadm -i' output would display if bnx2fc has claimed +the interface. +Eg: +[root@bh2 ~]# fcoeadm -i + Description: NetXtreme II BCM57712 10 Gigabit Ethernet + Revision: 01 + Manufacturer: Broadcom Corporation + Serial Number: 0010186FD558 + Driver: bnx2x 1.70.00-0 + Number of Ports: 2 + + Symbolic Name: bnx2fc v1.0.5 over eth5.4 + OS Device Name: host11 + Node Name: 0x10000010186FD559 + Port Name: 0x20000010186FD559 + FabricName: 0x2001000DECB3B681 + Speed: 10 Gbit + Supported Speed: 10 Gbit + MaxFrameSize: 2048 + FC-ID (Port ID): 0x0F0377 + State: Online + +6. Verify the vlan discovery is performed by running ifconfig and notice +.-fcoe interfaces are automatically created. + +Refer to fcoeadm manpage for more information on fcoeadm operations to +create/destroy interfaces or to display lun/target information. + +NOTE: +==== +** Broadcom FCoE capable devices implement a DCBX/LLDP client on-chip. Only one +LLDP client is allowed per interface. For proper operation all host software +based DCBX/LLDP clients (e.g. lldpad) must be disabled. To disable lldpad on a +given interface, run the following command: + +lldptool set-lldp -i adminStatus=disabled -- cgit v1.2.3 From 987bfad6429aa3aefbc196bd0fc90fc48409a87b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant Likely Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2011 14:54:29 -0600 Subject: devicetree: Document Qualcomm and Atmel prefixes Signed-off-by: Grant Likely --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index 81465c1cc6b..e8552782b44 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ adi Analog Devices, Inc. amcc Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM, formally AMCC) apm Applied Micro Circuits Corporation (APM) arm ARM Ltd. +atmel Atmel Corporation chrp Common Hardware Reference Platform dallas Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor) denx Denx Software Engineering @@ -28,6 +29,7 @@ nintendo Nintendo nvidia NVIDIA nxp NXP Semiconductors powervr Imagination Technologies +qcom Qualcomm, Inc. ramtron Ramtron International samsung Samsung Semiconductor schindler Schindler -- cgit v1.2.3 From e369fde1af20c7c67acff3bc4a36e451f38ae7d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Rientjes Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2011 14:11:38 -0700 Subject: thp: fix khugepaged defrag tunable documentation Commit e27e6151b154 ("mm/thp: use conventional format for boolean attributes") changed /sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag to be tuned by using 1 (enabled) or 0 (disabled) instead of "yes" and "no", respectively. Update the documentation. Signed-off-by: David Rientjes Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt index 0924aaca330..29bdf62aac0 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt @@ -123,10 +123,11 @@ be automatically shutdown if it's set to "never". khugepaged runs usually at low frequency so while one may not want to invoke defrag algorithms synchronously during the page faults, it should be worth invoking defrag at least in khugepaged. However it's -also possible to disable defrag in khugepaged: +also possible to disable defrag in khugepaged by writing 0 or enable +defrag in khugepaged by writing 1: -echo yes >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag -echo no >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag +echo 0 >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag +echo 1 >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag You can also control how many pages khugepaged should scan at each pass: -- cgit v1.2.3 From be304970850806abea880da95fbfb743a4d9f87d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2011 09:30:01 -0300 Subject: [media] move tm6000 to drivers/media/video The serious bugs got fixed already. Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b5edce48799 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tm6000 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + 1 -> Generic tm5600 board (tm5600) [6000:0001] + 2 -> Generic tm6000 board (tm6000) [6000:0001] + 3 -> Generic tm6010 board (tm6010) [6000:0002] + 4 -> 10Moons UT821 (tm5600) [6000:0001] + 5 -> 10Moons UT330 (tm5600) + 6 -> ADSTech Dual TV (tm6000) [06e1:f332] + 7 -> FreeCom and similar (tm6000) [14aa:0620] + 8 -> ADSTech Mini Dual TV (tm6000) [06e1:b339] + 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR-900H/USB2 Stick (tm6010) [2040:6600,2040:6601,2040:6610,2040:6611] + 10 -> Beholder Wander (tm6010) [6000:dec0] + 11 -> Beholder Voyager (tm6010) [6000:dec1] + 12 -> TerraTec Cinergy Hybrid XE/Cinergy Hybrid Stick (tm6010) [0ccd:0086,0ccd:00a5] + 13 -> TwinHan TU501 (tm6010) [13d3:3240,13d3:3241,13d3:3243,13d3:3264] + 14 -> Beholder Wander Lite (tm6010) [6000:dec2] + 15 -> Beholder Voyager Lite (tm6010) [6000:dec3] + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 227bd5b3539a50290ec48b90c42c40cc7ae27191 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Laurent Pinchart Date: Sat, 30 Jul 2011 16:19:49 -0300 Subject: [media] uvcvideo: Remove deprecated UVCIOC ioctls The UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD, UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP_OLD, UVCIOC_CTRL_GET and UVCIOC_CTRL_SET ioctls are deprecated and were scheduled for removal for v2.6.42. As v2.6.42 == v3.2, remove them. Signed-off-by: Laurent Pinchart Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 23 ----------------------- 1 file changed, 23 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 4dc46547766..ead08f1c7c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -495,29 +495,6 @@ Who: Jean Delvare ---------------------------- -What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD in the uvcvideo driver -When: 3.2 -Why: The information passed to the driver by this ioctl is now queried - dynamically from the device. -Who: Laurent Pinchart - ----------------------------- - -What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP_OLD in the uvcvideo driver -When: 3.2 -Why: Used only by applications compiled against older driver versions. - Superseded by UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP which supports V4L2 menu controls. -Who: Laurent Pinchart - ----------------------------- - -What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_GET and UVCIOC_CTRL_SET in the uvcvideo driver -When: 3.2 -Why: Superseded by the UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY ioctl. -Who: Laurent Pinchart - ----------------------------- - What: Support for driver specific ioctls in the pwc driver (everything defined in media/pwc-ioctl.h) When: 3.3 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8f12b1ab2fac0edbc5d8ad64f962fe40662c5b72 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Jean-Fran=C3=A7ois=20Moine?= Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2011 07:49:35 -0300 Subject: [media] gspca - topro: New subdriver for Topro webcams MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit This driver is based on Anders Blomdell's source proposed in april 2009. It has been extended to handle the tp6810 bridge and the soi763a sensor. Signed-off-by: Jean-François Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 49102fb4758..58d00824d75 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -200,6 +200,8 @@ gl860 05e3:0503 Genesys Logic PC Camera gl860 05e3:f191 Genesys Logic PC Camera spca561 060b:a001 Maxell Compact Pc PM3 zc3xx 0698:2003 CTX M730V built in +topro 06a2:0003 TP6800 PC Camera, CmoX CX0342 webcam +topro 06a2:6810 Creative Qmax nw80x 06a5:0000 Typhoon Webcam 100 USB nw80x 06a5:d001 Divio based webcams nw80x 06a5:d800 Divio Chicony TwinkleCam, Trust SpaceCam -- cgit v1.2.3 From e1771299356ddabde6ff5c0e70a6b2af9f589e76 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wolfram Sang Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2011 04:47:58 -0300 Subject: [media] gspca - zc3xx: New webcam 03f0:1b07 HP Premium Starter Cam MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Wolfram Sang Signed-off-by: Jean-François Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 58d00824d75..b15e29f3112 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ xxxx vend:prod ---- spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknown Camera spca508 0130:0130 Clone Digital Webcam 11043 +zc3xx 03f0:1b07 HP Premium Starter Cam m5602 0402:5602 ALi Video Camera Controller spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325 spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8c3ba334f8588e1d5099f8602cf01897720e0eca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sasha Levin Date: Mon, 18 Jul 2011 17:17:15 +0300 Subject: KVM: x86: Raise the hard VCPU count limit The patch raises the hard limit of VCPU count to 254. This will allow developers to easily work on scalability and will allow users to test high VCPU setups easily without patching the kernel. To prevent possible issues with current setups, KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS now returns the recommended VCPU limit (which is still 64) - this should be a safe value for everybody, while a new KVM_CAP_MAX_VCPUS returns the hard limit which is now 254. Cc: Avi Kivity Cc: Ingo Molnar Cc: Marcelo Tosatti Cc: Pekka Enberg Suggested-by: Pekka Enberg Signed-off-by: Sasha Levin Signed-off-by: Marcelo Tosatti --- Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt | 11 +++++++++-- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index b0e4b9cd6a6..75cd8fba0cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -175,10 +175,17 @@ Parameters: vcpu id (apic id on x86) Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer -in the range [0, max_vcpus). You can use KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS of the -KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() to determine the value for max_vcpus at run-time. +in the range [0, max_vcpus). + +The recommended max_vcpus value can be retrieved using the KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS of +the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() at run-time. +The maximum possible value for max_vcpus can be retrieved using the +KVM_CAP_MAX_VCPUS of the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() at run-time. + If the KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS does not exist, you should assume that max_vcpus is 4 cpus max. +If the KVM_CAP_MAX_VCPUS does not exist, you should assume that max_vcpus is +same as the value returned from KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS. On powerpc using book3s_hv mode, the vcpus are mapped onto virtual threads in one or more virtual CPU cores. (This is because the -- cgit v1.2.3 From e1a72ae287f3ea4fea63b6f14a662a15e8c11960 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sasha Levin Date: Tue, 9 Aug 2011 14:28:35 +0300 Subject: KVM: nVMX: Document 'nested' parameter Add documentation of the new 'nested' parameter to 'Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt'. Cc: Avi Kivity Cc: Marcelo Tosatti Cc: Nadav Har'El Signed-off-by: Sasha Levin Signed-off-by: Avi Kivity --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 854ed5ca7e3..4711a885d5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1181,6 +1181,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. [KVM,Intel] Disable FlexPriority feature (TPR shadow). Default is 1 (enabled) + kvm-intel.nested= + [KVM,Intel] Enable VMX nesting (nVMX). + Default is 0 (disabled) + kvm-intel.unrestricted_guest= [KVM,Intel] Disable unrestricted guest feature (virtualized real and unpaged mode) on capable -- cgit v1.2.3 From 364426871ca33752a6e8fcfccec4d89e2eaf06f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Avi Kivity Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2011 16:27:08 +0300 Subject: KVM: Restore missing powerpc API docs Commit 371fefd6 lost a doc hunk somehow, restore it. Signed-off-by: Avi Kivity --- Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt | 13 +++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 75cd8fba0cd..2d510b6a649 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -200,6 +200,19 @@ allocation of vcpu ids. For example, if userspace wants single-threaded guest vcpus, it should make all vcpu ids be a multiple of the number of vcpus per vcore. +On powerpc using book3s_hv mode, the vcpus are mapped onto virtual +threads in one or more virtual CPU cores. (This is because the +hardware requires all the hardware threads in a CPU core to be in the +same partition.) The KVM_CAP_PPC_SMT capability indicates the number +of vcpus per virtual core (vcore). The vcore id is obtained by +dividing the vcpu id by the number of vcpus per vcore. The vcpus in a +given vcore will always be in the same physical core as each other +(though that might be a different physical core from time to time). +Userspace can control the threading (SMT) mode of the guest by its +allocation of vcpu ids. For example, if userspace wants +single-threaded guest vcpus, it should make all vcpu ids be a multiple +of the number of vcpus per vcore. + 4.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) Capability: basic -- cgit v1.2.3 From 821246a5a548858c78a5e8860862e91c9e035d6b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Graf Date: Wed, 31 Aug 2011 10:58:55 +0200 Subject: KVM: Update documentation to include detailed ENABLE_CAP description We have an ioctl that enables capabilities individually, but no description on what exactly happens when we enable a capability using this ioctl. This patch adds documentation for capability enabling in a new section of the API documentation. Signed-off-by: Alexander Graf Signed-off-by: Avi Kivity --- Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt | 47 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 47 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 2d510b6a649..7945b0bd35e 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -1653,3 +1653,50 @@ developer registration required to access it). char padding[256]; }; }; + +6. Capabilities that can be enabled + +There are certain capabilities that change the behavior of the virtual CPU when +enabled. To enable them, please see section 4.37. Below you can find a list of +capabilities and what their effect on the vCPU is when enabling them. + +The following information is provided along with the description: + + Architectures: which instruction set architectures provide this ioctl. + x86 includes both i386 and x86_64. + + Parameters: what parameters are accepted by the capability. + + Returns: the return value. General error numbers (EBADF, ENOMEM, EINVAL) + are not detailed, but errors with specific meanings are. + +6.1 KVM_CAP_PPC_OSI + +Architectures: ppc +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error + +This capability enables interception of OSI hypercalls that otherwise would +be treated as normal system calls to be injected into the guest. OSI hypercalls +were invented by Mac-on-Linux to have a standardized communication mechanism +between the guest and the host. + +When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_OSI can occur. + +6.2 KVM_CAP_PPC_PAPR + +Architectures: ppc +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error + +This capability enables interception of PAPR hypercalls. PAPR hypercalls are +done using the hypercall instruction "sc 1". + +It also sets the guest privilege level to "supervisor" mode. Usually the guest +runs in "hypervisor" privilege mode with a few missing features. + +In addition to the above, it changes the semantics of SDR1. In this mode, the +HTAB address part of SDR1 contains an HVA instead of a GPA, as PAPR keeps the +HTAB invisible to the guest. + +When this capability is enabled, KVM_EXIT_PAPR_HCALL can occur. -- cgit v1.2.3 From af75655c066621352c419646ec0775e9523dc720 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jamie Iles Date: Mon, 25 Jul 2011 17:36:42 +0100 Subject: picoxcell: support for Picochip picoxcell devices picoXcell is a family of femtocell devices with an ARM application processor and picoArray DSP processor array. This patch adds support for picoXcell boards to be booted using the device tree registering the VIC's, UART's and timers. v3: - fixup vic compatible string in binding v2: - cleanup empty mach headers - convert to of_platform_populate() - simplify uncompress.h - split vic node into 2 devices - add missing __initconst attributes Signed-off-by: Jamie Iles --- .../devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt | 24 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 24 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e75c0ef51e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/picoxcell.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Picochip picoXcell device tree bindings. +======================================== + +Required root node properties: + - compatible: + - "picochip,pc7302-pc3x3" : PC7302 development board with PC3X3 device. + - "picochip,pc7302-pc3x2" : PC7302 development board with PC3X2 device. + - "picochip,pc3x3" : picoXcell PC3X3 device based board. + - "picochip,pc3x2" : picoXcell PC3X2 device based board. + +Timers required properties: + - compatible = "picochip,pc3x2-timer" + - interrupts : The single IRQ line for the timer. + - clock-freq : The frequency in HZ of the timer. + - reg : The register bank for the timer. + +Note: two timers are required - one for the scheduler clock and one for the +event tick/NOHZ. + +VIC required properties: + - compatible = "arm,pl192-vic". + - interrupt-controller. + - reg : The register bank for the device. + - #interrupt-cells : Must be 1. -- cgit v1.2.3 From c1045e87b2cd293d53dff19779ea46b19195d593 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andiry Xu Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2011 14:19:53 -0700 Subject: usbcore: add sysfs support to xHCI usb2 hardware LPM This patch adds sysfs support to xHCI usb2 hardware LPM, so developer can enable and disable usb2 hardware LPM manually for test purpose. Signed-off-by: Andiry Xu Signed-off-by: Sarah Sharp Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb | 15 +++++++++++++++ Documentation/usb/power-management.txt | 26 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 41 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 294aa864a60..e647378e9e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -142,3 +142,18 @@ Description: such devices. Users: usb_modeswitch + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb2_hardware_lpm +Date: September 2011 +Contact: Andiry Xu +Description: + If CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND is set and a USB 2.0 lpm-capable device + is plugged in to a xHCI host which support link PM, it will + perform a LPM test; if the test is passed and host supports + USB2 hardware LPM (xHCI 1.0 feature), USB2 hardware LPM will + be enabled for the device and the USB device directory will + contain a file named power/usb2_hardware_lpm. The file holds + a string value (enable or disable) indicating whether or not + USB2 hardware LPM is enabled for the device. Developer can + write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to the file to enable/disable the + feature. diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index c9ffa9ced7e..9d85d96ec6e 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -487,3 +487,29 @@ succeed, it may still remain active and thus cause the system to resume as soon as the system suspend is complete. Or the remote wakeup may fail and get lost. Which outcome occurs depends on timing and on the hardware and firmware design. + + + xHCI hardware link PM + --------------------- + +xHCI host controller provides hardware link power management to usb2.0 +(xHCI 1.0 feature) and usb3.0 devices which support link PM. By +enabling hardware LPM, the host can automatically put the device into +lower power state(L1 for usb2.0 devices, or U1/U2 for usb3.0 devices), +which state device can enter and resume very quickly. + +The user interface for controlling USB2 hardware LPM is located in the +power/ subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in +/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID. The +relevant attribute files is usb2_hardware_lpm. + + power/usb2_hardware_lpm + + When a USB2 device which support LPM is plugged to a + xHCI host root hub which support software LPM, the + host will run a software LPM test for it; if the device + enters L1 state and resume successfully and the host + supports USB2 hardware LPM, this file will show up and + driver will enable hardware LPM for the device. You + can write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to the file to enable/disable + USB2 hardware LPM manually. This is for test purpose mainly. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 220c1ed1bd64b26a2edcd59ca9ff031e1b880727 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Harry Wei Date: Sat, 24 Sep 2011 15:52:18 +0800 Subject: remove the messy code file Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist This patch can remove the messy code file Documentation/zh_CN/SumitChecklist. Of course, i will also fix this matter and proofread it again and then submit it again. Signed-off-by: Harry Wei Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist | 109 ------------------------------------ 1 file changed, 109 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist deleted file mode 100644 index 4c741d6bc04..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -Chinese translated version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist - -If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the -original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem -communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for -help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated -or if there is a problem with the translation. - -Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -Documentation/SubmitChecklist ”ÄÖĐÎÄ·­Òë - -ÈçčûÏëÆÀÂÛ»òžüбŸÎÄ”ÄÄÚÈĘŁŹÇëÖ±œÓÁȘϔԭÎÄ”””ÄÎŹ»€ŐߥŁÈçčûÄăÊčÓĂÓąÎÄ -œ»ÁśÓĐÀ§ÄєĻ°ŁŹÒČżÉÒÔÏòÖĐÎÄ°æÎŹ»€ŐßÇóÖúĄŁÈçčû±Ÿ·­ÒëžüĐÂČ»Œ°Ê±»òŐß·­ -ÒëŽæÔÚÎÊÌ⣏ÇëÁȘÏ”ÖĐÎÄ°æÎŹ»€ŐߥŁ - -ÖĐÎÄ°æÎŹ»€Őߣș ŒÖÍțÍț Harry Wei -ÖĐÎÄ°æ·­ÒëŐߣș ŒÖÍțÍț Harry Wei -ÖĐÎÄ°æĐŁÒëŐߣș ŒÖÍțÍț Harry Wei - - -ÒÔÏÂÎȘŐęÎÄ ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -LinuxÄÚșËÌ᜻Ç攄 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -ŐâÀïÓĐÒ»Đ©ÄÚșËżȘ·ąŐßÓŠžĂŚö”Ä»ù±ŸÊÂÇ飏ÈçčûËûĂÇÏ뿎”œŚÔŒș”ÄÄÚșËČ趥Ì᜻ -±»œÓÊܔĞüżìĄŁ - -ŐâĐ©¶ŒÊÇłŹłöDocumentation/SubmittingPatchesÎÄ””ÀïËùÌáč©”ÄÒÔŒ°ÆäËû -čŰÓÚÌ᜻LinuxÄÚșËČ趥”Ä˔ÜĄŁ - -1ŁșÈçčûÄăÊčÓĂÁËÒ»žöčŠÄÜÄÇĂŽŸÍ#include¶šÒć/ÉùĂśÄÇžöčŠÄÜ”ÄÄÇžöÎÄŒțĄŁ - Č»ÒȘÒÀżżÆäËûŒäœÓÒęÈ붚Òć/ÉùĂśÄÇžöčŠÄÜ”ÄÍ·ÎÄŒțĄŁ - -2ŁșččœšŒòœàÊÊÓĂ»òŐßžüžÄCONFIGŃĄÏî =yŁŹ=mŁŹ»òŐß=nĄŁ - Č»ÒȘÓбàÒëŸŻžæ/ŽíÎóŁŹ Č»ÒȘÓĐÁŽœÓŸŻžæ/ŽíÎóĄŁ - -2bŁșÍščę allnoconfig, allmodconfig - -2cŁș”±ÊčÓĂ 0=builddir łÉ芔Űččœš - -3ŁșÍščęÊčÓñŸ”Űœ»Čæ±àÒëč€Ÿß»òŐßÆäËûÒ»Đ©ččœšČúËùŁŹÔÚ¶àCPUżòŒÜÉÏččœšĄŁ - -4Łșppc64 ÊÇÒ»žöșÜșĂ”ÄŒìČ霻Čæ±àÒë”ÄżòŒÜŁŹÒòÎȘËüÍùÍù°ŃĄźunsigned longĄŻ - ”±64λ֔ÀŽÊčÓĂĄŁ - -5Łș°ŽŐŐDocumentation/CodingStyleÎÄŒțÀï”ÄÏêÏžĂèÊöŁŹŒìČéÄăČ趥”ÄŐûÌć·çžńĄŁ - ÊčÓĂČ趥·çžńŒìČéËöËé”Ä΄čæ(scripts/checkpatch.pl)ŁŹÉóșËÔ±ÓĆÏÈÌ᜻ĄŁ - ÄăÓŠžĂ”śŐûÒĆÁôÔÚÄăČ趥ÖĐ”ÄËùÓĐ΄čæĄŁ - -6ŁșÈÎșΞüĐ»òŐߞĶŻCONFIGŃĄÏî¶ŒČ»ÄÜŽòÂÒĆäÖĂČË”„ĄŁ - -7ŁșËùÓĐ”ÄKconfigŃĄÏîžüжŒÒȘÓĐ˔ÜÎÄŚÖĄŁ - -8ŁșÒŃŸ­ÈÏŐæ”ŰŚÜœáÁËÏàčŰ”ÄKconfigŚéșÏĄŁŐâÊÇșÜÄŃÍščęČâÊÔŚöșĂ”Ä--ÄÔÁŠÔÚŐâÀïÏÂœ”ĄŁ - -9ŁșŒìČéŸßÓĐŒòœàĐÔĄŁ - -10ŁșÊčÓĂ'make checkstack'șÍ'make namespacecheck'ŒìČéŁŹÈ»șóĐȚžÄËùŐÒ”œ”ÄÎÊÌ⥣ - ŚąÒâŁș¶ŃŐ»ŒìČéČ»»áĂśÈ·”ŰłöÏÖÎÊÌ⣏”«ÊÇÈÎșΔÄÒ»žöșŻÊęÔÚ¶ŃŐ»ÉÏÊčÓöàÓÚ512ŚÖœÚ - ¶ŒÒȘŚŒ±žĐȚžÄĄŁ - -11Łș°üșŹkernel-doc”œÈ«ŸÖÄÚșËAPIsÎÄŒțĄŁŁšČ»ÒȘÇóŸČÌŹ”ÄșŻÊ꣏”«ÊÇ°üșŹÒČÎȚËùÎœĄŁŁ© - ÊčÓĂ'make htmldocs'»òŐß'make mandocs'ÀŽŒìČékernel-docŁŹÈ»șóĐȚžÄÈÎșÎ - ·ąÏÖ”ÄÎÊÌ⥣ - -12ŁșÒŃŸ­ÍščęCONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, - CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, - CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEPČâÊÔŁŹČąÇÒÍŹÊ±¶Œ - ÊčÄÜĄŁ - -13ŁșÒŃŸ­¶ŒččœšČąÇÒÊčÓĂ»òŐßČ»ÊčÓĂ CONFIG_SMP șÍ CONFIG_PREEMPTČâÊÔÖŽĐĐʱŒäĄŁ - -14ŁșÈçčûČ趥ӰÏìIO/DiskŁŹ”È”ÈŁșÒŃŸ­ÍščęÊčÓĂ»òŐßČ»ÊčÓĂ CONFIG_LBDAF ČâÊÔĄŁ - -15ŁșËùÓĐ”ÄcodepathsÒŃŸ­ĐĐÊčËùÓĐlockdepÆôÓĂčŠÄÜĄŁ - -16ŁșËùÓĐ”Ä/procŒÇÂŒžüжŒÒȘŚśłÉÎÄŒț·ĆÔÚDocumentation/ÄżÂŒÏÂĄŁ - -17ŁșËùÓĐ”ÄÄÚșËÆô¶ŻČÎÊęžüжŒ±»ŒÇÂŒ”œDocumentation/kernel-parameters.txtÎÄŒțÖĐĄŁ - -18ŁșËùÓĐ”ÄÄŁżéČÎÊęžüжŒÓĂMODULE_PARM_DESC()ŒÇÂŒĄŁ - -19ŁșËùÓĐ”ÄÓĂ»§żŐŒäœÓżÚžüжŒ±»ŒÇÂŒ”œDocumentation/ABI/ĄŁČ鿎Documentation/ABI/README - żÉÒÔ»ń”Ăžü¶à”ÄĐĆÏąĄŁžÄ±äÓĂ»§żŐŒäœÓżÚ”ÄČ趥ӊžĂ±»ÓÊŒțł­ËÍžűlinux-api@vger.kernel.orgĄŁ - -20ŁșŒìČéËüÊÇČ»ÊǶŒÍščę`make headers_check'ĄŁ - -21ŁșÒŃŸ­ÍščęÖÁÉÙÒęÈëslabșÍpage-allocationʧ°ÜŒìČ饣Č鿎Documentation/fault-injection/ĄŁ - -22ŁșĐÂŒÓÈë”ÄÔŽÂëÒŃŸ­Íščę`gcc -W'ŁšÊčÓĂ"make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W"Ł©±àÒ륣ŐâŃùœ«ČúÉúșÜ¶à·łÄŐŁŹ - ”«ÊǶÔÓÚŃ°ŐÒ©¶ŽșÜÓĐÒ掊ŁŹÀęÈç:"warning: comparison between signed and unsigned"ĄŁ - -23Łș”±Ëü±»șÏČą”œ-mmČ趥ŒŻșóÔÙČâÊÔŁŹÓĂÀŽÈ·¶šËüÊÇ·ń»čșÍČ趥¶ÓÁĐÖĐ”ÄÆäËûČč¶ĄÒ»Æđ而śÒÔŒ°ÔÚVMŁŹVFS - șÍÆäËûŚÓÏ”ÍłÖĐžśžö±ä»ŻĄŁ - -24ŁșËùÓĐ”ÄÄÚŽæÆÁŐÏ{e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()}ĐèÒȘÔÚÔŽŽúÂëÖĐ”ÄÒ»žöŚąÊÍÀŽœâÊÍËûĂǶŒÊÇžÉÊČĂŽ”Ä - ÒÔŒ°Ô­ÒòĄŁ - -25ŁșÈçčûÓĐÈÎșÎÊäÈëÊäłöżŰÖÆ”ÄČ趥±»ÌíŒÓŁŹÒČÒȘžüĐÂDocumentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txtĄŁ - -26ŁșÈçčûÄă”ÄžüžÄŽúÂëÒÀżż»òŐßÊčÓĂÈÎșΔÄÄÚșËAPIs»òŐßÓëÏÂĂæ”Äkconfig·ûșĆÓĐčŰÏ””ÄčŠÄÜŁŹÄăŸÍÒȘ - ÊčÓĂÏàčŰ”Äkconfig·ûșĆč۱գŹ and/or =mŁšÈçčûŃĄÏîÌáč©Ł©[ÔÚÍŹÒ»Ê±ŒäČ»ÊÇËùÓÔĶŒÆôÓĂŁŹœöœöžśžö»òŐߌÔÓÉ - ŚéșÏËûĂÇ]Łș - - CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI, - CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_HOTPLUG, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ, - CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (șóÒ»žöÊčÓĂ CONFIG_NET=y) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 446b792c6bd87de4565ba200b75a708b4c575a06 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonghun Han Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2011 01:14:04 -0300 Subject: [media] media: DocBook: Fix trivial typo in Sub-device Interface When satisfied with the try results, applications can set the active formats by setting the which argument to V4L2_SUBDEV_FORMAT_ACTIVE not V4L2_SUBDEV_FORMAT_TRY. Signed-off-by: Jonghun Han Acked-by: Laurent Pinchart Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml index 05c8fefcbcb..0916a7343a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ When satisfied with the try results, applications can set the active formats by setting the which argument to - V4L2_SUBDEV_FORMAT_TRY. Active formats are changed + V4L2_SUBDEV_FORMAT_ACTIVE. Active formats are changed exactly as try formats by drivers. To avoid modifying the hardware state during format negotiation, applications should negotiate try formats first and then modify the active settings using the try formats returned during -- cgit v1.2.3 From 395cf9691d72173d8cdaa613c5f0255f993af94b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Paul Bolle Date: Mon, 15 Aug 2011 02:02:26 +0200 Subject: doc: fix broken references There are numerous broken references to Documentation files (in other Documentation files, in comments, etc.). These broken references are caused by typo's in the references, and by renames or removals of the Documentation files. Some broken references are simply odd. Fix these broken references, sometimes by dropping the irrelevant text they were part of. Signed-off-by: Paul Bolle Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/PCI/pci.txt | 2 +- Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt | 2 +- Documentation/block/biodoc.txt | 2 +- Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt | 2 +- Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt | 2 +- Documentation/development-process/4.Coding | 2 +- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt | 2 +- Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt | 6 +++--- Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt | 11 ++++++----- Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt | 2 +- Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt | 5 +++-- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 2 +- Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt | 3 --- Documentation/frv/booting.txt | 6 ------ Documentation/input/input.txt | 2 +- Documentation/kernel-docs.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 12 ++++++------ Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/media-framework.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/memory-barriers.txt | 2 +- Documentation/networking/scaling.txt | 2 +- Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt | 2 +- Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt | 3 ++- Documentation/rfkill.txt | 3 +-- Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt | 2 +- Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt | 5 ----- Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt | 3 ++- Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 | 3 +-- Documentation/spi/pxa2xx | 4 ++-- Documentation/timers/highres.txt | 2 +- Documentation/usb/dma.txt | 6 +++--- Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c | 2 +- Documentation/vm/numa | 4 ++-- Documentation/vm/slub.txt | 2 +- 34 files changed, 54 insertions(+), 66 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt index 6148d4080f8..aa09e5476bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ from the PCI device config space. Use the values in the pci_dev structure as the PCI "bus address" might have been remapped to a "host physical" address by the arch/chip-set specific kernel support. -See Documentation/IO-mapping.txt for how to access device registers +See Documentation/io-mapping.txt for how to access device registers or device memory. The device driver needs to call pci_request_region() to verify diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt index f731c1e5647..d36b01f778b 100644 --- a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt +++ b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * File: Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-note.txt + * File: Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt * Based on: * Author: * diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index c6d84cfd2f5..e418dc0a708 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ a virtual address mapping (unlike the earlier scheme of virtual address do not have a corresponding kernel virtual address space mapping) and low-memory pages. -Note: Please refer to Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt for a discussion +Note: Please refer to Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt for a discussion on PCI high mem DMA aspects and mapping of scatter gather lists, and support for 64 bit PCI. diff --git a/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt b/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt index 1b5aa10df84..2bc55ff3b4d 100644 --- a/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt +++ b/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ [ NOTE: The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been superseded by the functionality provided by the PCI DMA interface - (see Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt). They continue + (see Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt). They continue to be documented below for historical purposes, but new code must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12 ] diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt b/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt index 13c251d5add..2834170d821 100644 --- a/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt +++ b/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ this interface. (see http://tom.ist-im-web.de/download/pktcdvd ) For a description of the sysfs interface look into the file: - Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-pktcdvd + Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-pktcdvd Using the pktcdvd debugfs interface diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding index 83f5f5b365a..e3cb6a56653 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding +++ b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ enabled, a configurable percentage of memory allocations will be made to fail; these failures can be restricted to a specific range of code. Running with fault injection enabled allows the programmer to see how the code responds when things go badly. See -Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.text for more information on +Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt for more information on how to use this facility. Other kinds of errors can be found with the "sparse" static analysis tool. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt index 064db928c3c..141087cf310 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ node's name represents the name of the corresponding LED. LED sub-node properties: - gpios : Should specify the LED's GPIO, see "Specifying GPIO information - for devices" in Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt. Active + for devices" in Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt. Active low LEDs should be indicated using flags in the GPIO specifier. - label : (optional) The label for this LED. If omitted, the label is taken from the node name (excluding the unit address). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt index e8b0a35d8fe..58313348da8 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/object.txt @@ -127,9 +127,9 @@ fscache_enqueue_object()). PROVISION OF CPU TIME --------------------- -The work to be done by the various states is given CPU time by the threads of -the slow work facility (see Documentation/slow-work.txt). This is used in -preference to the workqueue facility because: +The work to be done by the various states was given CPU time by the threads of +the slow work facility. This was used in preference to the workqueue facility +because: (1) Threads may be completely occupied for very long periods of time by a particular work item. These state actions may be doing sequences of diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt index fab857accbd..2cf81082581 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/locks.txt @@ -53,11 +53,12 @@ fcntl(), with all the problems that implies. 1.3 Mandatory Locking As A Mount Option --------------------------------------- -Mandatory locking, as described in 'Documentation/filesystems/mandatory.txt' -was prior to this release a general configuration option that was valid for -all mounted filesystems. This had a number of inherent dangers, not the -least of which was the ability to freeze an NFS server by asking it to read -a file for which a mandatory lock existed. +Mandatory locking, as described in +'Documentation/filesystems/mandatory-locking.txt' was prior to this release a +general configuration option that was valid for all mounted filesystems. This +had a number of inherent dangers, not the least of which was the ability to +freeze an NFS server by asking it to read a file for which a mandatory lock +existed. From this release of the kernel, mandatory locking can be turned on and off on a per-filesystem basis, using the mount options 'mand' and 'nomand'. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt index 9c8fd614865..120fd3cf7fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ request-key will find the first matching line and corresponding program. In this case, /some/other/program will handle all uid lookups and /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap will handle gid, user, and group lookups. -See for more information +See for more information about the request-key function. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt index dcf83358716..8aef9133570 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/design_notes.txt @@ -58,8 +58,9 @@ data transfers. POHMELFS clients operate with a working set of servers and are capable of balancing read-only operations (like lookups or directory listings) between them according to IO priorities. Administrators can add or remove servers from the set at run-time via special commands (described -in Documentation/pohmelfs/info.txt file). Writes are replicated to all servers, which are connected -with write permission turned on. IO priority and permissions can be changed in run-time. +in Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/info.txt file). Writes are replicated to all servers, which +are connected with write permission turned on. IO priority and permissions can be changed in +run-time. POHMELFS is capable of full data channel encryption and/or strong crypto hashing. One can select any kernel supported cipher, encryption mode, hash type and operation mode diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index db3b1aba32a..0ec91f03422 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ review the kernel documentation in the directory /usr/src/linux/Documentation. This chapter is heavily based on the documentation included in the pre 2.2 kernels, and became part of it in version 2.2.1 of the Linux kernel. -Please see: Documentation/sysctls/ directory for descriptions of these +Please see: Documentation/sysctl/ directory for descriptions of these entries. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 52d8fb81cff..43cbd082172 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -1053,9 +1053,6 @@ manipulate dentries: and the dentry is returned. The caller must use dput() to free the dentry when it finishes using it. -For further information on dentry locking, please refer to the document -Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt. - Mount Options ============= diff --git a/Documentation/frv/booting.txt b/Documentation/frv/booting.txt index 37c4d84a0e5..9bdf4b46e74 100644 --- a/Documentation/frv/booting.txt +++ b/Documentation/frv/booting.txt @@ -180,9 +180,3 @@ separated by spaces: This tells the kernel what program to run initially. By default this is /sbin/init, but /sbin/sash or /bin/sh are common alternatives. - - (*) vdc=... - - This option configures the MB93493 companion chip visual display - driver. Please see Documentation/frv/mb93493/vdc.txt for more - information. diff --git a/Documentation/input/input.txt b/Documentation/input/input.txt index b93c08442e3..b3d6787b4fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/input.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/input.txt @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ LCDs and many other purposes. The monitor and speaker controls should be easy to add to the hid/input interface, but for the UPSs and LCDs it doesn't make much sense. For this, -the hiddev interface was designed. See Documentation/usb/hiddev.txt +the hiddev interface was designed. See Documentation/hid/hiddev.txt for more information about it. The usage of the usbhid module is very simple, it takes no parameters, diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt index 0e0734b509d..eda1eb1451a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ * Title: "The Kernel Hacking HOWTO" Author: Various Talented People, and Rusty. - Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking/ + Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl (must be built as "make {htmldocs | psdocs | pdfdocs}) Keywords: HOWTO, kernel contexts, deadlock, locking, modules, symbols, return conventions. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ * Title: "Linux Kernel Locking HOWTO" Author: Various Talented People, and Rusty. - Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking/ + Location: in kernel tree, Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl (must be built as "make {htmldocs | psdocs | pdfdocs}) Keywords: locks, locking, spinlock, semaphore, atomic, race condition, bottom halves, tasklets, softirqs. diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 854ed5ca7e3..be9370c764c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT copy_dsdt -- copy DSDT to memory - See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi + See also Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt, pci=noacpi acpi_rsdp= [ACPI,EFI,KEXEC] Pass the RSDP address to the kernel, mostly used @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. amijoy.map= [HW,JOY] Amiga joystick support Map of devices attached to JOY0DAT and JOY1DAT Format: , - See also Documentation/kernel/input/joystick.txt + See also Documentation/input/joystick.txt analog.map= [HW,JOY] Analog joystick and gamepad support Specifies type or capabilities of an analog joystick @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. bttv.radio= Most important insmod options are available as kernel args too. bttv.pll= See Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options - bttv.tuner= and Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CARDLIST + bttv.tuner= bulk_remove=off [PPC] This parameter disables the use of the pSeries firmware feature for flushing multiple hpte entries @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. elevator= [IOSCHED] Format: {"cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} - See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt and + See Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. elfcorehdr= [IA-64,PPC,SH,X86] @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. fail_make_request=[KNL] General fault injection mechanism. Format: ,,, - See also /Documentation/fault-injection/. + See also Documentation/fault-injection/. floppy= [HW] See Documentation/blockdev/floppy.txt. @@ -2375,7 +2375,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Format: sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver - See Documentation/sonypi.txt + See Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt specialix= [HW,SERIAL] Specialix multi-serial port adapter See Documentation/serial/specialix.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 61815483efa..3ff0dad62d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ status as "unknown". The available commands are: sysfs notes: The ThinkLight sysfs interface is documented by the LED class -documentation, in Documentation/leds-class.txt. The ThinkLight LED name +documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt. The ThinkLight LED name is "tpacpi::thinklight". Due to limitations in the sysfs LED class, if the status of the ThinkLight @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink. sysfs notes: The ThinkPad LED sysfs interface is described in detail by the LED class -documentation, in Documentation/leds-class.txt. +documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt. The LEDs are named (in LED ID order, from 0 to 12): "tpacpi::power", "tpacpi:orange:batt", "tpacpi:green:batt", diff --git a/Documentation/media-framework.txt b/Documentation/media-framework.txt index 669b5fb03a8..3a0f879533c 100644 --- a/Documentation/media-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/media-framework.txt @@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ Introduction ------------ The media controller API is documented in DocBook format in -Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-controller.xml. This document will focus on -the kernel-side implementation of the media framework. +Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/media-controller.xml. This document will focus +on the kernel-side implementation of the media framework. Abstract media device model diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index f0d3a8026a5..2759f7c188f 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ There are certain things that the Linux kernel memory barriers do not guarantee: [*] For information on bus mastering DMA and coherency please read: Documentation/PCI/pci.txt - Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt + Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt Documentation/DMA-API.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt index 58fd7414e6c..729985ed05b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ of queues to IRQs can be determined from /proc/interrupts. By default, an IRQ may be handled on any CPU. Because a non-negligible part of packet processing takes place in receive interrupt handling, it is advantageous to spread receive interrupts between CPUs. To manually adjust the IRQ -affinity of each interrupt see Documentation/IRQ-affinity. Some systems +affinity of each interrupt see Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt. Some systems will be running irqbalance, a daemon that dynamically optimizes IRQ assignments and as a result may override any manual settings. diff --git a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt index ddd78172ef7..05a7fe76232 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ kernel messages using the serial console. This may provide you with some information about the reasons of the suspend (resume) failure. Alternatively, it may be possible to use a FireWire port for debugging with firescope (ftp://ftp.firstfloor.org/pub/ak/firescope/). On x86 it is also possible to -use the PM_TRACE mechanism documented in Documentation/s2ram.txt . +use the PM_TRACE mechanism documented in Documentation/power/s2ram.txt . 2. Testing suspend to RAM (STR) diff --git a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt index 1101bee4e82..0e870825c1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt @@ -77,7 +77,8 @@ SNAPSHOT_SET_SWAP_AREA - set the resume partition and the offset (in resume_swap_area, as defined in kernel/power/suspend_ioctls.h, containing the resume device specification and the offset); for swap partitions the offset is always 0, but it is different from zero for - swap files (see Documentation/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for details). + swap files (see Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for + details). SNAPSHOT_PLATFORM_SUPPORT - enable/disable the hibernation platform support, depending on the argument value (enable, if the argument is nonzero) diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 83668e5dd17..03c9d9299c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -117,5 +117,4 @@ The contents of these variables corresponds to the "name", "state" and "type" sysfs files explained above. -For further details consult Documentation/ABI/stable/dev-rfkill and -Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill. +For further details consult Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt index 7bd210ab45a..ecfc474f36a 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic7xxx_old.txt @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ linux-1.1.x and fairly stable since linux-1.2.x, and are also in FreeBSD Kernel Compile options ------------------------------ The various kernel compile time options for this driver are now fairly - well documented in the file Documentation/Configure.help. In order to + well documented in the file drivers/scsi/Kconfig. In order to see this documentation, you need to use one of the advanced configuration programs (menuconfig and xconfig). If you are using the "make menuconfig" method of configuring your kernel, then you would simply highlight the diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 5f17d29c59b..a340b18cd4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -55,11 +55,6 @@ or in the same directory as the C source code. For example to find a url about the USB mass storage driver see the /usr/src/linux/drivers/usb/storage directory. -The Linux kernel source Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl file -refers to this file. With the appropriate DocBook tool-set, this permits -users to generate html, ps and pdf renderings of information within this -file (e.g. the interface functions). - Driver structure ================ Traditionally an LLD for the SCSI subsystem has been at least two files in diff --git a/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt b/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt index 5f50ccabfc8..c9e4855ed3d 100644 --- a/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt @@ -156,4 +156,5 @@ Load an encrypted key "evm" from saved blob: Other uses for trusted and encrypted keys, such as for disk and file encryption are anticipated. In particular the new format 'ecryptfs' has been defined in in order to use encrypted keys to mount an eCryptfs filesystem. More details -about the usage can be found in the file 'Documentation/keys-ecryptfs.txt'. +about the usage can be found in the file +'Documentation/security/keys-ecryptfs.txt'. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 b/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 index 951b3dce51b..3dca4b75988 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/PAS16 @@ -60,8 +60,7 @@ With PAS16 you can use two audio device files at the same time. /dev/dsp (and The new stuff for 2.3.99 and later ============================================================================ -The following configuration options from Documentation/Configure.help -are relevant to configuring the PAS16: +The following configuration options are relevant to configuring the PAS16: Sound card support CONFIG_SOUND diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 00511e08db7..3352f97430e 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ PXA2xx SPI on SSP driver HOWTO =================================================== This a mini howto on the pxa2xx_spi driver. The driver turns a PXA2xx synchronous serial port into a SPI master controller -(see Documentation/spi/spi_summary). The driver has the following features +(see Documentation/spi/spi-summary). The driver has the following features - Support for any PXA2xx SSP - SSP PIO and SSP DMA data transfers. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Declaring Slave Devices ----------------------- Typically each SPI slave (chip) is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See -"Documentation/spi/spi_summary" for additional information. +"Documentation/spi/spi-summary" for additional information. Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt index 21332233cef..e8789976e77 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ hrtimer base infrastructure --------------------------- The hrtimer base infrastructure was merged into the 2.6.16 kernel. Details of -the base implementation are covered in Documentation/hrtimers/hrtimer.txt. See +the base implementation are covered in Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt. See also figure #2 (OLS slides p. 15) The main differences to the timer wheel, which holds the armed timer_list type diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dma.txt b/Documentation/usb/dma.txt index 84ef865237d..444651e70d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/dma.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ API OVERVIEW The big picture is that USB drivers can continue to ignore most DMA issues, though they still must provide DMA-ready buffers (see -Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt). That's how they've worked through +Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt). That's how they've worked through the 2.4 (and earlier) kernels. OR: they can now be DMA-aware. @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ and effects like cache-trashing can impose subtle penalties. force a consistent memory access ordering by using memory barriers. It's not using a streaming DMA mapping, so it's good for small transfers on systems where the I/O would otherwise thrash an IOMMU mapping. (See - Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt for definitions of "coherent" and + Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt for definitions of "coherent" and "streaming" DMA mappings.) Asking for 1/Nth of a page (as well as asking for N pages) is reasonably @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ WORKING WITH EXISTING BUFFERS Existing buffers aren't usable for DMA without first being mapped into the DMA address space of the device. However, most buffers passed to your driver can safely be used with such DMA mapping. (See the first section -of Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt, titled "What memory is DMA-able?") +of Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt, titled "What memory is DMA-able?") - When you're using scatterlists, you can map everything at once. On some systems, this kicks in an IOMMU and turns the scatterlists into single diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c index d928c134dee..c095d79cae7 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ static unsigned long load_bzimage(int fd) /* * Go back to the start of the file and read the header. It should be - * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/i386/boot.txt) + * a Linux boot header (see Documentation/x86/boot.txt) */ lseek(fd, 0, SEEK_SET); read(fd, &boot, sizeof(boot)); diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa b/Documentation/vm/numa index a200a386429..ade01274212 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/numa +++ b/Documentation/vm/numa @@ -109,11 +109,11 @@ to improve NUMA locality using various CPU affinity command line interfaces, such as taskset(1) and numactl(1), and program interfaces such as sched_setaffinity(2). Further, one can modify the kernel's default local allocation behavior using Linux NUMA memory policy. -[see Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.] +[see Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt.] System administrators can restrict the CPUs and nodes' memories that a non- privileged user can specify in the scheduling or NUMA commands and functions -using control groups and CPUsets. [see Documentation/cgroups/CPUsets.txt] +using control groups and CPUsets. [see Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt] On architectures that do not hide memoryless nodes, Linux will include only zones [nodes] with memory in the zonelists. This means that for a memoryless diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt index 07375e73981..f464f47bc60 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ data and perform operation on the slabs. By default slabinfo only lists slabs that have data in them. See "slabinfo -h" for more options when running the command. slabinfo can be compiled with -gcc -o slabinfo Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c +gcc -o slabinfo tools/slub/slabinfo.c Some of the modes of operation of slabinfo require that slub debugging be enabled on the command line. F.e. no tracking information will be -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6ffe1ffb074d2152db5fbecab815915f657306bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Sean M. Collins" Date: Wed, 14 Sep 2011 21:35:52 -0400 Subject: doc: raw1394: Trivial typo fix Signed-off-by: Sean M. Collins Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 index 490aa1efc4a..ec333e67632 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Description: /dev/raw1394 was a character device file that allowed low-level access to FireWire buses. Its major drawbacks were its inability to implement sensible device security policies, and its low level - of abstraction that required userspace clients do duplicate much + of abstraction that required userspace clients to duplicate much of the kernel's ieee1394 core functionality. Replaced by /dev/fw*, i.e. the ABI of firewire-core. -- cgit v1.2.3 From e451e61b56b0401442f7a306cd309c3b0c56c285 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jason Wang Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2011 13:26:27 -0400 Subject: net: fix a typo in Documentation/networking/scaling.txt Signed-off-by: Jason Wang Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/scaling.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt index 58fd7414e6c..8ce7c30e723 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ configured. The number of entries in the global flow table is set through: The number of entries in the per-queue flow table are set through: - /sys/class/net//queues/tx-/rps_flow_cnt + /sys/class/net//queues/rx-/rps_flow_cnt == Suggested Configuration -- cgit v1.2.3 From 27fe48d97291e61e76e87c34c9b89032e70d05c0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2011 17:16:09 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add snoop option Added a new option "snoop" for the traffic control of the HD-audio controller chip. When set to 0, the non-snooping mode is used with the traffic control bit is set in each stream control register. This may allow better operations in the low power mode, but the actual implementation is depending pretty much on the chipset. As already implemented, more or less each chipset has own snoop-control register bit. Now this setup refers to the snoop option, too. Also, a new VIA chipset may require the non-snooping mode when set so in BIOS. In such a case, the option value is overridden. As default, it's still set to snoop=1 for keeping the same behavior as before. In near future, it'll be set to 0 as default after checking it works in every system well. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 27126c469f7..936699e4f04 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -891,6 +891,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. access but isn't required by the HDA spec and prevents users from specifying exact period/buffer sizes. (default = on) + snoop - Enable/disable snooping (default = on) This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. -- cgit v1.2.3 From ef940b0403d4ae133c548b01fe64c74fa8a2f0b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2011 20:12:08 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Allow patching with any vendor/subsystem ids In the ugly real world, there area really broken devices that don't set codec SSID correctly. In such a case, the ID can be random, thus the patching won't work reliably. For applying the patch forcibly to such a device, the driver will skip the vendor and/or subsystem ID checks when zero or a negative number is given in [codec] section. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index 850b1b3956a..caa3ec655ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -447,7 +447,10 @@ The file needs to have a line `[codec]`. The next line should contain three numbers indicating the codec vendor-id (0x12345678 in the example), the codec subsystem-id (0xabcd1234) and the address (2) of the codec. The rest patch entries are applied to this specified codec -until another codec entry is given. +until another codec entry is given. Passing 0 or a negative number to +the first or the second value will make the check of the corresponding +field be skipped. It'll be useful for really broken devices that don't +initialize SSID properly. The `[model]` line allows to change the model name of the each codec. In the example above, it will be changed to model=auto. -- cgit v1.2.3 From d5988af53102f3b73e5e0788be024ccfa51869de Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Wed, 15 Jun 2011 23:07:55 -0700 Subject: rcu: Update documentation to flag RCU_BOOST trace information Call out the RCU_TRACE information that is provided only in kernels built with RCU_BOOST. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/trace.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 8173cec473a..a67af0a39de 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -184,10 +184,14 @@ o "kt" is the per-CPU kernel-thread state. The digit preceding The number after the final slash is the CPU that the kthread is actually running on. + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernels. + o "ktl" is the low-order 16 bits (in hexadecimal) of the count of the number of times that this CPU's per-CPU kthread has gone through its loop servicing invoke_rcu_cpu_kthread() requests. + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernels. + o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will be deferred. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 63cd758e07743b71ed76ba7db7f93986a7591a65 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Sun, 5 Jun 2011 10:07:18 -0700 Subject: rcu: Update rcutorture documentation Update rcutorture documentation to account for boosting, new types of RCU torture testing that have been added over the past few years, and the memory-barrier testing that was added an embarrassingly long time ago. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/torture.txt | 134 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 99 insertions(+), 35 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt index 5d9016795fd..4205ed1f8ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ fqs_holdoff Holdoff time (in microseconds) between consecutive calls fqs_stutter Wait time (in seconds) between consecutive bursts of calls to force_quiescent_state(). -irqreaders Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level. This is currently +irqreader Says to invoke RCU readers from irq level. This is currently done via timers. Defaults to "1" for variants of RCU that permit this. (Or, more accurately, variants of RCU that do -not- permit this know to ignore this variable.) @@ -79,19 +79,65 @@ stutter The length of time to run the test before pausing for this Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously without pausing, which is the old default behavior. +test_boost Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to do priority + boosting. Defaults to "test_boost=1", which performs + RCU priority-inversion testing only if the selected + RCU implementation supports priority boosting. Specifying + "test_boost=0" never performs RCU priority-inversion + testing. Specifying "test_boost=2" performs RCU + priority-inversion testing even if the selected RCU + implementation does not support RCU priority boosting, + which can be used to test rcutorture's ability to + carry out RCU priority-inversion testing. + +test_boost_interval + The number of seconds in an RCU priority-inversion test + cycle. Defaults to "test_boost_interval=7". It is + usually wise for this value to be relatively prime to + the value selected for "stutter". + +test_boost_duration + The number of seconds to do RCU priority-inversion testing + within any given "test_boost_interval". Defaults to + "test_boost_duration=4". + test_no_idle_hz Whether or not to test the ability of RCU to operate in a kernel that disables the scheduling-clock interrupt to idle CPUs. Boolean parameter, "1" to test, "0" otherwise. Defaults to omitting this test. -torture_type The type of RCU to test: "rcu" for the rcu_read_lock() API, - "rcu_sync" for rcu_read_lock() with synchronous reclamation, - "rcu_bh" for the rcu_read_lock_bh() API, "rcu_bh_sync" for - rcu_read_lock_bh() with synchronous reclamation, "srcu" for - the "srcu_read_lock()" API, "sched" for the use of - preempt_disable() together with synchronize_sched(), - and "sched_expedited" for the use of preempt_disable() - with synchronize_sched_expedited(). +torture_type The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows: + + "rcu": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock() and call_rcu(). + + "rcu_sync": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock(), and + synchronize_rcu(). + + "rcu_expedited": rcu_read_lock(), rcu_read_unlock(), and + synchronize_rcu_expedited(). + + "rcu_bh": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), and + call_rcu_bh(). + + "rcu_bh_sync": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), + and synchronize_rcu_bh(). + + "srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and + synchronize_srcu(). + + "srcu_expedited": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and + synchronize_srcu_expedited(). + + "sched": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and + call_rcu_sched(). + + "sched_sync": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and + synchronize_sched(). + + "sched_expedited": preempt_disable(), preempt_enable(), and + synchronize_sched_expedited(). + + Defaults to "rcu". verbose Enable debug printk()s. Default is disabled. @@ -100,12 +146,12 @@ OUTPUT The statistics output is as follows: - rcu-torture: --- Start of test: nreaders=16 stat_interval=0 verbose=0 - rcu-torture: rtc: 0000000000000000 ver: 1916 tfle: 0 rta: 1916 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1915 - rcu-torture: Reader Pipe: 1466408 9747 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - rcu-torture: Reader Batch: 1464477 11678 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - rcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 1915 0 - rcu-torture: --- End of test + rcu-torture:--- Start of test: nreaders=16 nfakewriters=4 stat_interval=30 verbose=0 test_no_idle_hz=1 shuffle_interval=3 stutter=5 irqreader=1 fqs_duration=0 fqs_holdoff=0 fqs_stutter=3 test_boost=1/0 test_boost_interval=7 test_boost_duration=4 + rcu-torture: rtc: (null) ver: 155441 tfle: 0 rta: 155441 rtaf: 8884 rtf: 155440 rtmbe: 0 rtbke: 0 rtbre: 0 rtbf: 0 rtb: 0 nt: 3055767 + rcu-torture: Reader Pipe: 727860534 34213 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + rcu-torture: Reader Batch: 727877838 17003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 + rcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 155440 0 + rcu-torture:--- End of test: SUCCESS: nreaders=16 nfakewriters=4 stat_interval=30 verbose=0 test_no_idle_hz=1 shuffle_interval=3 stutter=5 irqreader=1 fqs_duration=0 fqs_holdoff=0 fqs_stutter=3 test_boost=1/0 test_boost_interval=7 test_boost_duration=4 The command "dmesg | grep torture:" will extract this information on most systems. On more esoteric configurations, it may be necessary to @@ -113,26 +159,55 @@ use other commands to access the output of the printk()s used by the RCU torture test. The printk()s use KERN_ALERT, so they should be evident. ;-) +The first and last lines show the rcutorture module parameters, and the +last line shows either "SUCCESS" or "FAILURE", based on rcutorture's +automatic determination as to whether RCU operated correctly. + The entries are as follows: o "rtc": The hexadecimal address of the structure currently visible to readers. -o "ver": The number of times since boot that the rcutw writer task +o "ver": The number of times since boot that the RCU writer task has changed the structure visible to readers. o "tfle": If non-zero, indicates that the "torture freelist" - containing structure to be placed into the "rtc" area is empty. + containing structures to be placed into the "rtc" area is empty. This condition is important, since it can fool you into thinking that RCU is working when it is not. :-/ o "rta": Number of structures allocated from the torture freelist. o "rtaf": Number of allocations from the torture freelist that have - failed due to the list being empty. + failed due to the list being empty. It is not unusual for this + to be non-zero, but it is bad for it to be a large fraction of + the value indicated by "rta". o "rtf": Number of frees into the torture freelist. +o "rtmbe": A non-zero value indicates that rcutorture believes that + rcu_assign_pointer() and rcu_dereference() are not working + correctly. This value should be zero. + +o "rtbke": rcutorture was unable to create the real-time kthreads + used to force RCU priority inversion. This value should be zero. + +o "rtbre": Although rcutorture successfully created the kthreads + used to force RCU priority inversion, it was unable to set them + to the real-time priority level of 1. This value should be zero. + +o "rtbf": The number of times that RCU priority boosting failed + to resolve RCU priority inversion. + +o "rtb": The number of times that rcutorture attempted to force + an RCU priority inversion condition. If you are testing RCU + priority boosting via the "test_boost" module parameter, this + value should be non-zero. + +o "nt": The number of times rcutorture ran RCU read-side code from + within a timer handler. This value should be non-zero only + if you specified the "irqreader" module parameter. + o "Reader Pipe": Histogram of "ages" of structures seen by readers. If any entries past the first two are non-zero, RCU is broken. And rcutorture prints the error flag string "!!!" to make sure @@ -162,26 +237,15 @@ o "Free-Block Circulation": Shows the number of torture structures somehow gets incremented farther than it should. Different implementations of RCU can provide implementation-specific -additional information. For example, SRCU provides the following: +additional information. For example, SRCU provides the following +additional line: - srcu-torture: rtc: f8cf46a8 ver: 355 tfle: 0 rta: 356 rtaf: 0 rtf: 346 rtmbe: 0 - srcu-torture: Reader Pipe: 559738 939 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - srcu-torture: Reader Batch: 560434 243 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - srcu-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 355 354 353 352 351 350 349 348 347 346 0 srcu-torture: per-CPU(idx=1): 0(0,1) 1(0,1) 2(0,0) 3(0,1) -The first four lines are similar to those for RCU. The last line shows -the per-CPU counter state. The numbers in parentheses are the values -of the "old" and "current" counters for the corresponding CPU. The -"idx" value maps the "old" and "current" values to the underlying array, -and is useful for debugging. - -Similarly, sched_expedited RCU provides the following: - - sched_expedited-torture: rtc: d0000000016c1880 ver: 1090796 tfle: 0 rta: 1090796 rtaf: 0 rtf: 1090787 rtmbe: 0 nt: 27713319 - sched_expedited-torture: Reader Pipe: 12660320201 95875 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - sched_expedited-torture: Reader Batch: 12660424885 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - sched_expedited-torture: Free-Block Circulation: 1090795 1090795 1090794 1090793 1090792 1090791 1090790 1090789 1090788 1090787 0 +This line shows the per-CPU counter state. The numbers in parentheses are +the values of the "old" and "current" counters for the corresponding CPU. +The "idx" value maps the "old" and "current" values to the underlying +array, and is useful for debugging. USAGE -- cgit v1.2.3 From bdf2a4364904d6cf2f59b16b0bd86fdc5a2c6152 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Tue, 7 Jun 2011 16:59:35 -0700 Subject: rcu: Catch rcutorture up to new RCU API additions Now that the RCU API contains synchronize_rcu_bh(), synchronize_sched(), call_rcu_sched(), and rcu_bh_expedited()... Make rcutorture test synchronize_rcu_bh(), getting rid of the old rcu_bh_torture_synchronize() workaround. Similarly, make rcutorture test synchronize_sched(), getting rid of the old sched_torture_synchronize() workaround. Make rcutorture test call_rcu_sched() instead of wrappering synchronize_sched(). Also add testing of rcu_bh_expedited(). Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/torture.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt index 4205ed1f8ad..783d6c134d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/torture.txt @@ -122,6 +122,9 @@ torture_type The type of RCU to test, with string values as follows: "rcu_bh_sync": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), and synchronize_rcu_bh(). + "rcu_bh_expedited": rcu_read_lock_bh(), rcu_read_unlock_bh(), + and synchronize_rcu_bh_expedited(). + "srcu": srcu_read_lock(), srcu_read_unlock() and synchronize_srcu(). -- cgit v1.2.3 From b15a2e7d16cc6f6082d8c6a85349e48588763ffc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Tue, 7 Jun 2011 17:05:34 -0700 Subject: rcu: Fix RCU's NMI documentation It has long been the case that the architecture must call nmi_enter() and nmi_exit() rather than irq_enter() and irq_exit() in order to permit RCU read-side critical sections in NMIs. Catch the documentation up with reality. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Acked-by: Mathieu Desnoyers --- Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt index bf82851a0e5..687777f83b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ not to return until all ongoing NMI handlers exit. It is therefore safe to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_sched() returns. Important note: for this to work, the architecture in question must -invoke irq_enter() and irq_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively. +invoke nmi_enter() and nmi_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively. Answer to Quick Quiz -- cgit v1.2.3 From e4cc1f22b2f4e9b0207a8cdb63e56dcf99e82d35 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Mon, 27 Jun 2011 00:17:43 -0700 Subject: rcu: Simplify quiescent-state accounting There is often a delay between the time that a CPU passes through a quiescent state and the time that this quiescent state is reported to the RCU core. It is quite possible that the grace period ended before the quiescent state could be reported, for example, some other CPU might have deduced that this CPU passed through dyntick-idle mode. It is critically important that quiescent state be counted only against the grace period that was in effect at the time that the quiescent state was detected. Previously, this was handled by recording the number of the last grace period to complete when passing through a quiescent state. The RCU core then checks this number against the current value, and rejects the quiescent state if there is a mismatch. However, one additional possibility must be accounted for, namely that the quiescent state was recorded after the prior grace period completed but before the current grace period started. In this case, the RCU core must reject the quiescent state, but the recorded number will match. This is handled when the CPU becomes aware of a new grace period -- at that point, it invalidates any prior quiescent state. This works, but is a bit indirect. The new approach records the current grace period, and the RCU core checks to see (1) that this is still the current grace period and (2) that this grace period has not yet ended. This approach simplifies reasoning about correctness, and this commit changes over to this new approach. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/trace.txt | 34 +++++++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index a67af0a39de..aaf65f6c6cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -33,23 +33,23 @@ rcu/rcuboost: The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: rcu_sched: - 0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ri=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0 - 1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ri=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0 - 2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ri=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0 - 3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pqc=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0 - 4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ri=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0 - 5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ri=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0 - 6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ri=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0 - 7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pqc=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0 + 0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ri=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ri=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ri=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pgp=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ri=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ri=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pgp=20973 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ri=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pgp=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0 rcu_bh: - 0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0 - 2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 - 7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pqc=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pgp=1480 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pgp=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu_sched, the second for rcu_bh. Note that CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will have an @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state CPU has not yet reported that fact, (2) some other CPU has not yet reported for this grace period, or (3) both. -o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent +o "pgp" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent state for this CPU corresponds to. This is important for handling the race between CPU 0 reporting an extended dynticks-idle quiescent state for CPU 1 and CPU 1 suddenly waking up and -- cgit v1.2.3 From e5177ec77d503636d0b609671c9d408b981add17 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michal Hocko Date: Fri, 8 Jul 2011 08:48:24 -0700 Subject: rcu: Not necessary to pass rcu_read_lock_held() to rcu_dereference_protected() Since ca5ecddf (rcu: define __rcu address space modifier for sparse) rcu_dereference_check() use rcu_read_lock_held() as a part of condition automatically. Therefore, callers of rcu_dereference_check() no longer need to pass rcu_read_lock_held() to rcu_dereference_check(). Signed-off-by: Michal Hocko Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt | 10 ++++------ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt index d7a49b2f699..4998c633e20 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt @@ -48,13 +48,11 @@ checking of rcu_dereference() primitives: value of the pointer itself, for example, against NULL. The rcu_dereference_check() check expression can be any boolean -expression, but would normally include one of the rcu_read_lock_held() -family of functions and a lockdep expression. However, any boolean -expression can be used. For a moderately ornate example, consider -the following: +expression, but would normally include a lockdep expression. However, +any boolean expression can be used. For a moderately ornate example, +consider the following: file = rcu_dereference_check(fdt->fd[fd], - rcu_read_lock_held() || lockdep_is_held(&files->file_lock) || atomic_read(&files->count) == 1); @@ -62,7 +60,7 @@ This expression picks up the pointer "fdt->fd[fd]" in an RCU-safe manner, and, if CONFIG_PROVE_RCU is configured, verifies that this expression is used in: -1. An RCU read-side critical section, or +1. An RCU read-side critical section (implicit), or 2. with files->file_lock held, or 3. on an unshared files_struct. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8cd889cbb6dd13b47c2ea448a22c49c270ab94a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Fri, 8 Jul 2011 09:07:35 -0700 Subject: rcu: Update documentation for additional RCU lockdep functions Add documentation for rcu_dereference_bh_check(), rcu_dereference_sched_check(), srcu_dereference_check(), and rcu_dereference_index_check(). Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt | 24 +++++++++++++++++++++--- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt index 4998c633e20..a102d4b3724 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep.txt @@ -32,9 +32,27 @@ checking of rcu_dereference() primitives: srcu_dereference(p, sp): Check for SRCU read-side critical section. rcu_dereference_check(p, c): - Use explicit check expression "c". This is useful in - code that is invoked by both readers and updaters. - rcu_dereference_raw(p) + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + rcu_read_lock_held(). This is useful in code that is + invoked by both RCU readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_bh_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + rcu_read_lock_bh_held(). This is useful in code that + is invoked by both RCU-bh readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_sched_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + rcu_read_lock_sched_held(). This is useful in code that + is invoked by both RCU-sched readers and updaters. + srcu_dereference_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c" along with + srcu_read_lock_held()(). This is useful in code that + is invoked by both SRCU readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_index_check(p, c): + Use explicit check expression "c", but the caller + must supply one of the rcu_read_lock_held() functions. + This is useful in code that uses RCU-protected arrays + that is invoked by both RCU readers and updaters. + rcu_dereference_raw(p): Don't check. (Use sparingly, if at all.) rcu_dereference_protected(p, c): Use explicit check expression "c", and omit all barriers -- cgit v1.2.3 From d7bd2d68aa2ee2738a10c8ad9346b805e4ab2e1c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Thu, 21 Jul 2011 17:10:40 -0700 Subject: rcu: Document interpretation of RCU-lockdep splats There has been quite a bit of confusion about what RCU-lockdep splats mean, so this commit adds some documentation describing how to interpret them. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney --- Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt | 110 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 110 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf906114282 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +Lockdep-RCU was added to the Linux kernel in early 2010 +(http://lwn.net/Articles/371986/). This facility checks for some common +misuses of the RCU API, most notably using one of the rcu_dereference() +family to access an RCU-protected pointer without the proper protection. +When such misuse is detected, an lockdep-RCU splat is emitted. + +The usual cause of a lockdep-RCU slat is someone accessing an +RCU-protected data structure without either (1) being in the right kind of +RCU read-side critical section or (2) holding the right update-side lock. +This problem can therefore be serious: it might result in random memory +overwriting or worse. There can of course be false positives, this +being the real world and all that. + +So let's look at an example RCU lockdep splat from 3.0-rc5, one that +has long since been fixed: + +=============================== +[ INFO: suspicious RCU usage. ] +------------------------------- +block/cfq-iosched.c:2776 suspicious rcu_dereference_protected() usage! + +other info that might help us debug this: + + +rcu_scheduler_active = 1, debug_locks = 0 +3 locks held by scsi_scan_6/1552: + #0: (&shost->scan_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [] +scsi_scan_host_selected+0x5a/0x150 + #1: (&eq->sysfs_lock){+.+...}, at: [] +elevator_exit+0x22/0x60 + #2: (&(&q->__queue_lock)->rlock){-.-...}, at: [] +cfq_exit_queue+0x43/0x190 + +stack backtrace: +Pid: 1552, comm: scsi_scan_6 Not tainted 3.0.0-rc5 #17 +Call Trace: + [] lockdep_rcu_dereference+0xbb/0xc0 + [] __cfq_exit_single_io_context+0xe9/0x120 + [] cfq_exit_queue+0x7c/0x190 + [] elevator_exit+0x36/0x60 + [] blk_cleanup_queue+0x4a/0x60 + [] scsi_free_queue+0x9/0x10 + [] __scsi_remove_device+0x84/0xd0 + [] scsi_probe_and_add_lun+0x353/0xb10 + [] ? error_exit+0x29/0xb0 + [] ? _raw_spin_unlock_irqrestore+0x3d/0x80 + [] __scsi_scan_target+0x112/0x680 + [] ? trace_hardirqs_off_thunk+0x3a/0x3c + [] ? error_exit+0x29/0xb0 + [] ? kobject_del+0x40/0x40 + [] scsi_scan_channel+0x86/0xb0 + [] scsi_scan_host_selected+0x140/0x150 + [] do_scsi_scan_host+0x89/0x90 + [] do_scan_async+0x20/0x160 + [] ? do_scsi_scan_host+0x90/0x90 + [] kthread+0xa6/0xb0 + [] kernel_thread_helper+0x4/0x10 + [] ? finish_task_switch+0x80/0x110 + [] ? retint_restore_args+0xe/0xe + [] ? __init_kthread_worker+0x70/0x70 + [] ? gs_change+0xb/0xb + +Line 2776 of block/cfq-iosched.c in v3.0-rc5 is as follows: + + if (rcu_dereference(ioc->ioc_data) == cic) { + +This form says that it must be in a plain vanilla RCU read-side critical +section, but the "other info" list above shows that this is not the +case. Instead, we hold three locks, one of which might be RCU related. +And maybe that lock really does protect this reference. If so, the fix +is to inform RCU, perhaps by changing __cfq_exit_single_io_context() to +take the struct request_queue "q" from cfq_exit_queue() as an argument, +which would permit us to invoke rcu_dereference_protected as follows: + + if (rcu_dereference_protected(ioc->ioc_data, + lockdep_is_held(&q->queue_lock)) == cic) { + +With this change, there would be no lockdep-RCU splat emitted if this +code was invoked either from within an RCU read-side critical section +or with the ->queue_lock held. In particular, this would have suppressed +the above lockdep-RCU splat because ->queue_lock is held (see #2 in the +list above). + +On the other hand, perhaps we really do need an RCU read-side critical +section. In this case, the critical section must span the use of the +return value from rcu_dereference(), or at least until there is some +reference count incremented or some such. One way to handle this is to +add rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() as follows: + + rcu_read_lock(); + if (rcu_dereference(ioc->ioc_data) == cic) { + spin_lock(&ioc->lock); + rcu_assign_pointer(ioc->ioc_data, NULL); + spin_unlock(&ioc->lock); + } + rcu_read_unlock(); + +With this change, the rcu_dereference() is always within an RCU +read-side critical section, which again would have suppressed the +above lockdep-RCU splat. + +But in this particular case, we don't actually deference the pointer +returned from rcu_dereference(). Instead, that pointer is just compared +to the cic pointer, which means that the rcu_dereference() can be replaced +by rcu_access_pointer() as follows: + + if (rcu_access_pointer(ioc->ioc_data) == cic) { + +Because it is legal to invoke rcu_access_pointer() without protection, +this change would also suppress the above lockdep-RCU splat. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 605b91c8f619047ed6d88e24c531d4bdddad46f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Roy.Li" Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2011 19:51:54 +0000 Subject: net: Documentation: Fix type of variables Signed-off-by: Roy.Li Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index 81546990f41..ca5cdcd0f0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ conf/interface/*: The functional behaviour for certain settings is different depending on whether local forwarding is enabled or not. -accept_ra - BOOLEAN +accept_ra - INTEGER Accept Router Advertisements; autoconfigure using them. Possible values are: @@ -1106,7 +1106,7 @@ dad_transmits - INTEGER The amount of Duplicate Address Detection probes to send. Default: 1 -forwarding - BOOLEAN +forwarding - INTEGER Configure interface-specific Host/Router behaviour. Note: It is recommended to have the same setting on all -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4b801bc969364a980c1366e48155d1a29d20661b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Berg Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2011 16:04:40 +0200 Subject: mac80211: document client powersave With the addition of uAPSD and driver buffering the powersave handling has gotten quite complex. Add a section to the documentation to explain it for anyone wanting to implement it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl | 11 ++++++++++- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl index 445289cd0e6..2014155c899 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -433,8 +433,18 @@ Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or in the hw crypto chapter. +
+ support for powersaving clients +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h AP support for powersaving clients +
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_eosp_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_frame_release_type +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_set_buffered +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake @@ -460,7 +470,6 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9005b65099ee4f14b6be691c4574612fe947531a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: MyungJoo Ham Date: Sun, 2 Oct 2011 00:19:28 +0200 Subject: PM / devfreq: Add common sysfs interfaces Device specific sysfs interface /sys/devices/.../power/devfreq_* - governor R: name of governor - cur_freq R: current frequency - polling_interval R: polling interval in ms given with devfreq profile W: update polling interval. - central_polling R: 1 if polling is managed by devfreq framework Signed-off-by: MyungJoo Ham Signed-off-by: Kyungmin Park Reviewed-by: Mike Turquette Acked-by: Kevin Hilman Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki -- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq | 44 ++++++++++++++++ drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c | 69 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 113 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq | 44 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 44 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0ec855f479c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../ +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham +Description: + Provide a place in sysfs for the devfreq objects. + This allows accessing various devfreq specific variables. + The name of devfreq object denoted as ... is same as the + name of device using devfreq. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor shows the name of the + governor used by the corresponding devfreq object. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../cur_freq +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../cur_freq shows the current + frequency of the corresponding devfreq object. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling shows whether + the devfreq ojbect is using devfreq-provided central + polling mechanism or not. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../polling_interval +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../polling_interval shows and sets + the requested polling interval of the corresponding devfreq + object. The values are represented in ms. If the value is + less than 1 jiffy, it is considered to be 0, which means + no polling. This value is meaningless if the governor is + not polling; thus. If the governor is not using + devfreq-provided central polling + (/sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling is 0), this value + may be useless. -- cgit v1.2.3 From ce26c5bb9569d8b826f01b8620fc16d8da6821e9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: MyungJoo Ham Date: Sun, 2 Oct 2011 00:19:34 +0200 Subject: PM / devfreq: Add basic governors Four cpufreq-like governors are provided as examples. powersave: use the lowest frequency possible. The user (device) should set the polling_ms as 0 because polling is useless for this governor. performance: use the highest freqeuncy possible. The user (device) should set the polling_ms as 0 because polling is useless for this governor. userspace: use the user specified frequency stored at devfreq.user_set_freq. With sysfs support in the following patch, a user may set the value with the sysfs interface. simple_ondemand: simplified version of cpufreq's ondemand governor. When a user updates OPP entries (enable/disable/add), OPP framework automatically notifies devfreq to update operating frequency accordingly. Thus, devfreq users (device drivers) do not need to update devfreq manually with OPP entry updates or set polling_ms for powersave , performance, userspace, or any other "static" governors. Note that these are given only as basic examples for governors and any devices with devfreq may implement their own governors with the drivers and use them. Signed-off-by: MyungJoo Ham Signed-off-by: Kyungmin Park Reviewed-by: Mike Turquette Acked-by: Kevin Hilman Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq index 0ec855f479c..23d78b5aab1 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq @@ -42,3 +42,11 @@ Description: devfreq-provided central polling (/sys/class/devfreq/.../central_polling is 0), this value may be useless. + +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq +Date: September 2011 +Contact: MyungJoo Ham +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq shows and + sets the requested frequency for the devfreq object if + userspace governor is in effect. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3c607d27c818cf4a5d28f2c73b18a88f8fbdfa33 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Don Fry Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2011 11:40:20 -0700 Subject: iwlagn: rename iwlagn module iwlwifi and alias to iwlagn. Rename the iwlagn module as iwlwifi in preparation for future changes. Add an alias to iwlagn for backward compatibility. Signed-off-by: Don Fry Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index dfd6a9f4a58..1cf3dbdb153 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -555,3 +555,8 @@ Why: This driver has been superseded by g_mass_storage. Who: Alan Stern ---------------------------- +What: iwlagn alias support +When: 3.5 +Why: The iwlagn module has been renamed iwlwifi. The alias will be around + for backward compatibility for several cycles and then dropped. +Who: Don Fry \ No newline at end of file -- cgit v1.2.3 From ce662bb205abdb2545252bce5a0ba11070c29305 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Raymond Yau Date: Tue, 4 Oct 2011 09:46:44 +0800 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add documentation for codec specific mixer controls of Analog codecs * Channel Mode This is an enum control to change the surround-channel setup, appears only when the surround channels are available. It gives the number of channels to be used, "2ch", "4ch" abd "6ch". According to the configuration, this also controls the jack-retasking of multi-I/O jacks. * Independent HP When this enum control is enabled, the headphone output is routed from an individual stream (the third PCM such as hw:0,2) instead of the primary stream. Signed-off-by: Raymond Yau Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt | 16 ++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt index 1482035243e..e9621e349e1 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Controls.txt @@ -98,3 +98,19 @@ Conexant codecs * Auto-Mute Mode See Reatek codecs. + + +Analog codecs +-------------- + +* Channel Mode + This is an enum control to change the surround-channel setup, + appears only when the surround channels are available. + It gives the number of channels to be used, "2ch", "4ch" and "6ch". + According to the configuration, this also controls the + jack-retasking of multi-I/O jacks. + +* Independent HP + When this enum control is enabled, the headphone output is routed + from an individual stream (the third PCM such as hw:0,2) instead of + the primary stream. -- cgit v1.2.3 From dc2d07ebaea839a6e0fa47588c7984931f3c9c71 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benoit Cousson Date: Wed, 10 Aug 2011 13:32:08 +0200 Subject: ARM: OMAP: omap_device: Add a method to build an omap_device from a DT node Add a notifier called during device_add phase. If an of_node is present, retrieve the hwmod entry in order to populate properly the omap_device structure. For the moment the resource from the device-tree are overloaded. DT does not support named resource yet, and thus, most driver will not work without that information. Add a documentation to capture the specifics OMAP bindings needed for device-tree support. Signed-off-by: Benoit Cousson Cc: Grant Likely Signed-off-by: Kevin Hilman --- .../devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt | 43 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 43 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dbdab40ed3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +* Texas Instruments OMAP + +OMAP is currently using a static file per SoC family to describe the +IPs present in the SoC. +On top of that an omap_device is created to extend the platform_device +capabilities and to allow binding with one or several hwmods. +The hwmods will contain all the information to build the device: +adresse range, irq lines, dma lines, interconnect, PRCM register, +clock domain, input clocks. +For the moment just point to the existing hwmod, the next step will be +to move data from hwmod to device-tree representation. + + +Required properties: +- compatible: Every devices present in OMAP SoC should be in the + form: "ti,XXX" +- ti,hwmods: list of hwmod names (ascii strings), that comes from the OMAP + HW documentation, attached to a device. Must contain at least + one hwmod. + +Optional properties: +- ti,no_idle_on_suspend: When present, it prevents the PM to idle the module + during suspend. + + +Example: + +spinlock@1 { + compatible = "ti,omap4-spinlock"; + ti,hwmods = "spinlock"; +}; + + +Boards: + +- OMAP3 BeagleBoard : Low cost community board + compatible = "ti,omap3-beagle", "ti,omap3" + +- OMAP4 SDP : Software Developement Board + compatible = "ti,omap4-sdp", "ti,omap4430" + +- OMAP4 PandaBoard : Low cost community board + compatible = "ti,omap4-panda", "ti,omap4430" -- cgit v1.2.3 From 879631aa658be2c1307758223b6d15236f9f6335 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Felipe Balbi Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2011 10:58:47 +0300 Subject: usb: dwc3: gadget: implement streams support The following patch adds support for streams to dwc3 driver. While at that, also fix one small issue on endpoint disable where we should clear all flags not only ENABLED. Reviewied-by: Paul Zimmerman Signed-off-by: Felipe Balbi Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt | 8 -------- 1 file changed, 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt index 2f658532b9d..7b590edae14 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt @@ -3,14 +3,6 @@ ~~~~~~ Please pick something while reading :) -- Implement streaming support for BULK endpoints - Tatyana's patch "usb: Add streams support to the gadget framework" - introduces streaming support for the gadget driver. - Every usb_request has new field called stream_id which holds its id. - Every usb_ep has a field num_supported_strms which describes the max - number of streams supported (for this ep). - UAS is AFAIK the only gadget with streaming support. - - Convert interrupt handler to per-ep-thread-irq As it turns out some DWC3-commands ~1ms to complete. Currently we spin -- cgit v1.2.3 From e3cba3243eb853a052613c804dea033bc4c9cf2d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Pihet Date: Tue, 4 Oct 2011 21:54:45 +0200 Subject: PM / QoS: Update Documentation for the pm_qos and dev_pm_qos frameworks Update the documentation for the recently updated pm_qos API, kernel and user space. Add documentation for the per-device PM QoS (dev_pm_qos) framework API. Signed-off-by: Jean Pihet Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt | 92 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 87 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt index bfed898a03f..17e130a8034 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt @@ -4,14 +4,19 @@ This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on one of the parameters. -Currently we have {cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput} as the -initial set of pm_qos parameters. +Two different PM QoS frameworks are available: +1. PM QoS classes for cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput. +2. the per-device PM QoS framework provides the API to manage the per-device latency +constraints. Each parameters have defined units: * latency: usec * timeout: usec * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec) + +1. PM QoS framework + The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented parameter. The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init() and pm_qos_params.h. This is done because having the available parameters @@ -23,14 +28,18 @@ an aggregated target value. The aggregated target value is updated with changes to the request list or elements of the list. Typically the aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the request values held in the parameter list elements. +Note: the aggregated target value is implemented as an atomic variable so that +reading the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism. + From kernel mode the use of this interface is simple: -handle = pm_qos_add_request(param_class, target_value): -Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM_QOS class with the +void pm_qos_add_request(handle, param_class, target_value): +Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM QoS class with the target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different. -Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle. +Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle for future use in other +pm_qos API functions. void pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_target_value): Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value @@ -42,6 +51,20 @@ Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and call the notification tree if the target was changed as a result of removing the request. +int pm_qos_request(param_class): +Returns the aggregated value for a given PM QoS class. + +int pm_qos_request_active(handle): +Returns if the request is still active, i.e. it has not been removed from a +PM QoS class constraints list. + +int pm_qos_add_notifier(param_class, notifier): +Adds a notification callback function to the PM QoS class. The callback is +called when the aggregated value for the PM QoS class is changed. + +int pm_qos_remove_notifier(int param_class, notifier): +Removes the notification callback function for the PM QoS class. + From user mode: Only processes can register a pm_qos request. To provide for automatic @@ -63,4 +86,63 @@ To remove the user mode request for a target value simply close the device node. +2. PM QoS per-device latency framework + +For each device a list of performance requests is maintained along with +an aggregated target value. The aggregated target value is updated with +changes to the request list or elements of the list. Typically the +aggregated target value is simply the max or min of the request values held +in the parameter list elements. +Note: the aggregated target value is implemented as an atomic variable so that +reading the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism. + + +From kernel mode the use of this interface is the following: + +int dev_pm_qos_add_request(device, handle, value): +Will insert an element into the list for that identified device with the +target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any +registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different. +Clients of dev_pm_qos need to save the handle for future use in other +dev_pm_qos API functions. + +int dev_pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_value): +Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value +and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification trees if the +target is changed. + +int dev_pm_qos_remove_request(handle): +Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and +call the notification trees if the target was changed as a result of removing +the request. + +s32 dev_pm_qos_read_value(device): +Returns the aggregated value for a given device's constraints list. + + +Notification mechanisms: +The per-device PM QoS framework has 2 different and distinct notification trees: +a per-device notification tree and a global notification tree. + +int dev_pm_qos_add_notifier(device, notifier): +Adds a notification callback function for the device. +The callback is called when the aggregated value of the device constraints list +is changed. + +int dev_pm_qos_remove_notifier(device, notifier): +Removes the notification callback function for the device. + +int dev_pm_qos_add_global_notifier(notifier): +Adds a notification callback function in the global notification tree of the +framework. +The callback is called when the aggregated value for any device is changed. + +int dev_pm_qos_remove_global_notifier(notifier): +Removes the notification callback function from the global notification tree +of the framework. + + +From user mode: +No API for user space access to the per-device latency constraints is provided +yet - still under discussion. -- cgit v1.2.3 From d039c5b9fb2315ef942944439da6f0fbaf2f1941 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benoit Cousson Date: Fri, 12 Aug 2011 13:52:50 +0200 Subject: ARM: OMAP2+: l3-noc: Add support for device-tree Add device-tree support for the l3-noc driver. Use platform_driver_register to defer the probing at device init time. Add documentation for the l3-noc bindings. Signed-off-by: Benoit Cousson Cc: Tony Lindgren Cc: Santosh Shilimkar --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt | 19 +++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6888a5efc86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l3-noc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +* TI - L3 Network On Chip (NoC) + +This version is an implementation of the generic NoC IP +provided by Arteris. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-l3-smx" for OMAP3 family + Should be "ti,omap4-l3-noc" for OMAP4 family +- ti,hwmods: "l3_main_1", ... One hwmod for each noc domain. + +Examples: + +ocp { + compatible = "ti,omap4-l3-noc", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + ti,hwmods = "l3_main_1", "l3_main_2", "l3_main_3"; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 476b679a5d785d1244f6b43ad26877acf278cd18 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benoit Cousson Date: Tue, 16 Aug 2011 11:49:08 +0200 Subject: arm/dts: OMAP3+: Add mpu, dsp and iva nodes Add nodes for devices used by PM code (mpu, dsp, iva). Add a cpus node as well as recommended in the DT spec. Remove mpu, dsp, iva devices init if is populated. Signed-off-by: Benoit Cousson Acked-by: Grant Likely Cc: Kevin Hilman --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt | 14 +++++++++++ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt | 19 +++++++++++++++ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt | 27 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 3 files changed, 60 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d3830a32ce0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/dsp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* TI - DSP (Digital Signal Processor) + +TI DSP included in OMAP SoC + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-c64" for OMAP3 & 4 +- ti,hwmods: "dsp" + +Examples: + +dsp { + compatible = "ti,omap3-c64"; + ti,hwmods = "dsp"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6d629517135 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/iva.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +* TI - IVA (Imaging and Video Accelerator) subsystem + +The IVA contain various audio, video or imaging HW accelerator +depending of the version. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be: + - "ti,ivahd" for OMAP4 + - "ti,iva2.2" for OMAP3 + - "ti,iva2.1" for OMAP2430 + - "ti,iva1" for OMAP2420 +- ti,hwmods: "iva" + +Examples: + +iva { + compatible = "ti,ivahd", "ti,iva"; + ti,hwmods = "iva"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1a5a42ce21b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/mpu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* TI - MPU (Main Processor Unit) subsystem + +The MPU subsystem contain one or several ARM cores +depending of the version. +The MPU contain CPUs, GIC, L2 cache and a local PRCM. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "ti,omap3-mpu" for OMAP3 + Should be "ti,omap4-mpu" for OMAP4 +- ti,hwmods: "mpu" + +Examples: + +- For an OMAP4 SMP system: + +mpu { + compatible = "ti,omap4-mpu"; + ti,hwmods = "mpu"; +}; + + +- For an OMAP3 monocore system: + +mpu { + compatible = "ti,omap3-mpu"; + ti,hwmods = "mpu"; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From f614c74f94f435adcbe52bf7682f1dcc805f0ab1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rob Herring Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2011 09:55:54 -0500 Subject: devicetree: Add ARM pl061 gpio controller binding doc Add binding documentation for ARM's Primecell PL061 GPIO controller. Signed-off-by: Rob Herring --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt | 10 ++++++++++ 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a2c416bcbcc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/pl061-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +ARM PL061 GPIO controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "arm,pl061", "arm,primecell" +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the + second cell is used to specify optional parameters: + - bit 0 specifies polarity (0 for normal, 1 for inverted) +- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. +- interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6add6967a4a57e2156b96e62f28bcbe1901d16c1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rob Herring Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2011 09:56:53 -0500 Subject: devicetree: Add ARM pl022 spi controller binding doc Add binding documentation for ARM's Primecell PL022 SPI controller. Signed-off-by: Rob Herring --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..306ec3ff3c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_pl022.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +ARM PL022 SPI controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "arm,pl022", "arm,primecell" +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : Should contain SPI controller interrupt + +Optional properties: +- cs-gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselects. + The gpios will be referred to as reg = in the SPI child nodes. + If unspecified, a single SPI device without a chip select can be used. + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 186c6bbced722cfeff041d2a1264c95f5d042050 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benjamin Poirier Date: Tue, 4 Oct 2011 04:00:30 +0000 Subject: net: fix typos in Documentation/networking/scaling.txt The second hunk fixes rps_sock_flow_table but has to re-wrap the paragraph. Signed-off-by: Benjamin Poirier Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/scaling.txt | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt index 8ce7c30e723..fe67b5c79f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ applying a filter to each packet that assigns it to one of a small number of logical flows. Packets for each flow are steered to a separate receive queue, which in turn can be processed by separate CPUs. This mechanism is generally known as “Receive-side Scaling” (RSS). The goal of RSS and -the other scaling techniques to increase performance uniformly. +the other scaling techniques is to increase performance uniformly. Multi-queue distribution can also be used for traffic prioritization, but that is not the focus of these techniques. @@ -186,10 +186,10 @@ are steered using plain RPS. Multiple table entries may point to the same CPU. Indeed, with many flows and few CPUs, it is very likely that a single application thread handles flows with many different flow hashes. -rps_sock_table is a global flow table that contains the *desired* CPU for -flows: the CPU that is currently processing the flow in userspace. Each -table value is a CPU index that is updated during calls to recvmsg and -sendmsg (specifically, inet_recvmsg(), inet_sendmsg(), inet_sendpage() +rps_sock_flow_table is a global flow table that contains the *desired* CPU +for flows: the CPU that is currently processing the flow in userspace. +Each table value is a CPU index that is updated during calls to recvmsg +and sendmsg (specifically, inet_recvmsg(), inet_sendmsg(), inet_sendpage() and tcp_splice_read()). When the scheduler moves a thread to a new CPU while it has outstanding -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2c1ba398ac9da3305815f6ae8e95ae2b9fd3b5ff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Thu, 8 Sep 2011 10:37:31 -0700 Subject: regulator: Fix some bitrot in the machine driver documentation The documentation for the machine driver was rather badly bitrotted, using pointers to struct device rather than dev_name() to hook up the consumers. Update to use dev_name(). Reported-by: Philip Rakity Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt index b42419b52e4..311c61f2fea 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for each regulator. struct regulator_consumer_supply { - struct device *dev; /* consumer */ + const char *dev_name; /* consumer dev_name() */ const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */ }; @@ -24,13 +24,13 @@ e.g. for the machine above static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = { { - .dev = &platform_consumerB_device.dev, - .supply = "Vcc", + .dev_name = "dev_name(consumer B)", + .supply = "Vcc", },}; static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = { { - .dev = &platform_consumerA_device.dev, + .dev = "dev_name(consumer A"), .supply = "Vcc", },}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From c3035a232e87f42b81d8ece1980abd0a2f26d792 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Thu, 8 Sep 2011 10:38:59 -0700 Subject: regulator: Clarify documentation for regulator-regulator supplies The mechanism used for connecting regulators together when one regulator supplies another wasn't clear as the names being used weren't really tied together well. Reported-by: Philip Rakity Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt | 11 +++++++++-- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt index 311c61f2fea..ce63af0a8e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -43,6 +43,7 @@ to their supply regulator :- static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { .constraints = { + .name = "Regulator-1", .min_uV = 3300000, .max_uV = 3300000, .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, @@ -51,13 +52,19 @@ static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { .consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers, }; +The name field should be set to something that is usefully descriptive +for the board for configuration of supplies for other regulators and +for use in logging and other diagnostic output. Normally the name +used for the supply rail in the schematic is a good choice. If no +name is provided then the subsystem will choose one. + Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables its supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator -field below:- +field below and co:- static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = { - .supply_regulator = "regulator_name", + .supply_regulator = "Regulator-1", .constraints = { .min_uV = 1800000, .max_uV = 2000000, -- cgit v1.2.3 From af909a57fde821627282204ba43f27331342bf26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Sat, 8 Oct 2011 14:01:08 -0400 Subject: ext4: documentation: remove acl and user_xattr mount options Acl and user_xattr mount options are no longer needed since those features are enabled by default if configured in (seee commit ea6633369458992241599c9d9ebadffaeddec164). We can not easily deprecate mount options itself (since it is probably too early), but we can remove it from documentation first. Signed-off-by: Lukas Czerner Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 25 +++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 168242b5c04..a5304019396 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -211,22 +211,19 @@ oldalloc This disables the Orlov block allocator and enables performance - we'd like to get some feedback if it's the contrary for you. -user_xattr Enables Extended User Attributes. Additionally, you - need to have extended attribute support enabled in the - kernel configuration (CONFIG_EXT4_FS_XATTR). See the - attr(5) manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at/ to - learn more about extended attributes. - -nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. - -acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support. - Additionally, you need to have ACL support enabled in - the kernel configuration (CONFIG_EXT4_FS_POSIX_ACL). - See the acl(5) manual page and http://acl.bestbits.at/ - for more information. +nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. If you have extended + attribute support enabled in the kernel configuration + (CONFIG_EXT4_FS_XATTR), extended attribute support + is enabled by default on mount. See the attr(5) manual + page and http://acl.bestbits.at/ for more information + about extended attributes. noacl This option disables POSIX Access Control List - support. + support. If ACL support is enabled in the kernel + configuration (CONFIG_EXT4_FS_POSIX_ACL), ACL is + enabled by default on mount. See the acl(5) manual + page and http://acl.bestbits.at/ for more information + about acl. bsddf (*) Make 'df' act like BSD. minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4113c4caa4f355b8ff8b7ff0510c29c9d00d30b3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Lukas Czerner Date: Sat, 8 Oct 2011 14:34:47 -0400 Subject: ext4: remove deprecated oldalloc For a long time now orlov is the default block allocator in the ext4. It performs better than the old one and no one seems to claim otherwise so we can safely drop it and make oldalloc and orlov mount option deprecated. This is a part of the effort to reduce number of ext4 options hence the test matrix. Signed-off-by: Lukas Czerner Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 8 -------- 1 file changed, 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index a5304019396..4917cf24a5e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -203,14 +203,6 @@ inode_readahead_blks=n This tuning parameter controls the maximum table readahead algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache. The default value is 32 blocks. -orlov (*) This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is - enabled by default. - -oldalloc This disables the Orlov block allocator and enables - the old block allocator. Orlov should have better - performance - we'd like to get some feedback if it's - the contrary for you. - nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. If you have extended attribute support enabled in the kernel configuration (CONFIG_EXT4_FS_XATTR), extended attribute support -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2fb242adcaab5defa2f208775ac4f181ac998fdd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ming Lei Date: Sun, 9 Oct 2011 11:40:25 +0800 Subject: PM / Runtime: Update document about callbacks Support for device power domains has been introduced in commit 9659cc0678b954f187290c6e8b247a673c5d37e1 (PM: Make system-wide PM and runtime PM treat subsystems consistently), also power domain callbacks will take precedence over subsystem ones from commit 4d27e9dcff00a6425d779b065ec8892e4f391661(PM: Make power domain callbacks take precedence over subsystem ones). So update part of "Device Runtime PM Callbacks" in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt. Signed-off-by: Ming Lei Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 19 ++++++++++++------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 1750740b17e..f670836f8e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -43,13 +43,18 @@ struct dev_pm_ops { ... }; -The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks are -executed by the PM core for either the device type, or the class (if the device -type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not exist), or the bus type (if the -device type's and class' struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given -device (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus types or -classes if necessary). The bus type, device type and class callbacks are -referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows. +The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks +are executed by the PM core for either the power domain, or the device type +(if the device power domain's struct dev_pm_ops does not exist), or the class +(if the device power domain's and type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not +exist), or the bus type (if the device power domain's, type's and class' +struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given device, so the priority +order of callbacks from high to low is that power domain callbacks, device +type callbacks, class callbacks and bus type callbacks, and the high priority +one will take precedence over low priority one. The bus type, device type and +class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows, +and generally speaking, the power domain callbacks are used for representing +power domains within a SoC. By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2b666859ec323403ac9a3a441d16eab30945404b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Adrian Bunk Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2011 00:40:47 +0300 Subject: x86: Default to vsyscall=native for now This UML breakage: linux-2.6.30.1[3800] vsyscall fault (exploit attempt?) ip:ffffffffff600000 cs:33 sp:7fbfb9c498 ax:ffffffffff600000 si:0 di:606790 linux-2.6.30.1[3856] vsyscall fault (exploit attempt?) ip:ffffffffff600000 cs:33 sp:7fbfb13168 ax:ffffffffff600000 si:0 di:606790 Is caused by commit 3ae36655 ("x86-64: Rework vsyscall emulation and add vsyscall= parameter") - the vsyscall emulation code is not fully cooked yet as UML relies on some rather fragile SIGSEGV semantics. Linus suggested in https://lkml.org/lkml/2011/8/9/376 to default to vsyscall=native for now, this patch implements that. Signed-off-by: Adrian Bunk Acked-by: Andrew Lutomirski Cc: H. Peter Anvin Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/20111005214047.GE14406@localhost.pp.htv.fi Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 854ed5ca7e3..d6e6724446c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2706,10 +2706,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. functions are at fixed addresses, they make nice targets for exploits that can control RIP. - emulate [default] Vsyscalls turn into traps and are - emulated reasonably safely. + emulate Vsyscalls turn into traps and are emulated + reasonably safely. - native Vsyscalls are native syscall instructions. + native [default] Vsyscalls are native syscall + instructions. This is a little bit faster than trapping and makes a few dynamic recompilers work better than they would in emulation mode. -- cgit v1.2.3 From d9cd48f95c5ba9e5f1d5287ed74630607471031c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Helmut Schaa Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2011 11:53:41 +0200 Subject: mac80211: Update injection documentation Add documentation about NOACK tx flag usage. Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt index b30e81ad530..3a930072b16 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211-injection.txt @@ -23,6 +23,10 @@ radiotap headers and used to control injection: IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_FRAG: frame will be fragmented if longer than the current fragmentation threshold. + * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TX_FLAGS + + IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_F_TX_NOACK: frame should be sent without waiting for + an ACK even if it is a unicast frame The injection code can also skip all other currently defined radiotap fields facilitating replay of captured radiotap headers directly. -- cgit v1.2.3 From f62f548c1c04742f68c15e21f173712dd6633791 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stephen Warren Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2011 16:16:13 -0600 Subject: arm/dt: Tegra: Add pinmux node to tegra20.dtsi Add a pinmux node to tegra20.dtsi in order to instantiate the future pinmux device. v2: Specify reg property precisely; don't just point at the whole APB_MISC register range. Signed-off-by: Stephen Warren Signed-off-by: Olof Johansson --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..36f82dbdd14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinmux/pinmux_nvidia.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra 2 pinmux controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : "nvidia,tegra20-pinmux" + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 499ccb27a89ecd08475f73710fe27fb600431a91 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Timur Tabi Date: Thu, 15 Sep 2011 13:04:13 -0500 Subject: powerpc/85xx: clean up FPGA device tree nodes for Freecsale QorIQ boards Standarize and document the FPGA nodes used on Freescale QorIQ reference boards. There are different kinds of FPGAs used on the boards, but only two are currently standard: "pixis", "ngpixis", and "qixis". Although there are minor differences among the boards that have one kind of FPGA, most of the functionality is the same, so it makes sense to create common compatibility strings. We also need to update the P1022DS platform file, because the compatible string for its PIXIS node has changed. This means that older kernels are not compatible with newer device trees. This is not a real problem, however, since that particular function doesn't work anyway. When the DIU is active, the PIXIS is in "indirect mode", and so cannot be accessed as a memory-mapped device. Signed-off-by: Timur Tabi Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- .../devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt | 30 +++++++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt index 39e941515a3..380914e965e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt @@ -1,3 +1,8 @@ +Freescale Reference Board Bindings + +This document describes device tree bindings for various devices that +exist on some Freescale reference boards. + * Board Control and Status (BCSR) Required properties: @@ -12,25 +17,26 @@ Example: reg = ; }; -* Freescale on board FPGA +* Freescale on-board FPGA This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA. Required properities: -- compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis". -- reg : should contain the address and the length of the FPPGA register - set. +- compatible: should be a board-specific string followed by a string + indicating the type of FPGA. Example: + "fsl,-fpga", "fsl,fpga-pixis" +- reg: should contain the address and the length of the FPGA register set. - interrupt-parent: should specify phandle for the interrupt controller. -- interrupts : should specify event (wakeup) IRQ. +- interrupts: should specify event (wakeup) IRQ. -Example (MPC8610HPCD): +Example (P1022DS): - board-control@e8000000 { - compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis"; - reg = <0xe8000000 32>; - interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; - interrupts = <8 8>; - }; + board-control@3,0 { + compatible = "fsl,p1022ds-fpga", "fsl,fpga-ngpixis"; + reg = <3 0 0x30>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <8 8 0 0>; + }; * Freescale BCSR GPIO banks -- cgit v1.2.3 From b9df02231930c01eaaf3c37b192bd75ea0d1c0bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stephen George Date: Fri, 16 Sep 2011 10:36:34 -0500 Subject: powerpc/85xx: Adding DCSR node to dtsi device trees Adding new device tree binding file for the DCSR node. Modifying device tree dtsi files to add DCSR node for P2041, P3041, P4080, & P5020. Signed-off-by: Stephen George Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- .../devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt | 395 +++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 395 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9d54eb5a295 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,395 @@ +=================================================================== +Debug Control and Status Register (DCSR) Binding +Copyright 2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. + +NOTE: The bindings described in this document are preliminary and subject +to change. Some of the compatible strings that contain only generic names +may turn out to be inappropriate, or need additional properties to describe +the integration of the block with the rest of the chip. + +===================================================================== +Debug Control and Status Register Memory Map + +Description + +This node defines the base address and range for the +defined DCSR Memory Map. Child nodes will describe the individual +debug blocks defined within this memory space. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include "fsl,dcsr" and "simple-bus". + The DCSR space exists in the memory-mapped bus. + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + or representing physical addresses in child nodes. + + - #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + or representing the size of physical addresses in + child nodes. + + - ranges + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + range of the DCSR space. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr: dcsr@f00000000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,dcsr", "simple-bus"; + ranges = <0x00000000 0xf 0x00000000 0x01008000>; + }; + +===================================================================== +Event Processing Unit + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to the EPU + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include "fsl,dcsr-epu" + + - interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Specifies the interrupts generated by the EPU. + The value of the interrupts property consists of three + interrupt specifiers. The format of the specifier is defined + by the binding document describing the node's interrupt parent. + + The EPU counters can be configured to assert the performance + monitor interrupt signal based on either counter overflow or value + match. Which counter asserted the interrupt is captured in an EPU + Counter Interrupt Status Register (EPCPUISR). + + The EPU unit can also be configured to assert either or both of + two interrupt signals based on debug event sources within the SoC. + The interrupt signals are epu_xt_int0 and epu_xt_int1. + Which event source asserted the interrupt is captured in an EPU + Interrupt Status Register (EPISR0,EPISR1). + + Interrupt numbers are lised in order (perfmon, event0, event1). + + - interrupt-parent + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A single value that points + to the interrupt parent to which the child domain + is being mapped. Value must be "&mpic" + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-epu@0 { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-epu"; + interrupts = <52 2 0 0 + 84 2 0 0 + 85 2 0 0>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + reg = <0x0 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +Nexus Port Controller + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to the NPC + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include "fsl,dcsr-npc" + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + The Nexus Port controller occupies two regions in the DCSR space + with distinct functionality. + + The first register range describes the Nexus Port Controller + control and status registers. + + The second register range describes the Nexus Port Controller + internal trace buffer. The NPC trace buffer is a small memory buffer + which stages the nexus trace data for transmission via the Aurora port + or to a DDR based trace buffer. In some configurations the NPC trace + buffer can be the only trace buffer used. + + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-npc { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-npc"; + reg = <0x1000 0x1000 0x1000000 0x8000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +Nexus Concentrator + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to the NXC + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include "fsl,dcsr-nxc" + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-nxc@2000 { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-nxc"; + reg = <0x2000 0x1000>; + }; +======================================================================= +CoreNet Debug Controller + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the CoreNet Debug controller. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include "fsl,dcsr-corenet" + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + The CoreNet Debug controller occupies two regions in the DCSR space + with distinct functionality. + + The first register range describes the CoreNet Debug Controller + functionalty to perform transaction and transaction attribute matches. + + The second register range describes the CoreNet Debug Controller + functionalty to trigger event notifications and debug traces. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-corenet { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-corenet"; + reg = <0x8000 0x1000 0xB0000 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +Data Path Debug controller + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the DPAA Debug Controller. This controller controls debug configuration +for the QMAN and FMAN blocks. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include both an identifier specific to the SoC + or Debug IP of the form "fsl,-dcsr-dpaa" in addition to the + generic compatible string "fsl,dcsr-dpaa". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-dpaa@9000 { + compatible = "fsl,p4080-dcsr-dpaa", "fsl,dcsr-dpaa"; + reg = <0x9000 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +OCeaN Debug controller + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the OCN Debug Controller. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include both an identifier specific to the SoC + or Debug IP of the form "fsl,-dcsr-ocn" in addition to the + generic compatible string "fsl,dcsr-ocn". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-ocn@11000 { + compatible = "fsl,p4080-dcsr-ocn", "fsl,dcsr-ocn"; + reg = <0x11000 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +DDR Controller Debug controller + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the OCN Debug Controller. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include "fsl,dcsr-ddr" + + - dev-handle + Usage: required + Definition: A phandle to associate this debug node with its + component controller. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-ddr@12000 { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-ddr"; + dev-handle = <&ddr1>; + reg = <0x12000 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +Nexus Aurora Link Controller + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the NAL Controller. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include both an identifier specific to the SoC + or Debug IP of the form "fsl,-dcsr-nal" in addition to the + generic compatible string "fsl,dcsr-nal". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-nal@18000 { + compatible = "fsl,p4080-dcsr-nal", "fsl,dcsr-nal"; + reg = <0x18000 0x1000>; + }; + + +======================================================================= +Run Control and Power Management + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the RCPM Debug Controller. This functionlity is limited to the +control the debug operations of the SoC and cores. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include both an identifier specific to the SoC + or Debug IP of the form "fsl,-dcsr-rcpm" in addition to the + generic compatible string "fsl,dcsr-rcpm". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-rcpm@22000 { + compatible = "fsl,p4080-dcsr-rcpm", "fsl,dcsr-rcpm"; + reg = <0x22000 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= +Core Service Bridge Proxy + +This node represents the region of DCSR space allocated to +the Core Service Bridge Proxies. +There is one Core Service Bridge Proxy device for each CPU in the system. +This functionlity provides access to the debug operations of the CPU. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: Must include both an identifier specific to the cpu + of the form "fsl,dcsr--sb-proxy" in addition to the + generic compatible string "fsl,dcsr-cpu-sb-proxy". + + - cpu-handle + Usage: required + Definition: A phandle to associate this debug node with its cpu. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + offset and length of the DCSR space registers of the device + configuration block. + +EXAMPLE + dcsr-cpu-sb-proxy@40000 { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-e500mc-sb-proxy", + "fsl,dcsr-cpu-sb-proxy"; + cpu-handle = <&cpu0>; + reg = <0x40000 0x1000>; + }; + dcsr-cpu-sb-proxy@41000 { + compatible = "fsl,dcsr-e500mc-sb-proxy", + "fsl,dcsr-cpu-sb-proxy"; + cpu-handle = <&cpu1>; + reg = <0x41000 0x1000>; + }; + +======================================================================= -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2744e8afb3b76343e7eb8197e8b3e085036010a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Linus Walleij Date: Mon, 2 May 2011 20:50:54 +0200 Subject: drivers: create a pin control subsystem This creates a subsystem for handling of pin control devices. These are devices that control different aspects of package pins. Currently it handles pinmuxing, i.e. assigning electronic functions to groups of pins on primarily PGA and BGA type of chip packages which are common in embedded systems. The plan is to also handle other I/O pin control aspects such as biasing, driving, input properties such as schmitt-triggering, load capacitance etc within this subsystem, to remove a lot of ARM arch code as well as feature-creepy GPIO drivers which are implementing the same thing over and over again. This is being done to depopulate the arch/arm/* directory of such custom drivers and try to abstract the infrastructure they all need. See the Documentation/pinctrl.txt file that is part of this patch for more details. ChangeLog v1->v2: - Various minor fixes from Joe's and Stephens review comments - Added a pinmux_config() that can invoke custom configuration with arbitrary data passed in or out to/from the pinmux driver ChangeLog v2->v3: - Renamed subsystem folder to "pinctrl" since we will likely want to keep other pin control such as biasing in this subsystem too, so let us keep to something generic even though we're mainly doing pinmux now. - As a consequence, register pins as an abstract entity separate from the pinmux. The muxing functions will claim pins out of the pin pool and make sure they do not collide. Pins can now be named by the pinctrl core. - Converted the pin lookup from a static array into a radix tree, I agreed with Grant Likely to try to avoid any static allocation (which is crap for device tree stuff) so I just rewrote this to be dynamic, just like irq number descriptors. The platform-wide definition of number of pins goes away - this is now just the sum total of the pins registered to the subsystem. - Make sure mappings with only a function name and no device works properly. ChangeLog v3->v4: - Define a number space per controller instead of globally, Stephen and Grant requested the same thing so now maps need to define target controller, and the radix tree of pin descriptors is a property on each pin controller device. - Add a compulsory pinctrl device entry to the pinctrl mapping table. This must match the pinctrl device, like "pinctrl.0" - Split the file core.c in two: core.c and pinmux.c where the latter carry all pinmux stuff, the core is for generic pin control, and use local headers to access functionality between files. It is now possible to implement a "blank" pin controller without pinmux capabilities. This split will make new additions like pindrive.c, pinbias.c etc possible for combined drivers and chunks of functionality which is a GoodThing(TM). - Rewrite the interaction with the GPIO subsystem - the pin controller descriptor now handles this by defining an offset into the GPIO numberspace for its handled pin range. This is used to look up the apropriate pin controller for a GPIO pin. Then that specific GPIO range is matched 1-1 for the target controller instance. - Fixed a number of review comments from Joe Perches. - Broke out a header file pinctrl.h for the core pin handling stuff that will be reused by other stuff than pinmux. - Fixed some erroneous EXPORT() stuff. - Remove mispatched U300 Kconfig and Makefile entries - Fixed a number of review comments from Stephen Warren, not all of them - still WIP. But I think the new mapping that will specify which function goes to which pin mux controller address 50% of your concerns (else beat me up). ChangeLog v4->v5: - Defined a "position" for each function, so the pin controller now tracks a function in a certain position, and the pinmux maps define what position you want the function in. (Feedback from Stephen Warren and Sascha Hauer). - Since we now need to request a combined function+position from the machine mapping table that connect mux settings to drivers, it was extended with a position field and a name field. The name field is now used if you e.g. need to switch between two mux map settings at runtime. - Switched from a class device to using struct bus_type for this subsystem. Verified sysfs functionality: seems to work fine. (Feedback from Arnd Bergmann and Greg Kroah-Hartman) - Define a per pincontroller list of GPIO ranges from the GPIO pin space that can be handled by the pin controller. These can be added one by one at runtime. (Feedback from Barry Song) - Expanded documentation of regulator_[get|enable|disable|put] semantics. - Fixed a number of review comments from Barry Song. (Thanks!) ChangeLog v5->v6: - Create an abstract pin group concept that can sort pins into named and enumerated groups no matter what the use of these groups may be, one possible usecase is a group of pins being muxed in or so. The intention is however to also use these groups for other pin control activities. - Make it compulsory for pinmux functions to associate with at least one group, so the abstract pin group concept is used to define the groups of pins affected by a pinmux function. The pinmux driver interface has been altered so as to enforce a function to list applicable groups per function. - Provide an optional .group entry in the pinmux machine map so the map can select beteween different available groups to be used with a certain function. - Consequent changes all over the place so that e.g. debugfs present reasonable information about the world. - Drop the per-pin mux (*config) function in the pinmux_ops struct - I was afraid that this would start to be used for things totally unrelated to muxing, we can introduce that to the generic struct pinctrl_ops if needed. I want to keep muxing orthogonal to other pin control subjects and not mix these things up. ChangeLog v6->v7: - Make it possible to have several map entries matching the same device, pin controller and function, but using a different group, and alter the semantics so that pinmux_get() will pick all matching map entries, and store the associated groups in a list. The list will then be iterated over at pinmux_enable()/pinmux_disable() and corresponding driver functions called for each defined group. Notice that you're only allowed to map multiple *groups* to the same { device, pin controller, function } triplet, attempts to map the same device to multiple pin controllers will for example fail. This is hopefully the crucial feature requested by Stephen Warren. - Add a pinmux hogging field to the pinmux mapping entries, and enable the pinmux core to hog pinmux map entries. This currently only works for pinmuxes without assigned devices as it looks now, but with device trees we can look up the corresponding struct device * entries when we register the pinmux driver, and have it hog each pinmux map in turn, for a simple approach to non-dynamic pin muxing. This addresses an issue from Grant Likely that the machine should take care of as much of the pinmux setup as possible, not the devices. By supplying a list of hogs, it can now instruct the core to take care of any static mappings. - Switch pinmux group retrieveal function to grab an array of strings representing the groups rather than an array of unsigned and rewrite accordingly. - Alter debugfs to show the grouplist handled by each pinmux. Also add a list of hogs. - Dynamically allocate a struct pinmux at pinmux_get() and free it at pinmux_put(), then add these to the global list of pinmuxes active as we go along. - Go over the list of pinmux maps at pinmux_get() time and repeatedly apply matches. - Retrieve applicable groups per function from the driver as a string array rather than a unsigned array, then lookup the enumerators. - Make the device to pinmux map a singleton - only allow the mapping table to be registered once and even tag the registration function with __init so it surely won't be abused. - Create a separate debugfs file to view the pinmux map at runtime. - Introduce a spin lock to the pin descriptor struct, lock it when modifying pin status entries. Reported by Stijn Devriendt. - Fix up the documentation after review from Stephen Warren. - Let the GPIO ranges give names as const char * instead of some fixed-length string. - add a function to unregister GPIO ranges to mirror the registration function. - Privatized the struct pinctrl_device and removed it from the API, the drivers do not need to know the members of this struct. It is now in the local header "core.h". - Rename the concept of "anonymous" mux maps to "system" muxes and add convenience macros and documentation. ChangeLog v7->v8: - Delete the leftover pinmux_config() function from the header. - Fix a race condition found by Stijn Devriendt in pin_request() ChangeLog v8->v9: - Drop the bus_type and the sysfs attributes and all, we're not on the clear about how this should be used for e.g. userspace interfaces so let us save this for the future. - Use the right name in MAINTAINERS, PIN CONTROL rather than PINMUX - Don't kfree() the device state holder, let the .remove() callback handle this. - Fix up numerous kerneldoc headers to have one line for the function description and more verbose documentation below the parameters ChangeLog v9->v10: - pinctrl: EXPORT_SYMBOL needs export.h, folded in a patch from Steven Rothwell - fix pinctrl_register error handling, folded in a patch from Axel Lin - Various fixes to documentation text so that it's consistent. - Removed pointless comment from drivers/Kconfig - Removed dependency on SYSFS since we removed the bus in v9. - Renamed hopelessly abbreviated pctldev_* functions to the more verbose pinctrl_dev_* - Drop mutex properly when looking up GPIO ranges - Return NULL instead of ERR_PTR() errors on registration of pin controllers, using cast pointers is fragile. We can live without the detailed error codes for sure. Cc: Stijn Devriendt Cc: Joe Perches Cc: Russell King Acked-by: Grant Likely Acked-by: Stephen Warren Tested-by: Barry Song <21cnbao@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Linus Walleij --- Documentation/pinctrl.txt | 950 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 950 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/pinctrl.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b04cb7d45a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,950 @@ +PINCTRL (PIN CONTROL) subsystem +This document outlines the pin control subsystem in Linux + +This subsystem deals with: + +- Enumerating and naming controllable pins + +- Multiplexing of pins, pads, fingers (etc) see below for details + +The intention is to also deal with: + +- Software-controlled biasing and driving mode specific pins, such as + pull-up/down, open drain etc, load capacitance configuration when controlled + by software, etc. + + +Top-level interface +=================== + +Definition of PIN CONTROLLER: + +- A pin controller is a piece of hardware, usually a set of registers, that + can control PINs. It may be able to multiplex, bias, set load capacitance, + set drive strength etc for individual pins or groups of pins. + +Definition of PIN: + +- PINS are equal to pads, fingers, balls or whatever packaging input or + output line you want to control and these are denoted by unsigned integers + in the range 0..maxpin. This numberspace is local to each PIN CONTROLLER, so + there may be several such number spaces in a system. This pin space may + be sparse - i.e. there may be gaps in the space with numbers where no + pin exists. + +When a PIN CONTROLLER is instatiated, it will register a descriptor to the +pin control framework, and this descriptor contains an array of pin descriptors +describing the pins handled by this specific pin controller. + +Here is an example of a PGA (Pin Grid Array) chip seen from underneath: + + A B C D E F G H + + 8 o o o o o o o o + + 7 o o o o o o o o + + 6 o o o o o o o o + + 5 o o o o o o o o + + 4 o o o o o o o o + + 3 o o o o o o o o + + 2 o o o o o o o o + + 1 o o o o o o o o + +To register a pin controller and name all the pins on this package we can do +this in our driver: + +#include + +const struct pinctrl_pin_desc __refdata foo_pins[] = { + PINCTRL_PIN(0, "A1"), + PINCTRL_PIN(1, "A2"), + PINCTRL_PIN(2, "A3"), + ... + PINCTRL_PIN(61, "H6"), + PINCTRL_PIN(62, "H7"), + PINCTRL_PIN(63, "H8"), +}; + +static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { + .name = "foo", + .pins = foo_pins, + .npins = ARRAY_SIZE(foo_pins), + .maxpin = 63, + .owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +int __init foo_probe(void) +{ + struct pinctrl_dev *pctl; + + pctl = pinctrl_register(&foo_desc, , NULL); + if (IS_ERR(pctl)) + pr_err("could not register foo pin driver\n"); +} + +Pins usually have fancier names than this. You can find these in the dataheet +for your chip. Notice that the core pinctrl.h file provides a fancy macro +called PINCTRL_PIN() to create the struct entries. As you can see I enumerated +the pins from 0 in the upper left corner to 63 in the lower right corner, +this enumeration was arbitrarily chosen, in practice you need to think +through your numbering system so that it matches the layout of registers +and such things in your driver, or the code may become complicated. You must +also consider matching of offsets to the GPIO ranges that may be handled by +the pin controller. + +For a padring with 467 pads, as opposed to actual pins, I used an enumeration +like this, walking around the edge of the chip, which seems to be industry +standard too (all these pads had names, too): + + + 0 ..... 104 + 466 105 + . . + . . + 358 224 + 357 .... 225 + + +Pin groups +========== + +Many controllers need to deal with groups of pins, so the pin controller +subsystem has a mechanism for enumerating groups of pins and retrieving the +actual enumerated pins that are part of a certain group. + +For example, say that we have a group of pins dealing with an SPI interface +on { 0, 8, 16, 24 }, and a group of pins dealing with an I2C interface on pins +on { 24, 25 }. + +These two groups are presented to the pin control subsystem by implementing +some generic pinctrl_ops like this: + +#include + +struct foo_group { + const char *name; + const unsigned int *pins; + const unsigned num_pins; +}; + +static unsigned int spi0_pins[] = { 0, 8, 16, 24 }; +static unsigned int i2c0_pins[] = { 24, 25 }; + +static const struct foo_group foo_groups[] = { + { + .name = "spi0_grp", + .pins = spi0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_pins), + }, + { + .name = "i2c0_grp", + .pins = i2c0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(i2c0_pins), + }, +}; + + +static int foo_list_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups)) + return -EINVAL; + return 0; +} + +static const char *foo_get_group_name(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, + unsigned selector) +{ + return foo_groups[selector].name; +} + +static int foo_get_group_pins(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned ** const pins, + unsigned * const num_pins) +{ + *pins = (unsigned *) foo_groups[selector].pins; + *num_pins = foo_groups[selector].num_pins; + return 0; +} + +static struct pinctrl_ops foo_pctrl_ops = { + .list_groups = foo_list_groups, + .get_group_name = foo_get_group_name, + .get_group_pins = foo_get_group_pins, +}; + + +static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { + ... + .pctlops = &foo_pctrl_ops, +}; + +The pin control subsystem will call the .list_groups() function repeatedly +beginning on 0 until it returns non-zero to determine legal selectors, then +it will call the other functions to retrieve the name and pins of the group. +Maintaining the data structure of the groups is up to the driver, this is +just a simple example - in practice you may need more entries in your group +structure, for example specific register ranges associated with each group +and so on. + + +Interaction with the GPIO subsystem +=================================== + +The GPIO drivers may want to perform operations of various types on the same +physical pins that are also registered as pin controller pins. + +Since the pin controller subsystem have its pinspace local to the pin +controller we need a mapping so that the pin control subsystem can figure out +which pin controller handles control of a certain GPIO pin. Since a single +pin controller may be muxing several GPIO ranges (typically SoCs that have +one set of pins but internally several GPIO silicon blocks, each modeled as +a struct gpio_chip) any number of GPIO ranges can be added to a pin controller +instance like this: + +struct gpio_chip chip_a; +struct gpio_chip chip_b; + +static struct pinctrl_gpio_range gpio_range_a = { + .name = "chip a", + .id = 0, + .base = 32, + .npins = 16, + .gc = &chip_a; +}; + +static struct pinctrl_gpio_range gpio_range_a = { + .name = "chip b", + .id = 0, + .base = 48, + .npins = 8, + .gc = &chip_b; +}; + + +{ + struct pinctrl_dev *pctl; + ... + pinctrl_add_gpio_range(pctl, &gpio_range_a); + pinctrl_add_gpio_range(pctl, &gpio_range_b); +} + +So this complex system has one pin controller handling two different +GPIO chips. Chip a has 16 pins and chip b has 8 pins. They are mapped in +the global GPIO pin space at: + +chip a: [32 .. 47] +chip b: [48 .. 55] + +When GPIO-specific functions in the pin control subsystem are called, these +ranges will be used to look up the apropriate pin controller by inspecting +and matching the pin to the pin ranges across all controllers. When a +pin controller handling the matching range is found, GPIO-specific functions +will be called on that specific pin controller. + +For all functionalities dealing with pin biasing, pin muxing etc, the pin +controller subsystem will subtract the range's .base offset from the passed +in gpio pin number, and pass that on to the pin control driver, so the driver +will get an offset into its handled number range. Further it is also passed +the range ID value, so that the pin controller knows which range it should +deal with. + +For example: if a user issues pinctrl_gpio_set_foo(50), the pin control +subsystem will find that the second range on this pin controller matches, +subtract the base 48 and call the +pinctrl_driver_gpio_set_foo(pinctrl, range, 2) where the latter function has +this signature: + +int pinctrl_driver_gpio_set_foo(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, + struct pinctrl_gpio_range *rangeid, + unsigned offset); + +Now the driver knows that we want to do some GPIO-specific operation on the +second GPIO range handled by "chip b", at offset 2 in that specific range. + +(If the GPIO subsystem is ever refactored to use a local per-GPIO controller +pin space, this mapping will need to be augmented accordingly.) + + +PINMUX interfaces +================= + +These calls use the pinmux_* naming prefix. No other calls should use that +prefix. + + +What is pinmuxing? +================== + +PINMUX, also known as padmux, ballmux, alternate functions or mission modes +is a way for chip vendors producing some kind of electrical packages to use +a certain physical pin (ball, pad, finger, etc) for multiple mutually exclusive +functions, depending on the application. By "application" in this context +we usually mean a way of soldering or wiring the package into an electronic +system, even though the framework makes it possible to also change the function +at runtime. + +Here is an example of a PGA (Pin Grid Array) chip seen from underneath: + + A B C D E F G H + +---+ + 8 | o | o o o o o o o + | | + 7 | o | o o o o o o o + | | + 6 | o | o o o o o o o + +---+---+ + 5 | o | o | o o o o o o + +---+---+ +---+ + 4 o o o o o o | o | o + | | + 3 o o o o o o | o | o + | | + 2 o o o o o o | o | o + +-------+-------+-------+---+---+ + 1 | o o | o o | o o | o | o | + +-------+-------+-------+---+---+ + +This is not tetris. The game to think of is chess. Not all PGA/BGA packages +are chessboard-like, big ones have "holes" in some arrangement according to +different design patterns, but we're using this as a simple example. Of the +pins you see some will be taken by things like a few VCC and GND to feed power +to the chip, and quite a few will be taken by large ports like an external +memory interface. The remaining pins will often be subject to pin multiplexing. + +The example 8x8 PGA package above will have pin numbers 0 thru 63 assigned to +its physical pins. It will name the pins { A1, A2, A3 ... H6, H7, H8 } using +pinctrl_register_pins() and a suitable data set as shown earlier. + +In this 8x8 BGA package the pins { A8, A7, A6, A5 } can be used as an SPI port +(these are four pins: CLK, RXD, TXD, FRM). In that case, pin B5 can be used as +some general-purpose GPIO pin. However, in another setting, pins { A5, B5 } can +be used as an I2C port (these are just two pins: SCL, SDA). Needless to say, +we cannot use the SPI port and I2C port at the same time. However in the inside +of the package the silicon performing the SPI logic can alternatively be routed +out on pins { G4, G3, G2, G1 }. + +On the botton row at { A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 } we have something +special - it's an external MMC bus that can be 2, 4 or 8 bits wide, and it will +consume 2, 4 or 8 pins respectively, so either { A1, B1 } are taken or +{ A1, B1, C1, D1 } or all of them. If we use all 8 bits, we cannot use the SPI +port on pins { G4, G3, G2, G1 } of course. + +This way the silicon blocks present inside the chip can be multiplexed "muxed" +out on different pin ranges. Often contemporary SoC (systems on chip) will +contain several I2C, SPI, SDIO/MMC, etc silicon blocks that can be routed to +different pins by pinmux settings. + +Since general-purpose I/O pins (GPIO) are typically always in shortage, it is +common to be able to use almost any pin as a GPIO pin if it is not currently +in use by some other I/O port. + + +Pinmux conventions +================== + +The purpose of the pinmux functionality in the pin controller subsystem is to +abstract and provide pinmux settings to the devices you choose to instantiate +in your machine configuration. It is inspired by the clk, GPIO and regulator +subsystems, so devices will request their mux setting, but it's also possible +to request a single pin for e.g. GPIO. + +Definitions: + +- FUNCTIONS can be switched in and out by a driver residing with the pin + control subsystem in the drivers/pinctrl/* directory of the kernel. The + pin control driver knows the possible functions. In the example above you can + identify three pinmux functions, one for spi, one for i2c and one for mmc. + +- FUNCTIONS are assumed to be enumerable from zero in a one-dimensional array. + In this case the array could be something like: { spi0, i2c0, mmc0 } + for the three available functions. + +- FUNCTIONS have PIN GROUPS as defined on the generic level - so a certain + function is *always* associated with a certain set of pin groups, could + be just a single one, but could also be many. In the example above the + function i2c is associated with the pins { A5, B5 }, enumerated as + { 24, 25 } in the controller pin space. + + The Function spi is associated with pin groups { A8, A7, A6, A5 } + and { G4, G3, G2, G1 }, which are enumerated as { 0, 8, 16, 24 } and + { 38, 46, 54, 62 } respectively. + + Group names must be unique per pin controller, no two groups on the same + controller may have the same name. + +- The combination of a FUNCTION and a PIN GROUP determine a certain function + for a certain set of pins. The knowledge of the functions and pin groups + and their machine-specific particulars are kept inside the pinmux driver, + from the outside only the enumerators are known, and the driver core can: + + - Request the name of a function with a certain selector (>= 0) + - A list of groups associated with a certain function + - Request that a certain group in that list to be activated for a certain + function + + As already described above, pin groups are in turn self-descriptive, so + the core will retrieve the actual pin range in a certain group from the + driver. + +- FUNCTIONS and GROUPS on a certain PIN CONTROLLER are MAPPED to a certain + device by the board file, device tree or similar machine setup configuration + mechanism, similar to how regulators are connected to devices, usually by + name. Defining a pin controller, function and group thus uniquely identify + the set of pins to be used by a certain device. (If only one possible group + of pins is available for the function, no group name need to be supplied - + the core will simply select the first and only group available.) + + In the example case we can define that this particular machine shall + use device spi0 with pinmux function fspi0 group gspi0 and i2c0 on function + fi2c0 group gi2c0, on the primary pin controller, we get mappings + like these: + + { + {"map-spi0", spi0, pinctrl0, fspi0, gspi0}, + {"map-i2c0", i2c0, pinctrl0, fi2c0, gi2c0} + } + + Every map must be assigned a symbolic name, pin controller and function. + The group is not compulsory - if it is omitted the first group presented by + the driver as applicable for the function will be selected, which is + useful for simple cases. + + The device name is present in map entries tied to specific devices. Maps + without device names are referred to as SYSTEM pinmuxes, such as can be taken + by the machine implementation on boot and not tied to any specific device. + + It is possible to map several groups to the same combination of device, + pin controller and function. This is for cases where a certain function on + a certain pin controller may use different sets of pins in different + configurations. + +- PINS for a certain FUNCTION using a certain PIN GROUP on a certain + PIN CONTROLLER are provided on a first-come first-serve basis, so if some + other device mux setting or GPIO pin request has already taken your physical + pin, you will be denied the use of it. To get (activate) a new setting, the + old one has to be put (deactivated) first. + +Sometimes the documentation and hardware registers will be oriented around +pads (or "fingers") rather than pins - these are the soldering surfaces on the +silicon inside the package, and may or may not match the actual number of +pins/balls underneath the capsule. Pick some enumeration that makes sense to +you. Define enumerators only for the pins you can control if that makes sense. + +Assumptions: + +We assume that the number possible function maps to pin groups is limited by +the hardware. I.e. we assume that there is no system where any function can be +mapped to any pin, like in a phone exchange. So the available pins groups for +a certain function will be limited to a few choices (say up to eight or so), +not hundreds or any amount of choices. This is the characteristic we have found +by inspecting available pinmux hardware, and a necessary assumption since we +expect pinmux drivers to present *all* possible function vs pin group mappings +to the subsystem. + + +Pinmux drivers +============== + +The pinmux core takes care of preventing conflicts on pins and calling +the pin controller driver to execute different settings. + +It is the responsibility of the pinmux driver to impose further restrictions +(say for example infer electronic limitations due to load etc) to determine +whether or not the requested function can actually be allowed, and in case it +is possible to perform the requested mux setting, poke the hardware so that +this happens. + +Pinmux drivers are required to supply a few callback functions, some are +optional. Usually the enable() and disable() functions are implemented, +writing values into some certain registers to activate a certain mux setting +for a certain pin. + +A simple driver for the above example will work by setting bits 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 +into some register named MUX to select a certain function with a certain +group of pins would work something like this: + +#include +#include + +struct foo_group { + const char *name; + const unsigned int *pins; + const unsigned num_pins; +}; + +static const unsigned spi0_0_pins[] = { 0, 8, 16, 24 }; +static const unsigned spi0_1_pins[] = { 38, 46, 54, 62 }; +static const unsigned i2c0_pins[] = { 24, 25 }; +static const unsigned mmc0_1_pins[] = { 56, 57 }; +static const unsigned mmc0_2_pins[] = { 58, 59 }; +static const unsigned mmc0_3_pins[] = { 60, 61, 62, 63 }; + +static const struct foo_group foo_groups[] = { + { + .name = "spi0_0_grp", + .pins = spi0_0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_0_pins), + }, + { + .name = "spi0_1_grp", + .pins = spi0_1_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_1_pins), + }, + { + .name = "i2c0_grp", + .pins = i2c0_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(i2c0_pins), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0_1_grp", + .pins = mmc0_1_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_1_pins), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0_2_grp", + .pins = mmc0_2_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_2_pins), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0_3_grp", + .pins = mmc0_3_pins, + .num_pins = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_3_pins), + }, +}; + + +static int foo_list_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_groups)) + return -EINVAL; + return 0; +} + +static const char *foo_get_group_name(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, + unsigned selector) +{ + return foo_groups[selector].name; +} + +static int foo_get_group_pins(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned ** const pins, + unsigned * const num_pins) +{ + *pins = (unsigned *) foo_groups[selector].pins; + *num_pins = foo_groups[selector].num_pins; + return 0; +} + +static struct pinctrl_ops foo_pctrl_ops = { + .list_groups = foo_list_groups, + .get_group_name = foo_get_group_name, + .get_group_pins = foo_get_group_pins, +}; + +struct foo_pmx_func { + const char *name; + const char * const *groups; + const unsigned num_groups; +}; + +static const char * const spi0_groups[] = { "spi0_1_grp" }; +static const char * const i2c0_groups[] = { "i2c0_grp" }; +static const char * const mmc0_groups[] = { "mmc0_1_grp", "mmc0_2_grp", + "mmc0_3_grp" }; + +static const struct foo_pmx_func foo_functions[] = { + { + .name = "spi0", + .groups = spi0_groups, + .num_groups = ARRAY_SIZE(spi0_groups), + }, + { + .name = "i2c0", + .groups = i2c0_groups, + .num_groups = ARRAY_SIZE(i2c0_groups), + }, + { + .name = "mmc0", + .groups = mmc0_groups, + .num_groups = ARRAY_SIZE(mmc0_groups), + }, +}; + +int foo_list_funcs(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + if (selector >= ARRAY_SIZE(foo_functions)) + return -EINVAL; + return 0; +} + +const char *foo_get_fname(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector) +{ + return myfuncs[selector].name; +} + +static int foo_get_groups(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + const char * const **groups, + unsigned * const num_groups) +{ + *groups = foo_functions[selector].groups; + *num_groups = foo_functions[selector].num_groups; + return 0; +} + +int foo_enable(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned group) +{ + u8 regbit = (1 << group); + + writeb((readb(MUX)|regbit), MUX) + return 0; +} + +int foo_disable(struct pinctrl_dev *pctldev, unsigned selector, + unsigned group) +{ + u8 regbit = (1 << group); + + writeb((readb(MUX) & ~(regbit)), MUX) + return 0; +} + +struct pinmux_ops foo_pmxops = { + .list_functions = foo_list_funcs, + .get_function_name = foo_get_fname, + .get_function_groups = foo_get_groups, + .enable = foo_enable, + .disable = foo_disable, +}; + +/* Pinmux operations are handled by some pin controller */ +static struct pinctrl_desc foo_desc = { + ... + .pctlops = &foo_pctrl_ops, + .pmxops = &foo_pmxops, +}; + +In the example activating muxing 0 and 1 at the same time setting bits +0 and 1, uses one pin in common so they would collide. + +The beauty of the pinmux subsystem is that since it keeps track of all +pins and who is using them, it will already have denied an impossible +request like that, so the driver does not need to worry about such +things - when it gets a selector passed in, the pinmux subsystem makes +sure no other device or GPIO assignment is already using the selected +pins. Thus bits 0 and 1 in the control register will never be set at the +same time. + +All the above functions are mandatory to implement for a pinmux driver. + + +Pinmux interaction with the GPIO subsystem +========================================== + +The function list could become long, especially if you can convert every +individual pin into a GPIO pin independent of any other pins, and then try +the approach to define every pin as a function. + +In this case, the function array would become 64 entries for each GPIO +setting and then the device functions. + +For this reason there is an additional function a pinmux driver can implement +to enable only GPIO on an individual pin: .gpio_request_enable(). The same +.free() function as for other functions is assumed to be usable also for +GPIO pins. + +This function will pass in the affected GPIO range identified by the pin +controller core, so you know which GPIO pins are being affected by the request +operation. + +Alternatively it is fully allowed to use named functions for each GPIO +pin, the pinmux_request_gpio() will attempt to obtain the function "gpioN" +where "N" is the global GPIO pin number if no special GPIO-handler is +registered. + + +Pinmux board/machine configuration +================================== + +Boards and machines define how a certain complete running system is put +together, including how GPIOs and devices are muxed, how regulators are +constrained and how the clock tree looks. Of course pinmux settings are also +part of this. + +A pinmux config for a machine looks pretty much like a simple regulator +configuration, so for the example array above we want to enable i2c and +spi on the second function mapping: + +#include + +static struct pinmux_map pmx_mapping[] = { + { + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "spi0", + .dev_name = "foo-spi.0", + }, + { + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "i2c0", + .dev_name = "foo-i2c.0", + }, + { + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", + }, +}; + +The dev_name here matches to the unique device name that can be used to look +up the device struct (just like with clockdev or regulators). The function name +must match a function provided by the pinmux driver handling this pin range. + +As you can see we may have several pin controllers on the system and thus +we need to specify which one of them that contain the functions we wish +to map. The map can also use struct device * directly, so there is no +inherent need to use strings to specify .dev_name or .ctrl_dev_name, these +are for the situation where you do not have a handle to the struct device *, +for example if they are not yet instantiated or cumbersome to obtain. + +You register this pinmux mapping to the pinmux subsystem by simply: + + ret = pinmux_register_mappings(&pmx_mapping, ARRAY_SIZE(pmx_mapping)); + +Since the above construct is pretty common there is a helper macro to make +it even more compact which assumes you want to use pinctrl.0 and position +0 for mapping, for example: + +static struct pinmux_map pmx_mapping[] = { + PINMUX_MAP_PRIMARY("I2CMAP", "i2c0", "foo-i2c.0"), +}; + + +Complex mappings +================ + +As it is possible to map a function to different groups of pins an optional +.group can be specified like this: + +... +{ + .name = "spi0-pos-A", + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "spi0", + .group = "spi0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-spi.0", +}, +{ + .name = "spi0-pos-B", + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "spi0", + .group = "spi0_1_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-spi.0", +}, +... + +This example mapping is used to switch between two positions for spi0 at +runtime, as described further below under the heading "Runtime pinmuxing". + +Further it is possible to match several groups of pins to the same function +for a single device, say for example in the mmc0 example above, where you can +additively expand the mmc0 bus from 2 to 4 to 8 pins. If we want to use all +three groups for a total of 2+2+4 = 8 pins (for an 8-bit MMC bus as is the +case), we define a mapping like this: + +... +{ + .name "2bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "4bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "4bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_1_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "8bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_0_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "8bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_1_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +{ + .name "8bit" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "mmc0", + .group = "mmc0_2_grp", + .dev_name = "foo-mmc.0", +}, +... + +The result of grabbing this mapping from the device with something like +this (see next paragraph): + + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "8bit"); + +Will be that you activate all the three bottom records in the mapping at +once. Since they share the same name, pin controller device, funcion and +device, and since we allow multiple groups to match to a single device, they +all get selected, and they all get enabled and disable simultaneously by the +pinmux core. + + +Pinmux requests from drivers +============================ + +Generally it is discouraged to let individual drivers get and enable pinmuxes. +So if possible, handle the pinmuxes in platform code or some other place where +you have access to all the affected struct device * pointers. In some cases +where a driver needs to switch between different mux mappings at runtime +this is not possible. + +A driver may request a certain mux to be activated, usually just the default +mux like this: + +#include + +struct foo_state { + struct pinmux *pmx; + ... +}; + +foo_probe() +{ + /* Allocate a state holder named "state" etc */ + struct pinmux pmx; + + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, NULL); + if IS_ERR(pmx) + return PTR_ERR(pmx); + pinmux_enable(pmx); + + state->pmx = pmx; +} + +foo_remove() +{ + pinmux_disable(state->pmx); + pinmux_put(state->pmx); +} + +If you want to grab a specific mux mapping and not just the first one found for +this device you can specify a specific mapping name, for example in the above +example the second i2c0 setting: pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-B"); + +This get/enable/disable/put sequence can just as well be handled by bus drivers +if you don't want each and every driver to handle it and you know the +arrangement on your bus. + +The semantics of the get/enable respective disable/put is as follows: + +- pinmux_get() is called in process context to reserve the pins affected with + a certain mapping and set up the pinmux core and the driver. It will allocate + a struct from the kernel memory to hold the pinmux state. + +- pinmux_enable()/pinmux_disable() is quick and can be called from fastpath + (irq context) when you quickly want to set up/tear down the hardware muxing + when running a device driver. Usually it will just poke some values into a + register. + +- pinmux_disable() is called in process context to tear down the pin requests + and release the state holder struct for the mux setting. + +Usually the pinmux core handled the get/put pair and call out to the device +drivers bookkeeping operations, like checking available functions and the +associated pins, whereas the enable/disable pass on to the pin controller +driver which takes care of activating and/or deactivating the mux setting by +quickly poking some registers. + +The pins are allocated for your device when you issue the pinmux_get() call, +after this you should be able to see this in the debugfs listing of all pins. + + +System pinmux hogging +===================== + +A system pinmux map entry, i.e. a pinmux setting that does not have a device +associated with it, can be hogged by the core when the pin controller is +registered. This means that the core will attempt to call pinmux_get() and +pinmux_enable() on it immediately after the pin control device has been +registered. + +This is enabled by simply setting the .hog_on_boot field in the map to true, +like this: + +{ + .name "POWERMAP" + .ctrl_dev_name = "pinctrl.0", + .function = "power_func", + .hog_on_boot = true, +}, + +Since it may be common to request the core to hog a few always-applicable +mux settings on the primary pin controller, there is a convenience macro for +this: + +PINMUX_MAP_PRIMARY_SYS_HOG("POWERMAP", "power_func") + +This gives the exact same result as the above construction. + + +Runtime pinmuxing +================= + +It is possible to mux a certain function in and out at runtime, say to move +an SPI port from one set of pins to another set of pins. Say for example for +spi0 in the example above, we expose two different groups of pins for the same +function, but with different named in the mapping as described under +"Advanced mapping" above. So we have two mappings named "spi0-pos-A" and +"spi0-pos-B". + +This snippet first muxes the function in the pins defined by group A, enables +it, disables and releases it, and muxes it in on the pins defined by group B: + +foo_switch() +{ + struct pinmux pmx; + + /* Enable on position A */ + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-A"); + if IS_ERR(pmx) + return PTR_ERR(pmx); + pinmux_enable(pmx); + + /* This releases the pins again */ + pinmux_disable(pmx); + pinmux_put(pmx); + + /* Enable on position B */ + pmx = pinmux_get(&device, "spi0-pos-B"); + if IS_ERR(pmx) + return PTR_ERR(pmx); + pinmux_enable(pmx); + ... +} + +The above has to be done from process context. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2bcd1c0cfcf53a384159c272c972645e7e822140 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Timur Tabi Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2011 12:41:35 -0500 Subject: powerpc/fsl_msi: add support for "msi-address-64" property Add support for the msi-address-64 property of a PCI node. This property specifies the PCI address of MSIIR (message signaled interrupt index register). In commit 3da34aae ("powerpc/fsl: Support unique MSI addresses per PCIe Root Complex"), the msi_addr_hi/msi_addr_lo fields of struct fsl_msi were redefined from an actual address to just an offset, but the fields were not renamed accordingly. These fields are replace with a single field, msiir_offset, to reflect the new meaning. Signed-off-by: Timur Tabi Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- .../devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt | 42 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 42 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt index 70558c3f368..5d586e1ccaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt @@ -25,6 +25,16 @@ Required properties: are routed to IPIC, and for 85xx/86xx cpu the interrupts are routed to MPIC. +Optional properties: +- msi-address-64: 64-bit PCI address of the MSIIR register. The MSIIR register + is used for MSI messaging. The address of MSIIR in PCI address space is + the MSI message address. + + This property may be used in virtualized environments where the hypervisor + has created an alternate mapping for the MSIR block. See below for an + explanation. + + Example: msi@41600 { compatible = "fsl,mpc8610-msi", "fsl,mpic-msi"; @@ -41,3 +51,35 @@ Example: 0xe7 0>; interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; }; + +The Freescale hypervisor and msi-address-64 +------------------------------------------- +Normally, PCI devices have access to all of CCSR via an ATMU mapping. The +Freescale MSI driver calculates the address of MSIIR (in the MSI register +block) and sets that address as the MSI message address. + +In a virtualized environment, the hypervisor may need to create an IOMMU +mapping for MSIIR. The Freescale ePAPR hypervisor has this requirement +because of hardware limitations of the Peripheral Access Management Unit +(PAMU), which is currently the only IOMMU that the hypervisor supports. +The ATMU is programmed with the guest physical address, and the PAMU +intercepts transactions and reroutes them to the true physical address. + +In the PAMU, each PCI controller is given only one primary window. The +PAMU restricts DMA operations so that they can only occur within a window. +Because PCI devices must be able to DMA to memory, the primary window must +be used to cover all of the guest's memory space. + +PAMU primary windows can be divided into 256 subwindows, and each +subwindow can have its own address mapping ("guest physical" to "true +physical"). However, each subwindow has to have the same alignment, which +means they cannot be located at just any address. Because of these +restrictions, it is usually impossible to create a 4KB subwindow that +covers MSIIR where it's normally located. + +Therefore, the hypervisor has to create a subwindow inside the same +primary window used for memory, but mapped to the MSIR block (where MSIIR +lives). The first subwindow after the end of guest memory is used for +this. The address specified in the msi-address-64 property is the PCI +address of MSIIR. The hypervisor configures the PAMU to map that address to +the true physical address of MSIIR. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 873c07da6abd5519a7850caa90f226d3b15e3fba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Renzo Dani Date: Sun, 9 Oct 2011 06:43:50 -0300 Subject: [media] update az6027 firmware URL Signed-off-by: Renzo Dani Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware | 13 ++----------- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index 996f5786099..e67be7afc78 100755 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -576,19 +576,10 @@ sub ngene { } sub az6027{ - my $file = "AZ6027_Linux_Driver.tar.gz"; - my $url = "http://linux.terratec.de/files/$file"; my $firmware = "dvb-usb-az6027-03.fw"; + my $url = "http://linux.terratec.de/files/TERRATEC_S7/$firmware"; - wgetfile($file, $url); - - #untar - if( system("tar xzvf $file $firmware")){ - die "failed to untar firmware"; - } - if( system("rm $file")){ - die ("unable to remove unnecessary files"); - } + wgetfile($firmware, $url); $firmware; } -- cgit v1.2.3 From aecc3130da7d3a02439bcba428e9fe470ec11f6f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Vikas Chaudhary Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2011 16:55:40 -0700 Subject: [SCSI] qla4xxx: Update license Signed-off-by: Vikas Chaudhary Reviewed-by: Mike Christie Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX | 2 + Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx | 310 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 312 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX index c2e18e10985..b48ded55b55 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX @@ -28,6 +28,8 @@ LICENSE.FlashPoint - Licence of the Flashpoint driver LICENSE.qla2xxx - License for QLogic Linux Fibre Channel HBA Driver firmware. +LICENSE.qla4xxx + - License for QLogic Linux iSCSI HBA Driver. Mylex.txt - info on driver for Mylex adapters NinjaSCSI.txt diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..494980e4049 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla4xxx @@ -0,0 +1,310 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux iSCSI HBA Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 3.x. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8d6f5cea12e5eebdaca94b3a3a4bd4f12e83d85d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: adam radford Date: Sat, 8 Oct 2011 18:15:24 -0700 Subject: [SCSI] megaraid_sas: Changelog and version update The following patch for megaraid_sas updates the ChangeLog.megaraid_sas file and updates the driver version. Signed-off-by: Adam Radford Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas | 15 +++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 1b6e27ddb7f..64adb98b181 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,18 @@ +Release Date : Wed. Oct 5, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.06.12-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.40-rc1 + 1. Continue booting immediately if FW in FAULT at driver load time. + 2. Increase default cmds per lun to 256. + 3. Fix mismatch in megasas_reset_fusion() mutex lock-unlock. + 4. Remove some un-necessary code. + 5. Clear state change interrupts for Fusion/Invader. + 6. Clear FUSION_IN_RESET before enabling interrupts. + 7. Add support for MegaRAID 9360/9380 12GB/s controllers. + 8. Add multiple MSI-X vector/multiple reply queue support. + 9. Add driver workaround for PERC5/1068 kdump kernel panic. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Release Date : Tue. Jul 26, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Adam Radford -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2a77c46de1e3dace73745015635ebbc648eca69c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: ShuoX Liu Date: Wed, 10 Aug 2011 23:01:26 +0200 Subject: PM / Suspend: Add statistics debugfs file for suspend to RAM Record S3 failure time about each reason and the latest two failed devices' names in S3 progress. We can check it through 'suspend_stats' entry in debugfs. The motivation of the patch: We are enabling power features on Medfield. Comparing with PC/notebook, a mobile enters/exits suspend-2-ram (we call it s3 on Medfield) far more frequently. If it can't enter suspend-2-ram in time, the power might be used up soon. We often find sometimes, a device suspend fails. Then, system retries s3 over and over again. As display is off, testers and developers don't know what happens. Some testers and developers complain they don't know if system tries suspend-2-ram, and what device fails to suspend. They need such info for a quick check. The patch adds suspend_stats under debugfs for users to check suspend to RAM statistics quickly. If not using this patch, we have other methods to get info about what device fails. One is to turn on CONFIG_PM_DEBUG, but users would get too much info and testers need recompile the system. In addition, dynamic debug is another good tool to dump debug info. But it still doesn't match our utilization scenario closely. 1) user need write a user space parser to process the syslog output; 2) Our testing scenario is we leave the mobile for at least hours. Then, check its status. No serial console available during the testing. One is because console would be suspended, and the other is serial console connecting with spi or HSU devices would consume power. These devices are powered off at suspend-2-ram. Signed-off-by: ShuoX Liu Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt | 24 ++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 24 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt index ddd78172ef7..62eca080a71 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt @@ -201,3 +201,27 @@ case, you may be able to search for failing drivers by following the procedure analogous to the one described in section 1. If you find some failing drivers, you will have to unload them every time before an STR transition (ie. before you run s2ram), and please report the problems with them. + +There is a debugfs entry which shows the suspend to RAM statistics. Here is an +example of its output. + # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/suspend_stats + success: 20 + fail: 5 + failed_freeze: 0 + failed_prepare: 0 + failed_suspend: 5 + failed_suspend_noirq: 0 + failed_resume: 0 + failed_resume_noirq: 0 + failures: + last_failed_dev: alarm + adc + last_failed_errno: -16 + -16 + last_failed_step: suspend + suspend +Field success means the success number of suspend to RAM, and field fail means +the failure number. Others are the failure number of different steps of suspend +to RAM. suspend_stats just lists the last 2 failed devices, error number and +failed step of suspend. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8f88893c05f2f677f18f2ce5591b4bed5d4a7535 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2011 17:38:50 +0200 Subject: PM: Update the policy on default wakeup settings This patch (as1485) documents a change to the kernel's default wakeup policy. Devices that forward wakeup requests between buses should be enabled for wakeup by default. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/devices.txt | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index 3384d5996be..29b7a9817f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -152,7 +152,9 @@ try to use its wakeup mechanism. device_set_wakeup_enable() affects this flag; for the most part drivers should not change its value. The initial value of should_wakeup is supposed to be false for the majority of devices; the major exceptions are power buttons, keyboards, and Ethernet adapters whose WoL -(wake-on-LAN) feature has been set up with ethtool. +(wake-on-LAN) feature has been set up with ethtool. It should also default +to true for devices that don't generate wakeup requests on their own but merely +forward wakeup requests from one bus to another (like PCI bridges). Whether or not a device is capable of issuing wakeup events is a hardware matter, and the kernel is responsible for keeping track of it. By contrast, -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2aede851ddf08666f68ffc17be446420e9d2a056 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Rafael J. Wysocki" Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2011 20:32:27 +0200 Subject: PM / Hibernate: Freeze kernel threads after preallocating memory There is a problem with the current ordering of hibernate code which leads to deadlocks in some filesystems' memory shrinkers. Namely, some filesystems use freezable kernel threads that are inactive when the hibernate memory preallocation is carried out. Those same filesystems use memory shrinkers that may be triggered by the hibernate memory preallocation. If those memory shrinkers wait for the frozen kernel threads, the hibernate process deadlocks (this happens with XFS, for one example). Apparently, it is not technically viable to redesign the filesystems in question to avoid the situation described above, so the only possible solution of this issue is to defer the freezing of kernel threads until the hibernate memory preallocation is done, which is implemented by this change. Unfortunately, this requires the memory preallocation to be done before the "prepare" stage of device freeze, so after this change the only way drivers can allocate additional memory for their freeze routines in a clean way is to use PM notifiers. Reported-by: Christoph Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/devices.txt | 4 ---- 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index 29b7a9817f5..646a89e0c07 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -281,10 +281,6 @@ When the system goes into the standby or memory sleep state, the phases are: time.) Unlike the other suspend-related phases, during the prepare phase the device tree is traversed top-down. - In addition to that, if device drivers need to allocate additional - memory to be able to hadle device suspend correctly, that should be - done in the prepare phase. - After the prepare callback method returns, no new children may be registered below the device. The method may also prepare the device or driver in some way for the upcoming system power transition (for -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6f8d7022a842809aeb24db1d15669198ef02c131 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Barry Song Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2011 20:34:46 +0200 Subject: PM / Hibernate: Add resumewait param to support MMC-like devices as resume file Some devices like MMC are async detected very slow. For example, drivers/mmc/host/sdhci.c launches a 200ms delayed work to detect MMC partitions then add disk. We have wait_for_device_probe() and scsi_complete_async_scans() before calling swsusp_check(), but it is not enough to wait for MMC. This patch adds resumewait kernel param just like rootwait so that we have enough time to wait until MMC is ready. The difference is that we wait for resume partition whereas rootwait waits for rootfs partition (which may be on a different device). This patch will make hibernation support many embedded products without SCSI devices, but with devices like MMC. [rjw: Modified the changelog slightly.] Signed-off-by: Barry Song Reviewed-by: Valdis Kletnieks Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 854ed5ca7e3..88a7b197a4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2240,6 +2240,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. in units (needed only for swap files). See Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt + resumewait [HIBERNATION] Wait (indefinitely) for resume device to show up. + Useful for devices that are detected asynchronously + (e.g. USB and MMC devices). + hibernate= [HIBERNATION] noresume Don't check if there's a hibernation image present during boot. -- cgit v1.2.3 From f126f7334f72e2fd1b7a62bba20c488b86e6e7c4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Barry Song Date: Mon, 10 Oct 2011 23:38:41 +0200 Subject: PM / Hibernate: Add resumedelay kernel param in addition to resumewait Patch "PM / Hibernate: Add resumewait param to support MMC-like devices as resume file" added the resumewait kernel command line option. The present patch adds resumedelay so that resumewait/delay were analogous to rootwait/delay. [rjw: Modified the subject and changelog slightly.] Signed-off-by: Barry Song Acked-by: Pavel Machek Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 88a7b197a4e..831bde222bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2240,6 +2240,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. in units (needed only for swap files). See Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt + resumedelay= [HIBERNATION] Delay (in seconds) to pause before attempting to + read the resume files + resumewait [HIBERNATION] Wait (indefinitely) for resume device to show up. Useful for devices that are detected asynchronously (e.g. USB and MMC devices). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8c369264b6de3b2ab796f330a4d85770a6b8b033 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rob Herring Date: Wed, 3 Aug 2011 18:12:05 +0100 Subject: ARM: 7009/1: l2x0: Add OF based initialization This adds probing for ARM L2x0 cache controllers via device tree. Support includes the L210, L220, and PL310 controllers. The binding allows setting up cache RAM latencies and filter addresses (PL310 only). Signed-off-by: Rob Herring Acked-by: Grant Likely Acked-by: Arnd Bergmann Acked-by: Olof Johansson Acked-by: Barry Song <21cnbao@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Russell King --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt | 42 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 42 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f50e021a099 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +* ARM L2 Cache Controller + +ARM cores often have a separate level 2 cache controller. There are various +implementations of the L2 cache controller with compatible programming models. +The ARM L2 cache representation in the device tree should be done as follows: + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be one of: + "arm,pl310-cache" + "arm,l220-cache" + "arm,l210-cache" +- cache-unified : Specifies the cache is a unified cache. +- cache-level : Should be set to 2 for a level 2 cache. +- reg : Physical base address and size of cache controller's memory mapped + registers. + +Optional properties: + +- arm,data-latency : Cycles of latency for Data RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of + read, write and setup latencies. Minimum valid values are 1. Controllers + without setup latency control should use a value of 0. +- arm,tag-latency : Cycles of latency for Tag RAM accesses. Specifies 3 cells of + read, write and setup latencies. Controllers without setup latency control + should use 0. Controllers without separate read and write Tag RAM latency + values should only use the first cell. +- arm,dirty-latency : Cycles of latency for Dirty RAMs. This is a single cell. +- arm,filter-ranges : Starting address and length of window to + filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other + addresses will go to the M0 port. + +Example: + +L2: cache-controller { + compatible = "arm,pl310-cache"; + reg = <0xfff12000 0x1000>; + arm,data-latency = <1 1 1>; + arm,tag-latency = <2 2 2>; + arm,filter-latency = <0x80000000 0x8000000>; + cache-unified; + cache-level = <2>; +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8d4e652d1b2539196efaef051956fa29e22e9c10 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Rutland Date: Wed, 17 Aug 2011 18:03:17 +0100 Subject: ARM: 7023/1: L2x0: Add interrupts property to OF binding Following the discussion here: http://lists.ozlabs.org/pipermail/devicetree-discuss/2011-August/007301.html The L2x0 L2 Cache Controllers support a combined interrupt line which can be used for several events (e.g. read/write/parity errors on tag/data RAM, event counter increment/overflow). Unfortunately the OF binding added in c519ecf2 ("ARM: 7009/1: l2x0: Add OF based initialization") does not represent the interrupt. This patch adds an "interrupts" property to the L2x0 OF binding, representing the combined interrupt line. Signed-off-by: Mark Rutland Acked-by: Rob Herring Acked-by: Will Deacon Cc: Grant Likely Cc: Arnd Bergmann Cc: Olof Johansson Cc: Barry Song <21cnbao@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Russell King --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt index f50e021a099..7ca52161e7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/l2cc.txt @@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ Optional properties: - arm,filter-ranges : Starting address and length of window to filter. Addresses in the filter window are directed to the M1 port. Other addresses will go to the M0 port. +- interrupts : 1 combined interrupt. Example: @@ -39,4 +40,5 @@ L2: cache-controller { arm,filter-latency = <0x80000000 0x8000000>; cache-unified; cache-level = <2>; + interrupts = <45>; }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 73d2b4cdfc09a7a858b3ea1f32f6218b21439b96 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2011 08:42:16 +0800 Subject: arm/mx5: add device tree support for imx53 boards It adds device tree support for imx53 boards. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo Acked-by: Grant Likely Acked-by: Sascha Hauer Signed-off-by: Sascha Hauer --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt | 15 +++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d1e8d6f797e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +i.MX53 Automotive Reference Design Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-ard", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX53 Evaluation Kit +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-evk", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX53 Quick Start Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-qsb", "fsl,imx53"; + +i.MX53 Smart Mobile Reference Design Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx53-smd", "fsl,imx53"; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9daaf31a8cc9c98751b7b71198307e47d5bf6a4d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2011 08:42:17 +0800 Subject: arm/mx5: add device tree support for imx51 babbage It adds device tree support for imx51 babbage board. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo Acked-by: Grant Likely Acked-by: Sascha Hauer Signed-off-by: Sascha Hauer --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt index d1e8d6f797e..e2401cd632a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt @@ -1,3 +1,7 @@ +i.MX51 Babbage Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx51-babbage", "fsl,imx51"; + i.MX53 Automotive Reference Design Board Required root node properties: - compatible = "fsl,imx53-ard", "fsl,imx53"; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 27a90700a4275c5178b883b65927affdafa5185c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kai Jiang Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2011 20:50:20 +0200 Subject: uio: Support physical addresses >32 bits on 32-bit systems To support >32-bit physical addresses for UIO_MEM_PHYS type we need to extend the width of 'addr' in struct uio_mem. Numerous platforms like embedded PPC, ARM, and X86 have support for systems with larger physical address than logical. Since 'addr' may contain a physical, logical, or virtual address the easiest solution is to just change the type to 'phys_addr_t' which should always be greater than or equal to the sizeof(void *) such that it can properly hold any of the address types. For physical address we can support up to a 44-bit physical address on a typical 32-bit system as we utilize remap_pfn_range() for the mapping of the memory region and pfn's are represnted by shifting the address by the page size (typically 4k). Signed-off-by: Kai Jiang Signed-off-by: Minghuan Lian Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala Signed-off-by: Hans J. Koch Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 7c4b514d62b..54883de5d5f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ memory (e.g. allocated with kmalloc()). There's also -unsigned long addr: Required if the mapping is used. +phys_addr_t addr: Required if the mapping is used. Fill in the address of your memory block. This address is the one that appears in sysfs. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5fa224295f0e0358c8bc0e5390702338df889def Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Josh Boyer Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2011 21:16:39 -0400 Subject: Update email address for stable patch submission The stable@kernel.org email address has been replaced with the stable@vger.kernel.org mailing list. Change the stable kernel rules to reference the new list instead of the semi-defunct email alias. CC: CC: Signed-off-by: Josh Boyer Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt index e213f45cf9d..21fd05c28e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt @@ -24,10 +24,10 @@ Rules on what kind of patches are accepted, and which ones are not, into the Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree: - Send the patch, after verifying that it follows the above rules, to - stable@kernel.org. You must note the upstream commit ID in the changelog - of your submission. + stable@vger.kernel.org. You must note the upstream commit ID in the + changelog of your submission. - To have the patch automatically included in the stable tree, add the tag - Cc: stable@kernel.org + Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org in the sign-off area. Once the patch is merged it will be applied to the stable tree without anything else needing to be done by the author or subsystem maintainer. @@ -35,10 +35,10 @@ Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree: cherry-picked than this can be specified in the following format in the sign-off area: - Cc: # .32.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle - Cc: # .32.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle - Cc: # .32.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic - Cc: # .32.x + Cc: # .32.x: a1f84a3: sched: Check for idle + Cc: # .32.x: 1b9508f: sched: Rate-limit newidle + Cc: # .32.x: fd21073: sched: Fix affinity logic + Cc: # .32.x Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar The tag sequence has the meaning of: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0331bbf3c6fd9997e5f0d165840229ccfeba6548 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nicolas Ferre Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2011 18:06:56 +0200 Subject: tty/serial: RS485 bindings for device tree Generic bindings for RS485 feature included in some UARTs. Those bindings have to be used withing an UART device tree node. Documentation updated to link to the bindings definition. Signed-off-by: Nicolas Ferre Acked-by: Grant Likely Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt | 31 ++++++++++++++++++++++ .../devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt | 27 +++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt | 5 ++++ 3 files changed, 63 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1e753c69fc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +* RS485 serial communications + +The RTS signal is capable of automatically controlling line direction for +the built-in half-duplex mode. +The properties described hereafter shall be given to a half-duplex capable +UART node. + +Required properties: +- rs485-rts-delay: prop-encoded-array where: + * a is the delay beteween rts signal and beginning of data sent in milliseconds. + it corresponds to the delay before sending data. + * b is the delay between end of data sent and rts signal in milliseconds + it corresponds to the delay after sending data and actual release of the line. + +Optional properties: +- linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time: empty property telling to enable the rs485 + feature at boot time. It can be disabled later with proper ioctl. +- rs485-rx-during-tx: empty property that enables the receiving of data even + whilst sending data. + +RS485 example for Atmel USART: + usart0: serial@fff8c000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart"; + reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <7>; + atmel,use-dma-rx; + atmel,use-dma-tx; + linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time; + rs485-rts-delay = <0 200>; // in milliseconds + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a49d9a1d4cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/tty/serial/atmel-usart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +* Atmel Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (USART) + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "atmel,-usart" + The compatible indicated will be the first SoC to support an + additional mode or an USART new feature. +- reg: Should contain registers location and length +- interrupts: Should contain interrupt + +Optional properties: +- atmel,use-dma-rx: use of PDC or DMA for receiving data +- atmel,use-dma-tx: use of PDC or DMA for transmitting data + + compatible description: +- at91rm9200: legacy USART support +- at91sam9260: generic USART implementation for SAM9 SoCs + +Example: + + usart0: serial@fff8c000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-usart"; + reg = <0xfff8c000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <7>; + atmel,use-dma-rx; + atmel,use-dma-tx; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt index c8878f821d1..079cb3df62c 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -28,6 +28,10 @@ RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485 parameters in the platform data and in ioctls. + The device tree can also provide RS485 boot time parameters (see [2] + for bindings). The driver is in charge of filling this data structure from + the values given by the device tree. + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should provide at least the following ioctls: @@ -121,3 +125,4 @@ 5. REFERENCES [1] include/linux/serial.h + [2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt -- cgit v1.2.3 From 51e3137b9b6113c7e12cf0a0dc82238854a86712 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Giuseppe CAVALLARO Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2011 00:01:20 +0000 Subject: stmmac: update the driver version and doc (V4) Signed-off-by: Giuseppe Cavallaro Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt | 11 ++++++++++- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 40ec92ce4c8..8d67980fabe 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -76,7 +76,16 @@ core. 4.5) DMA descriptors Driver handles both normal and enhanced descriptors. The latter has been only -tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a. +tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and later. + +STMMAC supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) +and linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two +data buffer pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data +buffer pointer. RING mode is the default. + +In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in +the list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, +whereas such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode. 4.6) Ethtool support Ethtool is supported. Driver statistics and internal errors can be taken using: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7fef9fc83fbd7293ea9fe665d14046422ebf4219 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Srivatsa S. Bhat" Date: Wed, 19 Oct 2011 23:59:05 +0200 Subject: PM / Documentation: Update docs about suspend and CPU hotplug Update the documentation about the interaction between the suspend (S3) call path and the CPU hotplug infrastructure. This patch focusses only on the activities of the freezer, cpu hotplug and the notifications involved. It outlines how regular CPU hotplug differs from the way it is invoked during suspend and also tries to explain the locking involved. In addition to that, it discusses the issue of microcode update during CPU hotplug operations. Signed-off-by: Srivatsa S. Bhat Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/00-INDEX | 2 + Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt | 275 +++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 277 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX index 45e9d4a9128..a4d682f5423 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX @@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ s2ram.txt - How to get suspend to ram working (and debug it when it isn't) states.txt - System power management states +suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt + - Explains the interaction between Suspend-to-RAM (S3) and CPU hotplug swsusp-and-swap-files.txt - Using swap files with software suspend (to disk) swsusp-dmcrypt.txt diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f28f9a6f034 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ +Interaction of Suspend code (S3) with the CPU hotplug infrastructure + + (C) 2011 Srivatsa S. Bhat + + +I. How does the regular CPU hotplug code differ from how the Suspend-to-RAM + infrastructure uses it internally? And where do they share common code? + +Well, a picture is worth a thousand words... So ASCII art follows :-) + +[This depicts the current design in the kernel, and focusses only on the +interactions involving the freezer and CPU hotplug and also tries to explain +the locking involved. It outlines the notifications involved as well. +But please note that here, only the call paths are illustrated, with the aim +of describing where they take different paths and where they share code. +What happens when regular CPU hotplug and Suspend-to-RAM race with each other +is not depicted here.] + +On a high level, the suspend-resume cycle goes like this: + +|Freeze| -> |Disable nonboot| -> |Do suspend| -> |Enable nonboot| -> |Thaw | +|tasks | | cpus | | | | cpus | |tasks| + + +More details follow: + + Suspend call path + ----------------- + + Write 'mem' to + /sys/power/state + syfs file + | + v + Acquire pm_mutex lock + | + v + Send PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE + notifications + | + v + Freeze tasks + | + | + v + disable_nonboot_cpus() + /* start */ + | + v + Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock + | + v + Iterate over CURRENTLY + online CPUs + | + | + | ---------- + v | L + ======> _cpu_down() | + | [This takes cpuhotplug.lock | + Common | before taking down the CPU | + code | and releases it when done] | O + | While it is at it, notifications | + | are sent when notable events occur, | + ======> by running all registered callbacks. | + | | O + | | + | | + v | + Note down these cpus in | P + frozen_cpus mask ---------- + | + v + Disable regular cpu hotplug + by setting cpu_hotplug_disabled=1 + | + v + Release cpu_add_remove_lock + | + v + /* disable_nonboot_cpus() complete */ + | + v + Do suspend + + + +Resuming back is likewise, with the counterparts being (in the order of +execution during resume): +* enable_nonboot_cpus() which involves: + | Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock + | Reset cpu_hotplug_disabled to 0, thereby enabling regular cpu hotplug + | Call _cpu_up() [for all those cpus in the frozen_cpus mask, in a loop] + | Release cpu_add_remove_lock + v + +* thaw tasks +* send PM_POST_SUSPEND notifications +* Release pm_mutex lock. + + +It is to be noted here that the pm_mutex lock is acquired at the very +beginning, when we are just starting out to suspend, and then released only +after the entire cycle is complete (i.e., suspend + resume). + + + + Regular CPU hotplug call path + ----------------------------- + + Write 0 (or 1) to + /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/online + sysfs file + | + | + v + cpu_down() + | + v + Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock + | + v + If cpu_hotplug_disabled is 1 + return gracefully + | + | + v + ======> _cpu_down() + | [This takes cpuhotplug.lock + Common | before taking down the CPU + code | and releases it when done] + | While it is at it, notifications + | are sent when notable events occur, + ======> by running all registered callbacks. + | + | + v + Release cpu_add_remove_lock + [That's it!, for + regular CPU hotplug] + + + +So, as can be seen from the two diagrams (the parts marked as "Common code"), +regular CPU hotplug and the suspend code path converge at the _cpu_down() and +_cpu_up() functions. They differ in the arguments passed to these functions, +in that during regular CPU hotplug, 0 is passed for the 'tasks_frozen' +argument. But during suspend, since the tasks are already frozen by the time +the non-boot CPUs are offlined or onlined, the _cpu_*() functions are called +with the 'tasks_frozen' argument set to 1. +[See below for some known issues regarding this.] + + +Important files and functions/entry points: +------------------------------------------ + +kernel/power/process.c : freeze_processes(), thaw_processes() +kernel/power/suspend.c : suspend_prepare(), suspend_enter(), suspend_finish() +kernel/cpu.c: cpu_[up|down](), _cpu_[up|down](), [disable|enable]_nonboot_cpus() + + + +II. What are the issues involved in CPU hotplug? + ------------------------------------------- + +There are some interesting situations involving CPU hotplug and microcode +update on the CPUs, as discussed below: + +[Please bear in mind that the kernel requests the microcode images from +userspace, using the request_firmware() function defined in +drivers/base/firmware_class.c] + + +a. When all the CPUs are identical: + + This is the most common situation and it is quite straightforward: we want + to apply the same microcode revision to each of the CPUs. + To give an example of x86, the collect_cpu_info() function defined in + arch/x86/kernel/microcode_core.c helps in discovering the type of the CPU + and thereby in applying the correct microcode revision to it. + But note that the kernel does not maintain a common microcode image for the + all CPUs, in order to handle case 'b' described below. + + +b. When some of the CPUs are different than the rest: + + In this case since we probably need to apply different microcode revisions + to different CPUs, the kernel maintains a copy of the correct microcode + image for each CPU (after appropriate CPU type/model discovery using + functions such as collect_cpu_info()). + + +c. When a CPU is physically hot-unplugged and a new (and possibly different + type of) CPU is hot-plugged into the system: + + In the current design of the kernel, whenever a CPU is taken offline during + a regular CPU hotplug operation, upon receiving the CPU_DEAD notification + (which is sent by the CPU hotplug code), the microcode update driver's + callback for that event reacts by freeing the kernel's copy of the + microcode image for that CPU. + + Hence, when a new CPU is brought online, since the kernel finds that it + doesn't have the microcode image, it does the CPU type/model discovery + afresh and then requests the userspace for the appropriate microcode image + for that CPU, which is subsequently applied. + + For example, in x86, the mc_cpu_callback() function (which is the microcode + update driver's callback registered for CPU hotplug events) calls + microcode_update_cpu() which would call microcode_init_cpu() in this case, + instead of microcode_resume_cpu() when it finds that the kernel doesn't + have a valid microcode image. This ensures that the CPU type/model + discovery is performed and the right microcode is applied to the CPU after + getting it from userspace. + + +d. Handling microcode update during suspend/hibernate: + + Strictly speaking, during a CPU hotplug operation which does not involve + physically removing or inserting CPUs, the CPUs are not actually powered + off during a CPU offline. They are just put to the lowest C-states possible. + Hence, in such a case, it is not really necessary to re-apply microcode + when the CPUs are brought back online, since they wouldn't have lost the + image during the CPU offline operation. + + This is the usual scenario encountered during a resume after a suspend. + However, in the case of hibernation, since all the CPUs are completely + powered off, during restore it becomes necessary to apply the microcode + images to all the CPUs. + + [Note that we don't expect someone to physically pull out nodes and insert + nodes with a different type of CPUs in-between a suspend-resume or a + hibernate/restore cycle.] + + In the current design of the kernel however, during a CPU offline operation + as part of the suspend/hibernate cycle (the CPU_DEAD_FROZEN notification), + the existing copy of microcode image in the kernel is not freed up. + And during the CPU online operations (during resume/restore), since the + kernel finds that it already has copies of the microcode images for all the + CPUs, it just applies them to the CPUs, avoiding any re-discovery of CPU + type/model and the need for validating whether the microcode revisions are + right for the CPUs or not (due to the above assumption that physical CPU + hotplug will not be done in-between suspend/resume or hibernate/restore + cycles). + + +III. Are there any known problems when regular CPU hotplug and suspend race + with each other? + +Yes, they are listed below: + +1. When invoking regular CPU hotplug, the 'tasks_frozen' argument passed to + the _cpu_down() and _cpu_up() functions is *always* 0. + This might not reflect the true current state of the system, since the + tasks could have been frozen by an out-of-band event such as a suspend + operation in progress. Hence, it will lead to wrong notifications being + sent during the cpu online/offline events (eg, CPU_ONLINE notification + instead of CPU_ONLINE_FROZEN) which in turn will lead to execution of + inappropriate code by the callbacks registered for such CPU hotplug events. + +2. If a regular CPU hotplug stress test happens to race with the freezer due + to a suspend operation in progress at the same time, then we could hit the + situation described below: + + * A regular cpu online operation continues its journey from userspace + into the kernel, since the freezing has not yet begun. + * Then freezer gets to work and freezes userspace. + * If cpu online has not yet completed the microcode update stuff by now, + it will now start waiting on the frozen userspace in the + TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE state, in order to get the microcode image. + * Now the freezer continues and tries to freeze the remaining tasks. But + due to this wait mentioned above, the freezer won't be able to freeze + the cpu online hotplug task and hence freezing of tasks fails. + + As a result of this task freezing failure, the suspend operation gets + aborted. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 773e3206e6a8b4c81826dc76057a96ba3cc96672 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ike Panhc Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2011 02:32:52 +0800 Subject: ideapad: add debugfs support Add two nodes in debugfs which shows cfg value and its meaning, and status info read from VPC2004. Signed-off-by: Ike Panhc Signed-off-by: Matthew Garrett --- Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad | 19 +++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7079c0b2103 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/debugfs-ideapad @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/debug/ideapad/cfg +Date: Sep 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.2 +Contact: Ike Panhc +Description: + +cfg shows the return value of _CFG method in VPC2004 device. It tells machine +capability and what graphic component within the machine. + + +What: /sys/kernel/debug/ideapad/status +Date: Sep 2011 +KernelVersion: 3.2 +Contact: Ike Panhc +Description: + +status shows infos we can read and tells its meaning and value. + + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 349d594be45bdc7a86a08385f2f4f49d08ab68dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ike Panhc Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2011 02:33:00 +0800 Subject: ideapad: remove sysfs node for cfg Replaced by the one in debugfs. Signed-off-by: Ike Panhc Signed-off-by: Matthew Garrett --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop | 15 --------------- 1 file changed, 15 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop index ff53183c384..814b01354c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop @@ -5,19 +5,4 @@ Contact: "Ike Panhc " Description: Control the power of camera module. 1 means on, 0 means off. -What: /sys/devices/platform/ideapad/cfg -Date: Jun 2011 -KernelVersion: 3.1 -Contact: "Ike Panhc " -Description: - Ideapad capability bits. - Bit 8-10: 1 - Intel graphic only - 2 - ATI graphic only - 3 - Nvidia graphic only - 4 - Intel and ATI graphic - 5 - Intel and Nvidia graphic - Bit 16: Bluetooth exist (1 for exist) - Bit 17: 3G exist (1 for exist) - Bit 18: Wifi exist (1 for exist) - Bit 19: Camera exist (1 for exist) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 14211d026dad4641d4dffd7a4c520bcaa8fd4a65 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nicolae Mogoreanu Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2011 20:03:53 +0000 Subject: 9p: fix 9p.txt to advertise msize instead of maxdata 9p.txt advertises that maxdata mount option should be used to specify msize, in the code though we use msize option and completely ignore maxdata if passed Signed-off-by: Nicolae Mogoreanu Signed-off-by: Eric Van Hensbergen --- Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt index 13de64c7f0a..2c032144284 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ OPTIONS wfdno=n the file descriptor for writing with trans=fd - maxdata=n the number of bytes to use for 9p packet payload (msize) + msize=n the number of bytes to use for 9p packet payload port=n port to connect to on the remote server -- cgit v1.2.3 From c5e6763667ffc94eaad4634841cb1b7ecd951fb7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Tue, 2 Aug 2011 11:08:57 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus/adm1275) Add support for second current limit ADM1275 supports a second current limit, which can be configured as either lower or upper limit. Add support for it and report it as either lower or upper critical current limit. Also replace error return code EINVAL for unsupported pages with ENXIO as this is more appropriate for the observed condition. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Acked-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 index 097b3ccc4be..c438c98bdbc 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 @@ -60,5 +60,13 @@ curr1_label "iout1" curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. curr1_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_lcrit Critical minimum current. Depending on the chip + configuration, either curr1_lcrit or curr1_crit is + supported, but not both. +curr1_lcrit_alarm Critical current low alarm. +curr1_crit Critical maximum current. Depending on the chip + configuration, either curr1_lcrit or curr1_crit is + supported, but not both. +curr1_crit_alarm Critical current high alarm. curr1_highest Historical maximum current. curr1_reset_history Write any value to reset history. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5cf231a346fb80d7945aa46e90186a068a3a001b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Thu, 14 Jul 2011 11:55:35 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus/adm1275) Add support for ADM1276 ADM1276 is mostly compatible to ADM1275, with added support for input power measurement. Add support for it to the ADM1275 driver. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Acked-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 | 32 ++++++++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 index c438c98bdbc..ab70d96d2df 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 @@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'adm1275' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1275.pdf + * Analog Devices ADM1276 + Prefix: 'adm1276' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1276.pdf Author: Guenter Roeck @@ -13,13 +17,13 @@ Author: Guenter Roeck Description ----------- -This driver supports hardware montoring for Analog Devices ADM1275 Hot-Swap -Controller and Digital Power Monitor. +This driver supports hardware montoring for Analog Devices ADM1275 and ADM1276 +Hot-Swap Controller and Digital Power Monitor. -The ADM1275 is a hot-swap controller that allows a circuit board to be removed -from or inserted into a live backplane. It also features current and voltage -readback via an integrated 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC), accessed -using a PMBus. interface. +ADM1275 and ADM1276 are hot-swap controllers that allow a circuit board to be +removed from or inserted into a live backplane. They also feature current and +voltage readback via an integrated 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC), +accessed using a PMBus interface. The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. @@ -48,18 +52,18 @@ attributes are write-only, all other attributes are read-only. in1_label "vin1" or "vout1" depending on chip variant and configuration. -in1_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. -in1_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. -in1_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. -in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. -in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in1_input Measured voltage. +in1_min Minumum Voltage. +in1_max Maximum voltage. +in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. +in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. in1_highest Historical maximum voltage. in1_reset_history Write any value to reset history. curr1_label "iout1" -curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. -curr1_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. -curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_input Measured current. +curr1_max Maximum current. +curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. curr1_lcrit Critical minimum current. Depending on the chip configuration, either curr1_lcrit or curr1_crit is supported, but not both. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9d97e5c81e15afaef65d00f077f863c94f750839 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Donggeun Kim Date: Wed, 7 Sep 2011 18:49:08 +0900 Subject: hwmon: Add driver for EXYNOS4 TMU This patch allows to read temperature from TMU(Thermal Management Unit) of SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC. Signed-off-by: Donggeun Kim Signed-off-by: MyungJoo Ham Signed-off-by: Kyungmin Park Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck --- Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu | 81 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 81 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu b/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c3c6b41db60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/exynos4_tmu @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +Kernel driver exynos4_tmu +================= + +Supported chips: +* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC + Prefix: 'exynos4-tmu' + Datasheet: Not publicly available + +Authors: Donggeun Kim + +Description +----------- + +This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4 series of SoC. + +The chip only exposes the measured 8-bit temperature code value +through a register. +Temperature can be taken from the temperature code. +There are three equations converting from temperature to temperature code. + +The three equations are: + 1. Two point trimming + Tc = (T - 25) * (TI2 - TI1) / (85 - 25) + TI1 + + 2. One point trimming + Tc = T + TI1 - 25 + + 3. No trimming + Tc = T + 50 + + Tc: Temperature code, T: Temperature, + TI1: Trimming info for 25 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register) + Temperature code measured at 25 degree Celsius which is unchanged + TI2: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register) + Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged + +TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4 generates interrupt +when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels. +The maximum number of configurable threshold is four. +The threshold levels are defined as follows: + Level_0: current temperature > trigger_level_0 + threshold + Level_1: current temperature > trigger_level_1 + threshold + Level_2: current temperature > trigger_level_2 + threshold + Level_3: current temperature > trigger_level_3 + threshold + + The threshold and each trigger_level are set + through the corresponding registers. + +When an interrupt occurs, this driver notify user space of +one of four threshold levels for the interrupt +through kobject_uevent_env and sysfs_notify functions. +Although an interrupt condition for level_0 can be set, +it is not notified to user space through sysfs_notify function. + +Sysfs Interface +--------------- +name name of the temperature sensor + RO + +temp1_input temperature + RO + +temp1_max temperature for level_1 interrupt + RO + +temp1_crit temperature for level_2 interrupt + RO + +temp1_emergency temperature for level_3 interrupt + RO + +temp1_max_alarm alarm for level_1 interrupt + RO + +temp1_crit_alarm + alarm for level_2 interrupt + RO + +temp1_emergency_alarm + alarm for level_3 interrupt + RO -- cgit v1.2.3 From ced29d422557feb4230ea6b0067f1e24c5bd83f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Sat, 27 Aug 2011 11:42:30 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus) Provide more documentation Provide more documentation describing PMBus driver functionality and the API between the PMBus core driver and PMBus chip drivers. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Reviewed-by: Robert Coulson --- Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core | 283 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 283 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..31e4720fed1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus-core @@ -0,0 +1,283 @@ +PMBus core driver and internal API +================================== + +Introduction +============ + +[from pmbus.org] The Power Management Bus (PMBus) is an open standard +power-management protocol with a fully defined command language that facilitates +communication with power converters and other devices in a power system. The +protocol is implemented over the industry-standard SMBus serial interface and +enables programming, control, and real-time monitoring of compliant power +conversion products. This flexible and highly versatile standard allows for +communication between devices based on both analog and digital technologies, and +provides true interoperability which will reduce design complexity and shorten +time to market for power system designers. Pioneered by leading power supply and +semiconductor companies, this open power system standard is maintained and +promoted by the PMBus Implementers Forum (PMBus-IF), comprising 30+ adopters +with the objective to provide support to, and facilitate adoption among, users. + +Unfortunately, while PMBus commands are standardized, there are no mandatory +commands, and manufacturers can add as many non-standard commands as they like. +Also, different PMBUs devices act differently if non-supported commands are +executed. Some devices return an error, some devices return 0xff or 0xffff and +set a status error flag, and some devices may simply hang up. + +Despite all those difficulties, a generic PMBus device driver is still useful +and supported since kernel version 2.6.39. However, it was necessary to support +device specific extensions in addition to the core PMBus driver, since it is +simply unknown what new device specific functionality PMBus device developers +come up with next. + +To make device specific extensions as scalable as possible, and to avoid having +to modify the core PMBus driver repeatedly for new devices, the PMBus driver was +split into core, generic, and device specific code. The core code (in +pmbus_core.c) provides generic functionality. The generic code (in pmbus.c) +provides support for generic PMBus devices. Device specific code is responsible +for device specific initialization and, if needed, maps device specific +functionality into generic functionality. This is to some degree comparable +to PCI code, where generic code is augmented as needed with quirks for all kinds +of devices. + +PMBus device capabilities auto-detection +======================================== + +For generic PMBus devices, code in pmbus.c attempts to auto-detect all supported +PMBus commands. Auto-detection is somewhat limited, since there are simply too +many variables to consider. For example, it is almost impossible to autodetect +which PMBus commands are paged and which commands are replicated across all +pages (see the PMBus specification for details on multi-page PMBus devices). + +For this reason, it often makes sense to provide a device specific driver if not +all commands can be auto-detected. The data structures in this driver can be +used to inform the core driver about functionality supported by individual +chips. + +Some commands are always auto-detected. This applies to all limit commands +(lcrit, min, max, and crit attributes) as well as associated alarm attributes. +Limits and alarm attributes are auto-detected because there are simply too many +possible combinations to provide a manual configuration interface. + +PMBus internal API +================== + +The API between core and device specific PMBus code is defined in +drivers/hwmon/pmbus/pmbus.h. In addition to the internal API, pmbus.h defines +standard PMBus commands and virtual PMBus commands. + +Standard PMBus commands +----------------------- + +Standard PMBus commands (commands values 0x00 to 0xff) are defined in the PMBUs +specification. + +Virtual PMBus commands +---------------------- + +Virtual PMBus commands are provided to enable support for non-standard +functionality which has been implemented by several chip vendors and is thus +desirable to support. + +Virtual PMBus commands start with command value 0x100 and can thus easily be +distinguished from standard PMBus commands (which can not have values larger +than 0xff). Support for virtual PMBus commands is device specific and thus has +to be implemented in device specific code. + +Virtual commands are named PMBUS_VIRT_xxx and start with PMBUS_VIRT_BASE. All +virtual commands are word sized. + +There are currently two types of virtual commands. + +- READ commands are read-only; writes are either ignored or return an error. +- RESET commands are read/write. Reading reset registers returns zero + (used for detection), writing any value causes the associated history to be + reset. + +Virtual commands have to be handled in device specific driver code. Chip driver +code returns non-negative values if a virtual command is supported, or a +negative error code if not. The chip driver may return -ENODATA or any other +Linux error code in this case, though an error code other than -ENODATA is +handled more efficiently and thus preferred. Either case, the calling PMBus +core code will abort if the chip driver returns an error code when reading +or writing virtual registers (in other words, the PMBus core code will never +send a virtual command to a chip). + +PMBus driver information +------------------------ + +PMBus driver information, defined in struct pmbus_driver_info, is the main means +for device specific drivers to pass information to the core PMBus driver. +Specifically, it provides the following information. + +- For devices supporting its data in Direct Data Format, it provides coefficients + for converting register values into normalized data. This data is usually + provided by chip manufacturers in device datasheets. +- Supported chip functionality can be provided to the core driver. This may be + necessary for chips which react badly if non-supported commands are executed, + and/or to speed up device detection and initialization. +- Several function entry points are provided to support overriding and/or + augmenting generic command execution. This functionality can be used to map + non-standard PMBus commands to standard commands, or to augment standard + command return values with device specific information. + + API functions + ------------- + + Functions provided by chip driver + --------------------------------- + + All functions return the command return value (read) or zero (write) if + successful. A return value of -ENODATA indicates that there is no manufacturer + specific command, but that a standard PMBus command may exist. Any other + negative return value indicates that the commands does not exist for this + chip, and that no attempt should be made to read or write the standard + command. + + As mentioned above, an exception to this rule applies to virtual commands, + which _must_ be handled in driver specific code. See "Virtual PMBus Commands" + above for more details. + + Command execution in the core PMBus driver code is as follows. + + if (chip_access_function) { + status = chip_access_function(); + if (status != -ENODATA) + return status; + } + if (command >= PMBUS_VIRT_BASE) /* For word commands/registers only */ + return -EINVAL; + return generic_access(); + + Chip drivers may provide pointers to the following functions in struct + pmbus_driver_info. All functions are optional. + + int (*read_byte_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Read byte from page , register . + may be -1, which means "current page". + + int (*read_word_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Read word from page , register . + + int (*write_word_data)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg, + u16 word); + + Write word to page , register . + + int (*write_byte)(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 value); + + Write byte to page , register . + may be -1, which means "current page". + + int (*identify)(struct i2c_client *client, struct pmbus_driver_info *info); + + Determine supported PMBus functionality. This function is only necessary + if a chip driver supports multiple chips, and the chip functionality is not + pre-determined. It is currently only used by the generic pmbus driver + (pmbus.c). + + Functions exported by core driver + --------------------------------- + + Chip drivers are expected to use the following functions to read or write + PMBus registers. Chip drivers may also use direct I2C commands. If direct I2C + commands are used, the chip driver code must not directly modify the current + page, since the selected page is cached in the core driver and the core driver + will assume that it is selected. Using pmbus_set_page() to select a new page + is mandatory. + + int pmbus_set_page(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page); + + Set PMBus page register to for subsequent commands. + + int pmbus_read_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page, u8 reg); + + Read word data from , . Similar to i2c_smbus_read_word_data(), but + selects page first. + + int pmbus_write_word_data(struct i2c_client *client, u8 page, u8 reg, + u16 word); + + Write word data to , . Similar to i2c_smbus_write_word_data(), but + selects page first. + + int pmbus_read_byte_data(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 reg); + + Read byte data from , . Similar to i2c_smbus_read_byte_data(), but + selects page first. may be -1, which means "current page". + + int pmbus_write_byte(struct i2c_client *client, int page, u8 value); + + Write byte data to , . Similar to i2c_smbus_write_byte(), but + selects page first. may be -1, which means "current page". + + void pmbus_clear_faults(struct i2c_client *client); + + Execute PMBus "Clear Fault" command on all chip pages. + This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined. + Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function. + + bool pmbus_check_byte_register(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Check if byte register exists. Return true if the register exists, false + otherwise. + This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to + obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function. + + bool pmbus_check_word_register(struct i2c_client *client, int page, int reg); + + Check if word register exists. Return true if the register exists, false + otherwise. + This function calls the device specific write_byte function if defined to + obtain the chip status. Therefore, it must _not_ be called from that function. + + int pmbus_do_probe(struct i2c_client *client, const struct i2c_device_id *id, + struct pmbus_driver_info *info); + + Execute probe function. Similar to standard probe function for other drivers, + with the pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as additional argument. Calls + identify function if supported. Must only be called from device probe + function. + + void pmbus_do_remove(struct i2c_client *client); + + Execute driver remove function. Similar to standard driver remove function. + + const struct pmbus_driver_info + *pmbus_get_driver_info(struct i2c_client *client); + + Return pointer to struct pmbus_driver_info as passed to pmbus_do_probe(). + + +PMBus driver platform data +========================== + +PMBus platform data is defined in include/linux/i2c/pmbus.h. Platform data +currently only provides a flag field with a single bit used. + +#define PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK (1 << 0) + +struct pmbus_platform_data { + u32 flags; /* Device specific flags */ +}; + + +Flags +----- + +PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK + +During register detection, skip checking the status register for +communication or command errors. + +Some PMBus chips respond with valid data when trying to read an unsupported +register. For such chips, checking the status register is mandatory when +trying to determine if a chip register exists or not. +Other PMBus chips don't support the STATUS_CML register, or report +communication errors for no explicable reason. For such chips, checking the +status register must be disabled. + +Some i2c controllers do not support single-byte commands (write commands with +no data, i2c_smbus_write_byte()). With such controllers, clearing the status +register is impossible, and the PMBUS_SKIP_STATUS_CHECK flag must be set. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 200855e52db1b1834121ba57fbd89c5b4911e02c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Fri, 29 Jul 2011 22:21:53 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus) Add support for Intersil power management chips Add support for Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2004, ZL2006, ZL2008, ZL2105, ZL2106, ZL6100, and ZL6105. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Reviewed-by: Robert Coulson --- Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 | 125 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 125 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7617798b5c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/zl6100 @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +Kernel driver zl6100 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2004 + Prefix: 'zl2004' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6847.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2006 + Prefix: 'zl2006' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6850.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2008 + Prefix: 'zl2008' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6859.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2105 + Prefix: 'zl2105' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6851.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL2106 + Prefix: 'zl2106' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6852.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6100 + Prefix: 'zl6100' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6876.pdf + * Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6105 + Prefix: 'zl6105' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://www.intersil.com/data/fn/fn6906.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Intersil / Zilker Labs ZL6100 and +compatible digital DC-DC controllers. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus and Documentation.hwmon/pmbus-core for details +on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + +WARNING: Do not access chip registers using the i2cdump command, and do not use +any of the i2ctools commands on a command register used to save and restore +configuration data (0x11, 0x12, 0x15, 0x16, and 0xf4). The chips supported by +this driver interpret any access to those command registers (including read +commands) as request to execute the command in question. Unless write accesses +to those registers are protected, this may result in power loss, board resets, +and/or Flash corruption. Worst case, your board may turn into a brick. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Module parameters +----------------- + +delay +----- + +Some Intersil/Zilker Labs DC-DC controllers require a minimum interval between +I2C bus accesses. According to Intersil, the minimum interval is 2 ms, though +1 ms appears to be sufficient and has not caused any problems in testing. +The problem is known to affect ZL6100, ZL2105, and ZL2008. It is known not to +affect ZL2004 and ZL6105. The driver automatically sets the interval to 1 ms +except for ZL2004 and ZL6105. To enable manual override, the driver provides a +writeable module parameter, 'delay', which can be used to set the interval to +a value between 0 and 65,535 microseconds. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in1_label "vin" +in1_input Measured input voltage. +in1_min Minimum input voltage. +in1_max Maximum input voltage. +in1_lcrit Critical minumum input voltage. +in1_crit Critical maximum input voltage. +in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. +in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. +in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. +in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. + +in2_label "vout1" +in2_input Measured output voltage. +in2_lcrit Critical minumum output Voltage. +in2_crit Critical maximum output voltage. +in2_lcrit_alarm Critical output voltage critical low alarm. +in2_crit_alarm Critical output voltage critical high alarm. + +curr1_label "iout1" +curr1_input Measured output current. +curr1_lcrit Critical minimum output current. +curr1_crit Critical maximum output current. +curr1_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm. +curr1_crit_alarm Output current critical high alarm. + +temp[12]_input Measured temperature. +temp[12]_min Minimum temperature. +temp[12]_max Maximum temperature. +temp[12]_lcrit Critical low temperature. +temp[12]_crit Critical high temperature. +temp[12]_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. +temp[12]_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. +temp[12]_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. +temp[12]_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4f3a659581cabf1be441d6467b523be914615496 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonathan Cameron Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2011 12:50:04 -0400 Subject: hwmon: AD7314 driver (ported from IIO) Driver for AD7314, ADT7301, and ADT7302, ported from IIO. Currently dropped power down mode support. Signed-off-by: Jonathan Cameron [guenter.roeck@ericsson.com: Added MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE] Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck --- Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 | 25 +++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 b/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1912549c746 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ad7314 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Kernel driver ad7314 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices AD7314 + Prefix: 'ad7314' + Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website. + * Analog Devices ADT7301 + Prefix: 'adt7301' + Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website. + * Analog Devices ADT7302 + Prefix: 'adt7302' + Datasheet: Publicly available at Analog Devices website. + +Description +----------- + +Driver supports the above parts. The ad7314 has a 10 bit +sensor with 1lsb = 0.25 degrees centigrade. The adt7301 and +adt7302 have 14 bit sensors with 1lsb = 0.03125 degrees centigrade. + +Notes +----- + +Currently power down mode is not supported. -- cgit v1.2.3 From c3ff9a674c2313d4f28e38d384b18b561b313eb7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Fri, 2 Sep 2011 09:58:37 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus/ltc2978) Explicit driver for LTC2978 Provide explicit driver for LTC2978 to enable support for minimum and peak attributes. Remove ltc2978 chip id from generic pmbus driver. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Reviewed-by: Robert Coulson --- Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 | 78 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Documentation/hwmon/pmbus | 5 --- 2 files changed, 78 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..499129e1189 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +Kernel driver ltc2978 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Linear Technology LTC2978 + Prefix: 'ltc2978' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck + + +Description +----------- + +The LTC2978 is an octal power supply monitor, supervisor, sequencer and +margin controller. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate +devices explicitly. + +Example: the following commands will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address +0x60 on I2C bus #1: + +# modprobe ltc2978 +# echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + + +Sysfs attributes +---------------- + +in1_label "vin" +in1_input Measured input voltage. +in1_min Minimum input voltage. +in1_max Maximum input voltage. +in1_lcrit Critical minimum input voltage. +in1_crit Critical maximum input voltage. +in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. +in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. +in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. +in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. +in1_lowest Lowest input voltage. +in1_highest Highest input voltage. +in1_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset + history for all attributes. + +in[2-9]_label "vout[1-8]". +in[2-9]_input Measured output voltage. +in[2-9]_min Minimum output voltage. +in[2-9]_max Maximum output voltage. +in[2-9]_lcrit Critical minimum output voltage. +in[2-9]_crit Critical maximum output voltage. +in[2-9]_min_alarm Output voltage low alarm. +in[2-9]_max_alarm Output voltage high alarm. +in[2-9]_lcrit_alarm Output voltage critical low alarm. +in[2-9]_crit_alarm Output voltage critical high alarm. +in[2-9]_lowest Lowest output voltage. +in[2-9]_highest Lowest output voltage. +in[2-9]_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset + history for all attributes. + +temp1_input Measured temperature. +temp1_min Mimimum temperature. +temp1_max Maximum temperature. +temp1_lcrit Critical low temperature. +temp1_crit Critical high temperature. +temp1_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. +temp1_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. +temp1_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. +temp1_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. +temp1_lowest Lowest measured temperature. +temp1_highest Highest measured temperature. +temp1_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset + history for all attributes. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus index c36c1c1a62b..ce02f5d9a6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -8,11 +8,6 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146395 - * Linear Technology LTC2978 - Octal PMBus Power Supply Monitor and Controller - Prefix: 'ltc2978' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf * ON Semiconductor ADP4000, NCP4200, NCP4208 Prefixes: 'adp4000', 'ncp4200', 'ncp4208' Addresses scanned: - -- cgit v1.2.3 From ddfb41ca2a33c9f5053126324597510974724a1f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Sun, 11 Sep 2011 20:31:09 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus/ltc2978) Add support for LTC3880 to LTC2978 driver The LTC3880 PMBus command set is comparable to LTC2978. Add support for it to the LTC2978 driver. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Reviewed-by: Robert Coulson --- Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 | 57 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++------------- 1 file changed, 41 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 index 499129e1189..c365f9beb5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc2978 @@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'ltc2978' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf + * Linear Technology LTC3880 + Prefix: 'ltc3880' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/3880f.pdf Author: Guenter Roeck @@ -14,7 +18,8 @@ Description ----------- The LTC2978 is an octal power supply monitor, supervisor, sequencer and -margin controller. +margin controller. The LTC3880 is a dual, PolyPhase DC/DC synchronous +step-down switching regulator controller. Usage Notes @@ -43,12 +48,12 @@ in1_min_alarm Input voltage low alarm. in1_max_alarm Input voltage high alarm. in1_lcrit_alarm Input voltage critical low alarm. in1_crit_alarm Input voltage critical high alarm. -in1_lowest Lowest input voltage. +in1_lowest Lowest input voltage. LTC2978 only. in1_highest Highest input voltage. in1_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset history for all attributes. -in[2-9]_label "vout[1-8]". +in[2-9]_label "vout[1-8]". Channels 3 to 9 on LTC2978 only. in[2-9]_input Measured output voltage. in[2-9]_min Minimum output voltage. in[2-9]_max Maximum output voltage. @@ -58,21 +63,41 @@ in[2-9]_min_alarm Output voltage low alarm. in[2-9]_max_alarm Output voltage high alarm. in[2-9]_lcrit_alarm Output voltage critical low alarm. in[2-9]_crit_alarm Output voltage critical high alarm. -in[2-9]_lowest Lowest output voltage. +in[2-9]_lowest Lowest output voltage. LTC2978 only. in[2-9]_highest Lowest output voltage. in[2-9]_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset history for all attributes. -temp1_input Measured temperature. -temp1_min Mimimum temperature. -temp1_max Maximum temperature. -temp1_lcrit Critical low temperature. -temp1_crit Critical high temperature. -temp1_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. -temp1_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. -temp1_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. -temp1_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. -temp1_lowest Lowest measured temperature. -temp1_highest Highest measured temperature. -temp1_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset +temp[1-3]_input Measured temperature. + On LTC2978, only one temperature measurement is + supported and reflects the internal temperature. + On LTC3880, temp1 and temp2 report external + temperatures, and temp3 reports the internal + temperature. +temp[1-3]_min Mimimum temperature. +temp[1-3]_max Maximum temperature. +temp[1-3]_lcrit Critical low temperature. +temp[1-3]_crit Critical high temperature. +temp[1-3]_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. +temp[1-3]_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. +temp[1-3]_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. +temp[1-3]_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. +temp[1-3]_lowest Lowest measured temperature. LTC2978 only. +temp[1-3]_highest Highest measured temperature. +temp[1-3]_reset_history Reset history. Writing into this attribute will reset history for all attributes. + +power[1-2]_label "pout[1-2]". LTC3880 only. +power[1-2]_input Measured power. + +curr1_label "iin". LTC3880 only. +curr1_input Measured input current. +curr1_max Maximum input current. +curr1_max_alarm Input current high alarm. + +curr[2-3]_label "iout[1-2]". LTC3880 only. +curr[2-3]_input Measured input current. +curr[2-3]_max Maximum input current. +curr[2-3]_crit Critical input current. +curr[2-3]_max_alarm Input current high alarm. +curr[2-3]_crit_alarm Input current critical high alarm. -- cgit v1.2.3 From bc365a7f3c0d5b5b2a642e6646098b306b6faa4d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guenter Roeck Date: Thu, 15 Sep 2011 10:43:40 -0700 Subject: hwmon: (pmbus) Add support for Lineage Power DC-DC converters Add device IDs and reference to datasheets for Lineage Power DC-DC converters. Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck Reviewed-by: Robert Coulson --- Documentation/hwmon/pmbus | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus index ce02f5d9a6d..15ac911ce51 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -15,6 +15,14 @@ Supported chips: http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/ADP4000-D.PDF http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/NCP4200-D.PDF http://www.onsemi.com/pub_link/Collateral/JUNE%202009-%20REV.%200.PDF + * Lineage Power + Prefixes: 'pdt003', 'pdt006', 'pdt012', 'udt020' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheets: + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT003A0X.pdf + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT006A0X.pdf + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/PDT012A0X.pdf + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/UDT020A0X.pdf * Generic PMBus devices Prefix: 'pmbus' Addresses scanned: - -- cgit v1.2.3 From e96f9d89e6213c7630a3323cd0c754e7f2619564 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Hennerich Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2011 04:43:31 -0400 Subject: hwmon: (lm75) Add support for Analog Devices ADT75 Add datasheet reference and device ID for ADT75. The ADT75, like some other LM75 derivatives, needs to be instantiated using methods 1, 2, or 4. For more information see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices. Signed-off-by: Michael Hennerich Acked-by: Jonathan Cameron Acked-by: Jean Delvare Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck --- Documentation/hwmon/lm75 | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 index a1790401fdd..8d40d0fda10 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 @@ -32,6 +32,11 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website http://www.microchip.com/ + * Analog Devices ADT75 + Prefix: 'adt75' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website + http://www.analog.com/adt75 Author: Frodo Looijaard -- cgit v1.2.3 From 426343ef34fac426e619176c84cb2e263b9ed23d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2011 17:15:11 -0400 Subject: hwmon: (lm75) Document why clones are not detected Explain why clones of the LM75 are generally not detected by the driver, and why this isn't going to change. Also update the documentation to reflect the list of chip names currently supported by the driver. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Signed-off-by: Guenter Roeck --- Documentation/hwmon/lm75 | 58 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 34 insertions(+), 24 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 index 8d40d0fda10..c91a1d15fa2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 @@ -12,31 +12,46 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website http://www.national.com/ - * Dallas Semiconductor DS75 - Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f - Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website - http://www.maxim-ic.com/ - * Dallas Semiconductor DS1775 - Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + * Dallas Semiconductor DS75, DS1775 + Prefixes: 'ds75', 'ds1775' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website http://www.maxim-ic.com/ * Maxim MAX6625, MAX6626 - Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b + Prefixes: 'max6625', 'max6626' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/ * Microchip (TelCom) TCN75 Prefix: 'lm75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website + http://www.microchip.com/ + * Microchip MCP9800, MCP9801, MCP9802, MCP9803 + Prefix: 'mcp980x' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website http://www.microchip.com/ * Analog Devices ADT75 Prefix: 'adt75' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website http://www.analog.com/adt75 + * ST Microelectronics STDS75 + Prefix: 'stds75' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ST website + http://www.st.com/internet/analog/product/121769.jsp + * Texas Instruments TMP100, TMP101, TMP105, TMP75, TMP175, TMP275 + Prefixes: 'tmp100', 'tmp101', 'tmp105', 'tmp175', 'tmp75', 'tmp275' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp100 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp101 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp105 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp175 + http://www.ti.com/product/tmp275 Author: Frodo Looijaard @@ -55,21 +70,16 @@ range of -55 to +125 degrees. The LM75 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. -The LM75 is usually used in combination with LM78-like chips, to measure -the temperature of the processor(s). - -The DS75, DS1775, MAX6625, and MAX6626 are supported as well. -They are not distinguished from an LM75. While most of these chips -have three additional bits of accuracy (12 vs. 9 for the LM75), -the additional bits are not supported. Not only that, but these chips will -not be detected if not in 9-bit precision mode (use the force parameter if -needed). - -The TCN75 is supported as well, and is not distinguished from an LM75. +The original LM75 was typically used in combination with LM78-like chips +on PC motherboards, to measure the temperature of the processor(s). Clones +are now used in various embedded designs. The LM75 is essentially an industry standard; there may be other LM75 clones not listed here, with or without various enhancements, -that are supported. +that are supported. The clones are not detected by the driver, unless +they reproduce the exact register tricks of the original LM75, and must +therefore be instantiated explicitly. The specific enhancements (such as +higher resolution) are not currently supported by the driver. The LM77 is not supported, contrary to what we pretended for a long time. Both chips are simply not compatible, value encoding differs. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2b0fce8da2f5b6dc9661be540982416a9e2267f8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant Likely Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2011 11:09:14 +0200 Subject: Devicetree: Expand on ARM Primecell binding documentation Signed-off-by: Grant Likely --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt index 1d5d7a870ec..951ca46789d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/primecell.txt @@ -6,7 +6,9 @@ driver matching. Required properties: -- compatible : should be a specific value for peripheral and "arm,primecell" +- compatible : should be a specific name for the peripheral and + "arm,primecell". The specific name will match the ARM + engineering name for the logic block in the form: "arm,pl???" Optional properties: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 820bc19df20e1927054860513322742de5ebb6b3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexander Stein Date: Wed, 26 Oct 2011 09:58:45 +0200 Subject: ALSA: hda - Fix typo Signed-off-by: Alexander Stein Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index caa3ec655ea..03e2771ddee 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Also, the codec chip name can be rewritten via `[chip_name]` line. The hd-audio driver reads the file via request_firmware(). Thus, a patch file has to be located on the appropriate firmware path, typically, /lib/firmware. For example, when you pass the option -`patch=hda-init.fw`, the file /lib/firmware/hda-init-fw must be +`patch=hda-init.fw`, the file /lib/firmware/hda-init.fw must be present. The patch module option is specific to each card instance, and you -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1e4cb22bb5094def8eb5c3893f9dda2d517d29bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Per Forlin Date: Fri, 19 Aug 2011 14:52:38 +0200 Subject: fault-inject: add documentation on MMC IO fault injection Add description on how to enable random fault injection for MMC IO. Signed-off-by: Per Forlin Acked-by: Akinobu Mita Reviewed-by: Linus Walleij Signed-off-by: Chris Ball --- Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt | 8 +++++++- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt index 82a5d250d75..70f924ec1e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt @@ -21,6 +21,11 @@ o fail_make_request /sys/block//make-it-fail or /sys/block///make-it-fail. (generic_make_request()) +o fail_mmc_request + + injects MMC data errors on devices permitted by setting + debugfs entries under /sys/kernel/debug/mmc0/fail_mmc_request + Configure fault-injection capabilities behavior ----------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +120,8 @@ use the boot option: failslab= fail_page_alloc= - fail_make_request=,,, + fail_make_request= + fail_mmc_request=,,, How to add new fault injection capability ----------------------------------------- -- cgit v1.2.3 From 275173b225ae663e54d8dc5c93d79265aad19f89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant Likely Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2011 12:15:33 -0600 Subject: mmc: sdhci-tegra: Add Device Tree probing support Add hooks to read gpio configuration out of the device tree node. [grant.likely: Rewrite of original patch from John Bonesio] Signed-off-by: Grant Likely [swarren: Fixed tegra_sdhci_get_ro() to retrieve pdata correctly] [swarren: Reworked to avoid #ifdef CONFIG_OF] [swarren: Reworked binding based on fsl-imx-esdhc.txt] [swarren: Documented binding] Signed-off-by: Stephen Warren Signed-off-by: Chris Ball --- .../devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt | 25 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c87f6678272 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +* NVIDIA Tegra Secure Digital Host Controller + +This controller on Tegra family SoCs provides an interface for MMC, SD, +and SDIO types of memory cards. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "nvidia,-sdhci" +- reg : Should contain eSDHC registers location and length +- interrupts : Should contain eSDHC interrupt + +Optional properties: +- cd-gpios : Specify GPIOs for card detection +- wp-gpios : Specify GPIOs for write protection +- power-gpios : Specify GPIOs for power control + +Example: + +sdhci@c8000200 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-sdhci"; + reg = <0xc8000200 0x200>; + interrupts = <47>; + cd-gpios = <&gpio 69 0>; /* gpio PI5 */ + wp-gpios = <&gpio 57 0>; /* gpio PH1 */ + power-gpios = <&gpio 155 0>; /* gpio PT3 */ +}; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 55cd65e48b62c6f08edbb93d5cadf96e876ebcc2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stephen Warren Date: Tue, 30 Aug 2011 13:17:16 -0600 Subject: mmc: sdhci-tegra: Add 8-bit support to device tree binding. The previous patch which implemented a DT binding for sdhci-tegra did not allow all platform data fields to be initialized from DT. The following were missing: is_8bit: Implemented by this patch. pm_flags: Not implemented yet. There are no mainline users of this field. I'm not quite sure what it's for, and hence how to represent this in DT; the value ends up being assigned to host->mmc->pm_caps. While we're at it, fix the binding documentation to refer to "SD/MMC" instead of "eSDHC", since that's the correct name; "eSDHC" was cut/paste from the Freescale binding docs. Signed-off-by: Stephen Warren Signed-off-by: Chris Ball --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt | 6 ++++-- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt index c87f6678272..7e51154679a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/nvidia-sdhci.txt @@ -5,13 +5,14 @@ and SDIO types of memory cards. Required properties: - compatible : Should be "nvidia,-sdhci" -- reg : Should contain eSDHC registers location and length -- interrupts : Should contain eSDHC interrupt +- reg : Should contain SD/MMC registers location and length +- interrupts : Should contain SD/MMC interrupt Optional properties: - cd-gpios : Specify GPIOs for card detection - wp-gpios : Specify GPIOs for write protection - power-gpios : Specify GPIOs for power control +- support-8bit : Boolean, indicates if 8-bit mode should be used. Example: @@ -22,4 +23,5 @@ sdhci@c8000200 { cd-gpios = <&gpio 69 0>; /* gpio PI5 */ wp-gpios = <&gpio 57 0>; /* gpio PH1 */ power-gpios = <&gpio 155 0>; /* gpio PT3 */ + support-8bit; }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 199e3f4b419d045e64d5205a6354c5db04d98553 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Per Forlin Date: Tue, 13 Sep 2011 23:03:30 +0200 Subject: fault-injection: update documentation with the mmc module param Signed-off-by: Per Forlin Reviewed-by: Akinobu Mita Signed-off-by: Chris Ball --- Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt index 70f924ec1e5..ba4be8b7709 100644 --- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ use the boot option: failslab= fail_page_alloc= fail_make_request= - fail_mmc_request=,,, + mmc_core.fail_request=,,, How to add new fault injection capability ----------------------------------------- -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5a5f50802f5a31b9e15de8df40d5621af970a560 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Thomas Abraham Date: Tue, 13 Sep 2011 09:46:05 +0530 Subject: i2c-s3c2410: Add device tree support Add device tree probe support for Samsung's s3c2410 i2c driver. Cc: Ben Dooks Signed-off-by: Thomas Abraham Acked-by: Grant Likely Signed-off-by: Ben Dooks --- .../devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt | 39 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 39 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..38832c71291 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/samsung-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +* Samsung's I2C controller + +The Samsung's I2C controller is used to interface with I2C devices. + +Required properties: + - compatible: value should be either of the following. + (a) "samsung, s3c2410-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2410 i2c. + (b) "samsung, s3c2440-i2c", for i2c compatible with s3c2440 i2c. + - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. + - interrupts: interrupt number to the cpu. + - samsung,i2c-sda-delay: Delay (in ns) applied to data line (SDA) edges. + - gpios: The order of the gpios should be the following: . + The gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller. + +Optional properties: + - samsung,i2c-slave-addr: Slave address in multi-master enviroment. If not + specified, default value is 0. + - samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq: Desired frequency in Hz of the bus. If not + specified, the default value in Hz is 100000. + +Example: + + i2c@13870000 { + compatible = "samsung,s3c2440-i2c"; + reg = <0x13870000 0x100>; + interrupts = <345>; + samsung,i2c-sda-delay = <100>; + samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq = <100000>; + gpios = <&gpd1 2 0 /* SDA */ + &gpd1 3 0 /* SCL */>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + wm8994@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8994"; + reg = <0x1a>; + }; + }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 445b62dfd934394807c12aee06d3f20cf70c93b4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sritej Velaga Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2011 12:57:14 +0000 Subject: qlcnic: Updated License file Updated qlcnic's license file. Signed-off-by: Sritej Velaga Signed-off-by: Anirban Chakraborty Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic | 51 ++++----------------------------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 45 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic index 29ad4b10642..e7fb2c6023b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic @@ -1,61 +1,22 @@ -Copyright (c) 2009-2010 QLogic Corporation +Copyright (c) 2009-2011 QLogic Corporation QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver -This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be -distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). -You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file -under the following terms: - - 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), - must retain the above copyright notice, this list of - conditions and the following disclaimer. - - 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above - copyright notice, this list of conditions and the - following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other - materials provided with the distribution. - - 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to - endorse or promote products derived from this software - without specific prior written permission - -REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, -THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY -EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE -IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A -PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR -BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, -EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED -TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, -DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON -ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, -OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY -OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - -USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT -CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR -OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, -TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN -ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN -COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. - EXHIBIT A - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - Version 2, June 1991 + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - Preamble + Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public @@ -105,7 +66,7 @@ patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains @@ -304,7 +265,7 @@ make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - NO WARRANTY + NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN -- cgit v1.2.3 From 06a67848c6681a73e621e47c056490d51a07289f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonathan Cameron Date: Sun, 30 Oct 2011 13:47:25 +0100 Subject: i2c: Functions for byte-swapped smbus_write/read_word_data Reimplemented at least 17 times discounting error mangling cases where it could be used. Signed-off-by: Jonathan Cameron Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol index 7c19d1a2bea..49f5b680809 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol +++ b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol @@ -88,6 +88,10 @@ byte. But this time, the data is a complete word (16 bits). S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] S Addr Rd [A] [DataLow] A [DataHigh] NA P +Note the convenience function i2c_smbus_read_word_swapped is +available for reads where the two data bytes are the other way +around (not SMBus compliant, but very popular.) + SMBus Write Byte: i2c_smbus_write_byte_data() ============================================== @@ -108,6 +112,10 @@ specified through the Comm byte. S Addr Wr [A] Comm [A] DataLow [A] DataHigh [A] P +Note the convenience function i2c_smbus_write_word_swapped is +available for writes where the two data bytes are the other way +around (not SMBus compliant, but very popular.) + SMBus Process Call: i2c_smbus_process_call() ============================================= -- cgit v1.2.3 From d3bf37955d46718ee1a7f1fc69f953d2328ba7c2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Michael Holzheu Date: Sun, 30 Oct 2011 15:16:37 +0100 Subject: [S390] kdump: Add size to elfcorehdr kernel parameter Currently only the address of the pre-allocated ELF header is passed with the elfcorehdr= kernel parameter. In order to reserve memory for the header in the 2nd kernel also the size is required. Current kdump architecture backends use different methods to do that, e.g. x86 uses the memmap= kernel parameter. On s390 there is no easy way to transfer this information. Therefore the elfcorehdr kernel parameter is extended to also pass the size. This now can also be used as standard mechanism by all future kdump architecture backends. The syntax of the kernel parameter is extended as follows: elfcorehdr=[size[KMG]@]offset[KMG] This change is backward compatible because elfcorehdr=size is still allowed. Acked-by: Vivek Goyal Acked-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Michael Holzheu Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 93413ce9688..1fbe3625b2d 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -741,10 +741,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. See Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. - elfcorehdr= [IA-64,PPC,SH,X86] + elfcorehdr=[size[KMG]@]offset[KMG] [IA64,PPC,SH,X86,S390] Specifies physical address of start of kernel core - image elf header. Generally kexec loader will - pass this option to capture kernel. + image elf header and optionally the size. Generally + kexec loader will pass this option to capture kernel. See Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for details. enable_mtrr_cleanup [X86] -- cgit v1.2.3 From b3f7ed0324091e2cb23fe1b3c10570700f614014 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rob Herring Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2011 21:27:52 -0500 Subject: ARM: gic: add OF based initialization This adds ARM gic interrupt controller initialization using device tree data. The initialization function is intended to be called by of_irq_init function like this: const static struct of_device_id irq_match[] = { { .compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic", .data = gic_of_init, }, {} }; static void __init init_irqs(void) { of_irq_init(irq_match); } Signed-off-by: Rob Herring Reviewed-by: Jamie Iles Tested-by: Thomas Abraham Acked-by: Grant Likely --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt | 55 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 55 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..52916b4aa1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +* ARM Generic Interrupt Controller + +ARM SMP cores are often associated with a GIC, providing per processor +interrupts (PPI), shared processor interrupts (SPI) and software +generated interrupts (SGI). + +Primary GIC is attached directly to the CPU and typically has PPIs and SGIs. +Secondary GICs are cascaded into the upward interrupt controller and do not +have PPIs or SGIs. + +Main node required properties: + +- compatible : should be one of: + "arm,cortex-a9-gic" + "arm,arm11mp-gic" +- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The type shall be a and the value shall be 3. + + The 1st cell is the interrupt type; 0 for SPI interrupts, 1 for PPI + interrupts. + + The 2nd cell contains the interrupt number for the interrupt type. + SPI interrupts are in the range [0-987]. PPI interrupts are in the + range [0-15]. + + The 3rd cell is the flags, encoded as follows: + bits[3:0] trigger type and level flags. + 1 = low-to-high edge triggered + 2 = high-to-low edge triggered + 4 = active high level-sensitive + 8 = active low level-sensitive + bits[15:8] PPI interrupt cpu mask. Each bit corresponds to each of + the 8 possible cpus attached to the GIC. A bit set to '1' indicated + the interrupt is wired to that CPU. Only valid for PPI interrupts. + +- reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the GIC registers. The + first region is the GIC distributor register base and size. The 2nd region is + the GIC cpu interface register base and size. + +Optional +- interrupts : Interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. Only + present on secondary GICs. + +Example: + + intc: interrupt-controller@fff11000 { + compatible = "arm,cortex-a9-gic"; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + #address-cells = <1>; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0xfff11000 0x1000>, + <0xfff10100 0x100>; + }; + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 253d7addbcb06acc90eb722f122d32a6ccbf67a7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rob Herring Date: Wed, 10 Aug 2011 15:22:11 -0500 Subject: ARM: highbank: add devicetree source This adds the devicetree source and documentation for the Calxeda highbank platform. Signed-off-by: Rob Herring Reviewed-by: Jamie Iles Reviewed-by: Shawn Guo --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4755caaccba --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/calxeda.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +Calxeda Highbank Platforms Device Tree Bindings +----------------------------------------------- + +Boards with Calxeda Cortex-A9 based Highbank SOC shall have the following +properties. + +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "calxeda,highbank"; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7d740f87fd0741c00231a4b13074660d526d5630 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Shawn Guo Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2011 13:53:26 +0800 Subject: arm/imx6q: add device tree source It adds device tree source and documentation for imx6q platform. Signed-off-by: Shawn Guo --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..345bfc03656 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +Freescale i.MX Platforms Device Tree Bindings +----------------------------------------------- + +i.MX6 Quad SABRE Automotive Board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6q"; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3241b1d3e0aaafbfcd320f4d71ade629728cc4f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joe Thornber Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 20:19:11 +0000 Subject: dm: add persistent data library The persistent-data library offers a re-usable framework for the storage and management of on-disk metadata in device-mapper targets. It's used by the thin-provisioning target in the next patch and in an upcoming hierarchical storage target. For further information, please read Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt Signed-off-by: Joe Thornber Signed-off-by: Mike Snitzer Signed-off-by: Alasdair G Kergon --- Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt | 84 +++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 84 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0e5df9b04ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +Introduction +============ + +The more-sophisticated device-mapper targets require complex metadata +that is managed in kernel. In late 2010 we were seeing that various +different targets were rolling their own data strutures, for example: + +- Mikulas Patocka's multisnap implementation +- Heinz Mauelshagen's thin provisioning target +- Another btree-based caching target posted to dm-devel +- Another multi-snapshot target based on a design of Daniel Phillips + +Maintaining these data structures takes a lot of work, so if possible +we'd like to reduce the number. + +The persistent-data library is an attempt to provide a re-usable +framework for people who want to store metadata in device-mapper +targets. It's currently used by the thin-provisioning target and an +upcoming hierarchical storage target. + +Overview +======== + +The main documentation is in the header files which can all be found +under drivers/md/persistent-data. + +The block manager +----------------- + +dm-block-manager.[hc] + +This provides access to the data on disk in fixed sized-blocks. There +is a read/write locking interface to prevent concurrent accesses, and +keep data that is being used in the cache. + +Clients of persistent-data are unlikely to use this directly. + +The transaction manager +----------------------- + +dm-transaction-manager.[hc] + +This restricts access to blocks and enforces copy-on-write semantics. +The only way you can get hold of a writable block through the +transaction manager is by shadowing an existing block (ie. doing +copy-on-write) or allocating a fresh one. Shadowing is elided within +the same transaction so performance is reasonable. The commit method +ensures that all data is flushed before it writes the superblock. +On power failure your metadata will be as it was when last committed. + +The Space Maps +-------------- + +dm-space-map.h +dm-space-map-metadata.[hc] +dm-space-map-disk.[hc] + +On-disk data structures that keep track of reference counts of blocks. +Also acts as the allocator of new blocks. Currently two +implementations: a simpler one for managing blocks on a different +device (eg. thinly-provisioned data blocks); and one for managing +the metadata space. The latter is complicated by the need to store +its own data within the space it's managing. + +The data structures +------------------- + +dm-btree.[hc] +dm-btree-remove.c +dm-btree-spine.c +dm-btree-internal.h + +Currently there is only one data structure, a hierarchical btree. +There are plans to add more. For example, something with an +array-like interface would see a lot of use. + +The btree is 'hierarchical' in that you can define it to be composed +of nested btrees, and take multiple keys. For example, the +thin-provisioning target uses a btree with two levels of nesting. +The first maps a device id to a mapping tree, and that in turn maps a +virtual block to a physical block. + +Values stored in the btrees can have arbitrary size. Keys are always +64bits, although nesting allows you to use multiple keys. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 991d9fa02da0dd1f843dc011376965e0c8c6c9b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Joe Thornber Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 20:21:18 +0000 Subject: dm: add thin provisioning target Initial EXPERIMENTAL implementation of device-mapper thin provisioning with snapshot support. The 'thin' target is used to create instances of the virtual devices that are hosted in the 'thin-pool' target. The thin-pool target provides data sharing among devices. This sharing is made possible using the persistent-data library in the previous patch. The main highlight of this implementation, compared to the previous implementation of snapshots, is that it allows many virtual devices to be stored on the same data volume, simplifying administration and allowing sharing of data between volumes (thus reducing disk usage). Another big feature is support for arbitrary depth of recursive snapshots (snapshots of snapshots of snapshots ...). The previous implementation of snapshots did this by chaining together lookup tables, and so performance was O(depth). This new implementation uses a single data structure so we don't get this degradation with depth. For further information and examples of how to use this, please read Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt Signed-off-by: Joe Thornber Signed-off-by: Mike Snitzer Signed-off-by: Alasdair G Kergon --- Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt | 285 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 285 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..801d9d1cf82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +Introduction +============ + +This document descibes a collection of device-mapper targets that +between them implement thin-provisioning and snapshots. + +The main highlight of this implementation, compared to the previous +implementation of snapshots, is that it allows many virtual devices to +be stored on the same data volume. This simplifies administration and +allows the sharing of data between volumes, thus reducing disk usage. + +Another significant feature is support for an arbitrary depth of +recursive snapshots (snapshots of snapshots of snapshots ...). The +previous implementation of snapshots did this by chaining together +lookup tables, and so performance was O(depth). This new +implementation uses a single data structure to avoid this degradation +with depth. Fragmentation may still be an issue, however, in some +scenarios. + +Metadata is stored on a separate device from data, giving the +administrator some freedom, for example to: + +- Improve metadata resilience by storing metadata on a mirrored volume + but data on a non-mirrored one. + +- Improve performance by storing the metadata on SSD. + +Status +====== + +These targets are very much still in the EXPERIMENTAL state. Please +do not yet rely on them in production. But do experiment and offer us +feedback. Different use cases will have different performance +characteristics, for example due to fragmentation of the data volume. + +If you find this software is not performing as expected please mail +dm-devel@redhat.com with details and we'll try our best to improve +things for you. + +Userspace tools for checking and repairing the metadata are under +development. + +Cookbook +======== + +This section describes some quick recipes for using thin provisioning. +They use the dmsetup program to control the device-mapper driver +directly. End users will be advised to use a higher-level volume +manager such as LVM2 once support has been added. + +Pool device +----------- + +The pool device ties together the metadata volume and the data volume. +It maps I/O linearly to the data volume and updates the metadata via +two mechanisms: + +- Function calls from the thin targets + +- Device-mapper 'messages' from userspace which control the creation of new + virtual devices amongst other things. + +Setting up a fresh pool device +------------------------------ + +Setting up a pool device requires a valid metadata device, and a +data device. If you do not have an existing metadata device you can +make one by zeroing the first 4k to indicate empty metadata. + + dd if=/dev/zero of=$metadata_dev bs=4096 count=1 + +The amount of metadata you need will vary according to how many blocks +are shared between thin devices (i.e. through snapshots). If you have +less sharing than average you'll need a larger-than-average metadata device. + +As a guide, we suggest you calculate the number of bytes to use in the +metadata device as 48 * $data_dev_size / $data_block_size but round it up +to 2MB if the answer is smaller. The largest size supported is 16GB. + +If you're creating large numbers of snapshots which are recording large +amounts of change, you may need find you need to increase this. + +Reloading a pool table +---------------------- + +You may reload a pool's table, indeed this is how the pool is resized +if it runs out of space. (N.B. While specifying a different metadata +device when reloading is not forbidden at the moment, things will go +wrong if it does not route I/O to exactly the same on-disk location as +previously.) + +Using an existing pool device +----------------------------- + + dmsetup create pool \ + --table "0 20971520 thin-pool $metadata_dev $data_dev \ + $data_block_size $low_water_mark" + +$data_block_size gives the smallest unit of disk space that can be +allocated at a time expressed in units of 512-byte sectors. People +primarily interested in thin provisioning may want to use a value such +as 1024 (512KB). People doing lots of snapshotting may want a smaller value +such as 128 (64KB). If you are not zeroing newly-allocated data, +a larger $data_block_size in the region of 256000 (128MB) is suggested. +$data_block_size must be the same for the lifetime of the +metadata device. + +$low_water_mark is expressed in blocks of size $data_block_size. If +free space on the data device drops below this level then a dm event +will be triggered which a userspace daemon should catch allowing it to +extend the pool device. Only one such event will be sent. +Resuming a device with a new table itself triggers an event so the +userspace daemon can use this to detect a situation where a new table +already exceeds the threshold. + +Thin provisioning +----------------- + +i) Creating a new thinly-provisioned volume. + + To create a new thinly- provisioned volume you must send a message to an + active pool device, /dev/mapper/pool in this example. + + dmsetup message /dev/mapper/pool 0 "create_thin 0" + + Here '0' is an identifier for the volume, a 24-bit number. It's up + to the caller to allocate and manage these identifiers. If the + identifier is already in use, the message will fail with -EEXIST. + +ii) Using a thinly-provisioned volume. + + Thinly-provisioned volumes are activated using the 'thin' target: + + dmsetup create thin --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 0" + + The last parameter is the identifier for the thinp device. + +Internal snapshots +------------------ + +i) Creating an internal snapshot. + + Snapshots are created with another message to the pool. + + N.B. If the origin device that you wish to snapshot is active, you + must suspend it before creating the snapshot to avoid corruption. + This is NOT enforced at the moment, so please be careful! + + dmsetup suspend /dev/mapper/thin + dmsetup message /dev/mapper/pool 0 "create_snap 1 0" + dmsetup resume /dev/mapper/thin + + Here '1' is the identifier for the volume, a 24-bit number. '0' is the + identifier for the origin device. + +ii) Using an internal snapshot. + + Once created, the user doesn't have to worry about any connection + between the origin and the snapshot. Indeed the snapshot is no + different from any other thinly-provisioned device and can be + snapshotted itself via the same method. It's perfectly legal to + have only one of them active, and there's no ordering requirement on + activating or removing them both. (This differs from conventional + device-mapper snapshots.) + + Activate it exactly the same way as any other thinly-provisioned volume: + + dmsetup create snap --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 1" + +Deactivation +------------ + +All devices using a pool must be deactivated before the pool itself +can be. + + dmsetup remove thin + dmsetup remove snap + dmsetup remove pool + +Reference +========= + +'thin-pool' target +------------------ + +i) Constructor + + thin-pool \ + [ []*] + + Optional feature arguments: + - 'skip_block_zeroing': skips the zeroing of newly-provisioned blocks. + + Data block size must be between 64KB (128 sectors) and 1GB + (2097152 sectors) inclusive. + + +ii) Status + + / + / + + + transaction id: + A 64-bit number used by userspace to help synchronise with metadata + from volume managers. + + used data blocks / total data blocks + If the number of free blocks drops below the pool's low water mark a + dm event will be sent to userspace. This event is edge-triggered and + it will occur only once after each resume so volume manager writers + should register for the event and then check the target's status. + + held metadata root: + The location, in sectors, of the metadata root that has been + 'held' for userspace read access. '-' indicates there is no + held root. This feature is not yet implemented so '-' is + always returned. + +iii) Messages + + create_thin + + Create a new thinly-provisioned device. + is an arbitrary unique 24-bit identifier chosen by + the caller. + + create_snap + + Create a new snapshot of another thinly-provisioned device. + is an arbitrary unique 24-bit identifier chosen by + the caller. + is the identifier of the thinly-provisioned device + of which the new device will be a snapshot. + + delete + + Deletes a thin device. Irreversible. + + trim + + Delete mappings from the end of a thin device. Irreversible. + You might want to use this if you're reducing the size of + your thinly-provisioned device. In many cases, due to the + sharing of blocks between devices, it is not possible to + determine in advance how much space 'trim' will release. (In + future a userspace tool might be able to perform this + calculation.) + + set_transaction_id + + Userland volume managers, such as LVM, need a way to + synchronise their external metadata with the internal metadata of the + pool target. The thin-pool target offers to store an + arbitrary 64-bit transaction id and return it on the target's + status line. To avoid races you must provide what you think + the current transaction id is when you change it with this + compare-and-swap message. + +'thin' target +------------- + +i) Constructor + + thin + + pool dev: + the thin-pool device, e.g. /dev/mapper/my_pool or 253:0 + + dev id: + the internal device identifier of the device to be + activated. + +The pool doesn't store any size against the thin devices. If you +load a thin target that is smaller than you've been using previously, +then you'll have no access to blocks mapped beyond the end. If you +load a target that is bigger than before, then extra blocks will be +provisioned as and when needed. + +If you wish to reduce the size of your thin device and potentially +regain some space then send the 'trim' message to the pool. + +ii) Status + + -- cgit v1.2.3 From b89544575d0096735edc9b0ad187e635487905ad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonathan Brassow Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 20:21:22 +0000 Subject: dm log userspace: fix comment hyphens Fix comments: clustered-disk needs a hyphen not an underscore. Signed-off-by: Jonathan Brassow Signed-off-by: Alasdair G Kergon --- Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt index 994dd75475a..c155ac569c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ kernel and userspace, 'connector' is used as the interface for communication. There are currently two userspace log implementations that leverage this -framework - "clustered_disk" and "clustered_core". These implementations +framework - "clustered-disk" and "clustered-core". These implementations provide a cluster-coherent log for shared-storage. Device-mapper mirroring can be used in a shared-storage environment when the cluster log implementations are employed. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4356f21d09283dc6d39a6f7287a65ddab61e2808 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Minchan Kim Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 17:06:47 -0700 Subject: mm: change isolate mode from #define to bitwise type Change ISOLATE_XXX macro with bitwise isolate_mode_t type. Normally, macro isn't recommended as it's type-unsafe and making debugging harder as symbol cannot be passed throught to the debugger. Quote from Johannes " Hmm, it would probably be cleaner to fully convert the isolation mode into independent flags. INACTIVE, ACTIVE, BOTH is currently a tri-state among flags, which is a bit ugly." This patch moves isolate mode from swap.h to mmzone.h by memcontrol.h Signed-off-by: Minchan Kim Cc: Johannes Weiner Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: KOSAKI Motohiro Cc: Mel Gorman Cc: Rik van Riel Cc: Michal Hocko Cc: Andrea Arcangeli Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl index 12cecc83cd9..4a37c4759cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl +++ b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl @@ -379,10 +379,10 @@ EVENT_PROCESS: # To closer match vmstat scanning statistics, only count isolate_both # and isolate_inactive as scanning. isolate_active is rotation - # isolate_inactive == 0 - # isolate_active == 1 - # isolate_both == 2 - if ($isolate_mode != 1) { + # isolate_inactive == 1 + # isolate_active == 2 + # isolate_both == 3 + if ($isolate_mode != 2) { $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; } $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_CONTIG_DIRTY} += $nr_contig_dirty; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 73efc0394e148d0e15583e13712637831f926720 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dan Ballard Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 17:11:20 -0700 Subject: kernel/sysctl.c: add cap_last_cap to /proc/sys/kernel Userspace needs to know the highest valid capability of the running kernel, which right now cannot reliably be retrieved from the header files only. The fact that this value cannot be determined properly right now creates various problems for libraries compiled on newer header files which are run on older kernels. They assume capabilities are available which actually aren't. libcap-ng is one example. And we ran into the same problem with systemd too. Now the capability is exported in /proc/sys/kernel/cap_last_cap. [akpm@linux-foundation.org: make cap_last_cap const, per Ulrich] Signed-off-by: Dan Ballard Cc: Randy Dunlap Cc: Ingo Molnar Cc: Lennart Poettering Cc: Kay Sievers Cc: Ulrich Drepper Cc: James Morris Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 704e474a93d..1f2463671a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -24,6 +24,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - bootloader_type [ X86 only ] - bootloader_version [ X86 only ] - callhome [ S390 only ] +- cap_last_cap - core_pattern - core_pipe_limit - core_uses_pid @@ -155,6 +156,13 @@ on has a service contract with IBM. ============================================================== +cap_last_cap + +Highest valid capability of the running kernel. Exports +CAP_LAST_CAP from the kernel. + +============================================================== + core_pattern: core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0eca6b7c78fd997e02bd9850e608102382b7822e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yanmin Zhang Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 17:11:25 -0700 Subject: printk: add module parameter ignore_loglevel to control ignore_loglevel We are enabling some power features on medfield. To test suspend-2-RAM conveniently, we need turn on/off ignore_loglevel frequently without rebooting. Add a module parameter, so users can change it by: /sys/module/printk/parameters/ignore_loglevel Signed-off-by: Yanmin Zhang Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 27e0488d54d..106efe1e2ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -973,6 +973,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. ignore_loglevel [KNL] Ignore loglevel setting - this will print /all/ kernel messages to the console. Useful for debugging. + We also add it as printk module parameter, so users + could change it dynamically, usually by + /sys/module/printk/parameters/ignore_loglevel. ihash_entries= [KNL] Set number of hash buckets for inode cache. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 134620f7a865b3bc9e3d56d460603592b70ede21 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Yanmin Zhang Date: Mon, 31 Oct 2011 17:11:27 -0700 Subject: printk: add console_suspend module parameter We are enabling some power features on medfield. To test suspend-2-RAM conveniently, we need turn on/off console_suspend_enabled frequently. Add a module parameter, so users could change it by: /sys/module/printk/parameters/console_suspend Signed-off-by: Yanmin Zhang Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 106efe1e2ba..c2efe285396 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1669,6 +1669,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. debugging driver suspend/resume hooks). This may not work reliably with all consoles, but is known to work with serial and VGA consoles. + To facilitate more flexible debugging, we also add + console_suspend, a printk module parameter to control + it. Users could use console_suspend (usually + /sys/module/printk/parameters/console_suspend) to + turn on/off it dynamically. noaliencache [MM, NUMA, SLAB] Disables the allocation of alien caches in the slab allocator. Saves per-node memory, -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7e777dd43d55a78c41c3498afaf3ef7edf157120 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Simon Horman Date: Fri, 9 Sep 2011 17:07:43 +0900 Subject: ipvs: Add documentation for new sysctl entries Add missing documentation for conntrack, snat_reroute and sync_version. Also fix up a typo, IPVS_DEBUG should be IP_VS_DEBUG. Acked-by: Julian Anastasov Acked-by Hans Schillstrom Signed-off-by: Simon Horman Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso --- Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt | 52 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 51 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt index 4ccdbca0381..1dcdd49594c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt @@ -15,6 +15,23 @@ amemthresh - INTEGER enabled and the variable is automatically set to 2, otherwise the strategy is disabled and the variable is set to 1. +conntrack - BOOLEAN + 0 - disabled (default) + not 0 - enabled + + If set, maintain connection tracking entries for + connections handled by IPVS. + + This should be enabled if connections handled by IPVS are to be + also handled by stateful firewall rules. That is, iptables rules + that make use of connection tracking. It is a performance + optimisation to disable this setting otherwise. + + Connections handled by the IPVS FTP application module + will have connection tracking entries regardless of this setting. + + Only available when IPVS is compiled with the CONFIG_IP_VS_NFCT + cache_bypass - BOOLEAN 0 - disabled (default) not 0 - enabled @@ -39,7 +56,7 @@ debug_level - INTEGER 11 - IPVS packet handling (ip_vs_in/ip_vs_out) 12 or more - packet traversal - Only available when IPVS is compiled with the CONFIG_IPVS_DEBUG + Only available when IPVS is compiled with the CONFIG_IP_VS_DEBUG Higher debugging levels include the messages for lower debugging levels, so setting debug level 2, includes level 0, 1 and 2 @@ -141,3 +158,36 @@ sync_threshold - INTEGER synchronized, every time the number of its incoming packets modulus 50 equals the threshold. The range of the threshold is from 0 to 49. + +snat_reroute - BOOLEAN + 0 - disabled + not 0 - enabled (default) + + If enabled, recalculate the route of SNATed packets from + realservers so that they are routed as if they originate from the + director. Otherwise they are routed as if they are forwarded by the + director. + + If policy routing is in effect then it is possible that the route + of a packet originating from a director is routed differently to a + packet being forwarded by the director. + + If policy routing is not in effect then the recalculated route will + always be the same as the original route so it is an optimisation + to disable snat_reroute and avoid the recalculation. + +sync_version - INTEGER + default 1 + + The version of the synchronisation protocol used when sending + synchronisation messages. + + 0 selects the original synchronisation protocol (version 0). This + should be used when sending synchronisation messages to a legacy + system that only understands the original synchronisation protocol. + + 1 selects the current synchronisation protocol (version 1). This + should be used where possible. + + Kernels with this sync_version entry are able to receive messages + of both version 1 and version 2 of the synchronisation protocol. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 325aadc8483e4fc3bbd4acfa7e471e3a032bc941 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Simon Horman Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2011 16:14:51 +0900 Subject: ipvs: secure_tcp does provide alternate state timeouts Also reword the test to make it read more easily (to me) Signed-off-by: Simon Horman Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso --- Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt | 10 ++++------ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt index 1dcdd49594c..13610e3bcf9 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt @@ -140,13 +140,11 @@ nat_icmp_send - BOOLEAN secure_tcp - INTEGER 0 - disabled (default) - The secure_tcp defense is to use a more complicated state - transition table and some possible short timeouts of each - state. In the VS/NAT, it delays the entering the ESTABLISHED - until the real server starts to send data and ACK packet - (after 3-way handshake). + The secure_tcp defense is to use a more complicated TCP state + transition table. For VS/NAT, it also delays entering the + TCP ESTABLISHED state until the three way handshake is completed. - The value definition is the same as that of drop_entry or + The value definition is the same as that of drop_entry and drop_packet. sync_threshold - INTEGER -- cgit v1.2.3 From 40cb1f9bc52186a1a9ef56f0d976482863516ce1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Simon Horman Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2011 16:27:37 +0900 Subject: ipvs: Enhance grammar used to refer to Kconfig options Reported-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Simon Horman Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso --- Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt index 13610e3bcf9..f2a2488f1bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ conntrack - BOOLEAN Connections handled by the IPVS FTP application module will have connection tracking entries regardless of this setting. - Only available when IPVS is compiled with the CONFIG_IP_VS_NFCT + Only available when IPVS is compiled with CONFIG_IP_VS_NFCT enabled. cache_bypass - BOOLEAN 0 - disabled (default) @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ debug_level - INTEGER 11 - IPVS packet handling (ip_vs_in/ip_vs_out) 12 or more - packet traversal - Only available when IPVS is compiled with the CONFIG_IP_VS_DEBUG + Only available when IPVS is compiled with CONFIG_IP_VS_DEBUG enabled. Higher debugging levels include the messages for lower debugging levels, so setting debug level 2, includes level 0, 1 and 2 -- cgit v1.2.3 From edfd52e6367270c90f3fd7cc302b375ffa89f91e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Pawel Moll Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2011 14:07:03 +0100 Subject: virtio: Add platform bus driver for memory mapped virtio device This patch, based on virtio PCI driver, adds support for memory mapped (platform) virtio device. This should allow environments like qemu to use virtio-based block & network devices even on platforms without PCI support. One can define and register a platform device which resources will describe memory mapped control registers and "mailbox" interrupt. Such device can be also instantiated using the Device Tree node with compatible property equal "virtio,mmio". Cc: Anthony Liguori Cc: Michael S.Tsirkin Signed-off-by: Pawel Moll Signed-off-by: Rusty Russell --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/virtio/mmio.txt | 17 +++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/virtio/mmio.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/virtio/mmio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/virtio/mmio.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5069c1b8e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/virtio/mmio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +* virtio memory mapped device + +See http://ozlabs.org/~rusty/virtio-spec/ for more details. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: "virtio,mmio" compatibility string +- reg: control registers base address and size including configuration space +- interrupts: interrupt generated by the device + +Example: + + virtio_block@3000 { + compatible = "virtio,mmio"; + reg = <0x3000 0x100>; + interrupts = <41>; + } -- cgit v1.2.3 From f0023bc617ba600956b9226f1806033d7486c8ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sage Weil Date: Fri, 28 Oct 2011 10:02:42 -0700 Subject: vfs: add d_prune dentry operation This adds a d_prune dentry operation that is called by the VFS prior to pruning (i.e. unhashing and killing) a hashed dentry from the dcache. Wrap dentry_lru_del() and use the new _prune() helper in the cases where we are about to unhash and kill the dentry. This will be used by Ceph to maintain a flag indicating whether the complete contents of a directory are contained in the dcache, allowing it to satisfy lookups and readdir without addition server communication. Renumber a few DCACHE_* #defines to group DCACHE_OP_PRUNE with the other DCACHE_OP_ bits. Signed-off-by: Sage Weil Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig --- Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 653380793a6..d819ba16a0c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ d_hash no no no maybe d_compare: yes no no maybe d_delete: no yes no no d_release: no no yes no +d_prune: no yes no no d_iput: no no yes no d_dname: no no no no d_automount: no no yes no -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8a91db29252f87630e6f31a56ff96eeda00d5ba3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Jonathan=20Neusch=C3=A4fer?= Date: Fri, 12 Aug 2011 02:28:23 +0200 Subject: UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt: remove ^H characters MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit If you can't read this patch, please run: sed -i -e "s/[^\o10]\o10//g" \ Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt Signed-off-by: Jonathan NeuschĂ€fer Signed-off-by: Richard Weinberger --- Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt | 530 +++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 265 insertions(+), 265 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt index 5d0fc8bfcdb..a7af9cf065e 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt @@ -134,13 +134,13 @@ ______________________________________________________________________ - 11.. IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn + 1. Introduction Welcome to User Mode Linux. It's going to be fun. - 11..11.. HHooww iiss UUsseerr MMooddee LLiinnuuxx DDiiffffeerreenntt?? + 1.1. How is User Mode Linux Different? Normally, the Linux Kernel talks straight to your hardware (video card, keyboard, hard drives, etc), and any programs which run ask the @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ - 11..22.. WWhhyy WWoouulldd II WWaanntt UUsseerr MMooddee LLiinnuuxx?? + 1.2. Why Would I Want User Mode Linux? 1. If User Mode Linux crashes, your host kernel is still fine. @@ -206,12 +206,12 @@ - 22.. CCoommppiilliinngg tthhee kkeerrnneell aanndd mmoodduulleess + 2. Compiling the kernel and modules - 22..11.. CCoommppiilliinngg tthhee kkeerrnneell + 2.1. Compiling the kernel Compiling the user mode kernel is just like compiling any other @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ bug fixes and enhancements that have gone into subsequent releases. - 22..22.. CCoommppiilliinngg aanndd iinnssttaalllliinngg kkeerrnneell mmoodduulleess + 2.2. Compiling and installing kernel modules UML modules are built in the same way as the native kernel (with the exception of the 'ARCH=um' that you always need for UML): @@ -386,19 +386,19 @@ - 22..33.. CCoommppiilliinngg aanndd iinnssttaalllliinngg uummll__uuttiilliittiieess + 2.3. Compiling and installing uml_utilities Many features of the UML kernel require a user-space helper program, so a uml_utilities package is distributed separately from the kernel patch which provides these helpers. Included within this is: - +o port-helper - Used by consoles which connect to xterms or ports + o port-helper - Used by consoles which connect to xterms or ports - +o tunctl - Configuration tool to create and delete tap devices + o tunctl - Configuration tool to create and delete tap devices - +o uml_net - Setuid binary for automatic tap device configuration + o uml_net - Setuid binary for automatic tap device configuration - +o uml_switch - User-space virtual switch required for daemon + o uml_switch - User-space virtual switch required for daemon transport The uml_utilities tree is compiled with: @@ -423,11 +423,11 @@ - 33.. RRuunnnniinngg UUMMLL aanndd llooggggiinngg iinn + 3. Running UML and logging in - 33..11.. RRuunnnniinngg UUMMLL + 3.1. Running UML It runs on 2.2.15 or later, and all 2.4 kernels. @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ - 33..22.. LLooggggiinngg iinn + 3.2. Logging in @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ There are a couple of other ways to log in: - +o On a virtual console + o On a virtual console @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ - +o Over the serial line + o Over the serial line In the boot output, find a line that looks like: @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ - +o Over the net + o Over the net If the network is running, then you can telnet to the virtual @@ -514,13 +514,13 @@ down and the process will exit. - 33..33.. EExxaammpplleess + 3.3. Examples Here are some examples of UML in action: - +o A login session + o A login session - +o A virtual network + o A virtual network @@ -528,12 +528,12 @@ - 44.. UUMMLL oonn 22GG//22GG hhoossttss + 4. UML on 2G/2G hosts - 44..11.. IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn + 4.1. Introduction Most Linux machines are configured so that the kernel occupies the @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ - 44..22.. TThhee pprroobblleemm + 4.2. The problem The prebuilt UML binaries on this site will not run on 2G/2G hosts @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ - 44..33.. TThhee ssoolluuttiioonn + 4.3. The solution The fix for this is to rebuild UML from source after enabling @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ - 55.. SSeettttiinngg uupp sseerriiaall lliinneess aanndd ccoonnssoolleess + 5. Setting up serial lines and consoles It is possible to attach UML serial lines and consoles to many types @@ -586,12 +586,12 @@ You can attach them to host ptys, ttys, file descriptors, and ports. This allows you to do things like - +o have a UML console appear on an unused host console, + o have a UML console appear on an unused host console, - +o hook two virtual machines together by having one attach to a pty + o hook two virtual machines together by having one attach to a pty and having the other attach to the corresponding tty - +o make a virtual machine accessible from the net by attaching a + o make a virtual machine accessible from the net by attaching a console to a port on the host. @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ - 55..11.. SSppeecciiffyyiinngg tthhee ddeevviiccee + 5.1. Specifying the device Devices are specified with "con" or "ssl" (console or serial line, respectively), optionally with a device number if you are talking @@ -626,13 +626,13 @@ - 55..22.. SSppeecciiffyyiinngg tthhee cchhaannnneell + 5.2. Specifying the channel There are a number of different types of channels to attach a UML device to, each with a different way of specifying exactly what to attach to. - +o pseudo-terminals - device=pty pts terminals - device=pts + o pseudo-terminals - device=pty pts terminals - device=pts This will cause UML to allocate a free host pseudo-terminal for the @@ -640,20 +640,20 @@ log. You access it by attaching a terminal program to the corresponding tty: - +o screen /dev/pts/n + o screen /dev/pts/n - +o screen /dev/ttyxx + o screen /dev/ttyxx - +o minicom -o -p /dev/ttyxx - minicom seems not able to handle pts + o minicom -o -p /dev/ttyxx - minicom seems not able to handle pts devices - +o kermit - start it up, 'open' the device, then 'connect' + o kermit - start it up, 'open' the device, then 'connect' - +o terminals - device=tty:tty device file + o terminals - device=tty:tty device file This will make UML attach the device to the specified tty (i.e @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ - +o xterms - device=xterm + o xterms - device=xterm UML will run an xterm and the device will be attached to it. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ - +o Port - device=port:port number + o Port - device=port:port number This will attach the UML devices to the specified host port. @@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ - +o already-existing file descriptors - device=file descriptor + o already-existing file descriptors - device=file descriptor If you set up a file descriptor on the UML command line, you can @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ - +o Nothing - device=null + o Nothing - device=null This allows the device to be opened, in contrast to 'none', but @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ - +o None - device=none + o None - device=none This causes the device to disappear. @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ - 55..33.. EExxaammpplleess + 5.3. Examples There are a number of interesting things you can do with this capability. @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ prompt of the other virtual machine. - 66.. SSeettttiinngg uupp tthhee nneettwwoorrkk + 6. Setting up the network @@ -858,19 +858,19 @@ There are currently five transport types available for a UML virtual machine to exchange packets with other hosts: - +o ethertap + o ethertap - +o TUN/TAP + o TUN/TAP - +o Multicast + o Multicast - +o a switch daemon + o a switch daemon - +o slip + o slip - +o slirp + o slirp - +o pcap + o pcap The TUN/TAP, ethertap, slip, and slirp transports allow a UML instance to exchange packets with the host. They may be directed @@ -893,28 +893,28 @@ With so many host transports, which one should you use? Here's when you should use each one: - +o ethertap - if you want access to the host networking and it is + o ethertap - if you want access to the host networking and it is running 2.2 - +o TUN/TAP - if you want access to the host networking and it is + o TUN/TAP - if you want access to the host networking and it is running 2.4. Also, the TUN/TAP transport is able to use a preconfigured device, allowing it to avoid using the setuid uml_net helper, which is a security advantage. - +o Multicast - if you want a purely virtual network and you don't want + o Multicast - if you want a purely virtual network and you don't want to set up anything but the UML - +o a switch daemon - if you want a purely virtual network and you + o a switch daemon - if you want a purely virtual network and you don't mind running the daemon in order to get somewhat better performance - +o slip - there is no particular reason to run the slip backend unless + o slip - there is no particular reason to run the slip backend unless ethertap and TUN/TAP are just not available for some reason - +o slirp - if you don't have root access on the host to setup + o slirp - if you don't have root access on the host to setup networking, or if you don't want to allocate an IP to your UML - +o pcap - not much use for actual network connectivity, but great for + o pcap - not much use for actual network connectivity, but great for monitoring traffic on the host Ethertap is available on 2.4 and works fine. TUN/TAP is preferred @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ exploit the helper's root privileges. - 66..11.. GGeenneerraall sseettuupp + 6.1. General setup First, you must have the virtual network enabled in your UML. If are running a prebuilt kernel from this site, everything is already @@ -995,7 +995,7 @@ - 66..22.. UUsseerrssppaaccee ddaaeemmoonnss + 6.2. Userspace daemons You will likely need the setuid helper, or the switch daemon, or both. They are both installed with the RPM and deb, so if you've installed @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ - 66..33.. SSppeecciiffyyiinngg eetthheerrnneett aaddddrreesssseess + 6.3. Specifying ethernet addresses Below, you will see that the TUN/TAP, ethertap, and daemon interfaces allow you to specify hardware addresses for the virtual ethernet @@ -1023,11 +1023,11 @@ sufficient to guarantee a unique hardware address for the device. A couple of exceptions are: - +o Another set of virtual ethernet devices are on the same network and + o Another set of virtual ethernet devices are on the same network and they are assigned hardware addresses using a different scheme which may conflict with the UML IP address-based scheme - +o You aren't going to use the device for IP networking, so you don't + o You aren't going to use the device for IP networking, so you don't assign the device an IP address If you let the driver provide the hardware address, you should make @@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@ - 66..44.. UUMMLL iinntteerrffaaccee sseettuupp + 6.4. UML interface setup Once the network devices have been described on the command line, you should boot UML and log in. @@ -1131,7 +1131,7 @@ - 66..55.. MMuullttiiccaasstt + 6.5. Multicast The simplest way to set up a virtual network between multiple UMLs is to use the mcast transport. This was written by Harald Welte and is @@ -1194,7 +1194,7 @@ - 66..66.. TTUUNN//TTAAPP wwiitthh tthhee uummll__nneett hheellppeerr + 6.6. TUN/TAP with the uml_net helper TUN/TAP is the preferred mechanism on 2.4 to exchange packets with the host. The TUN/TAP backend has been in UML since 2.4.9-3um. @@ -1247,10 +1247,10 @@ There are a couple potential problems with running the TUN/TAP transport on a 2.4 host kernel - +o TUN/TAP seems not to work on 2.4.3 and earlier. Upgrade the host + o TUN/TAP seems not to work on 2.4.3 and earlier. Upgrade the host kernel or use the ethertap transport. - +o With an upgraded kernel, TUN/TAP may fail with + o With an upgraded kernel, TUN/TAP may fail with File descriptor in bad state @@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ - 66..77.. TTUUNN//TTAAPP wwiitthh aa pprreeccoonnffiigguurreedd ttaapp ddeevviiccee + 6.7. TUN/TAP with a preconfigured tap device If you prefer not to have UML use uml_net (which is somewhat insecure), with UML 2.4.17-11, you can set up a TUN/TAP device @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ there is no need for root assistance. Setting up the device is done as follows: - +o Create the device with tunctl (available from the UML utilities + o Create the device with tunctl (available from the UML utilities tarball) @@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@ where uid is the user id or username that UML will be run as. This will tell you what device was created. - +o Configure the device IP (change IP addresses and device name to + o Configure the device IP (change IP addresses and device name to suit) @@ -1303,7 +1303,7 @@ - +o Set up routing and arping if desired - this is my recipe, there are + o Set up routing and arping if desired - this is my recipe, there are other ways of doing the same thing @@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@ utility which reads the information from a config file and sets up devices at boot time. - +o Rather than using up two IPs and ARPing for one of them, you can + o Rather than using up two IPs and ARPing for one of them, you can also provide direct access to your LAN by the UML by using a bridge. @@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ Note that 'br0' should be setup using ifconfig with the existing IP address of eth0, as eth0 no longer has its own IP. - +o + o Also, the /dev/net/tun device must be writable by the user running @@ -1438,11 +1438,11 @@ devices and chgrp /dev/net/tun to that group with mode 664 or 660. - +o Once the device is set up, run UML with 'eth0=tuntap,device name' + o Once the device is set up, run UML with 'eth0=tuntap,device name' (i.e. 'eth0=tuntap,tap0') on the command line (or do it with the mconsole config command). - +o Bring the eth device up in UML and you're in business. + o Bring the eth device up in UML and you're in business. If you don't want that tap device any more, you can make it non- persistent with @@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ - 66..88.. EEtthheerrttaapp + 6.8. Ethertap Ethertap is the general mechanism on 2.2 for userspace processes to exchange packets with the kernel. @@ -1561,9 +1561,9 @@ - 66..99.. TThhee sswwiittcchh ddaaeemmoonn + 6.9. The switch daemon - NNoottee: This is the daemon formerly known as uml_router, but which was + Note: This is the daemon formerly known as uml_router, but which was renamed so the network weenies of the world would stop growling at me. @@ -1649,7 +1649,7 @@ - 66..1100.. SSlliipp + 6.10. Slip Slip is another, less general, mechanism for a process to communicate with the host networking. In contrast to the ethertap interface, @@ -1681,7 +1681,7 @@ - 66..1111.. SSlliirrpp + 6.11. Slirp slirp uses an external program, usually /usr/bin/slirp, to provide IP only networking connectivity through the host. This is similar to IP @@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@ - 66..1122.. ppccaapp + 6.12. pcap The pcap transport is attached to a UML ethernet device on the command line or with uml_mconsole with the following syntax: @@ -1777,7 +1777,7 @@ - 66..1133.. SSeettttiinngg uupp tthhee hhoosstt yyoouurrsseellff + 6.13. Setting up the host yourself If you don't specify an address for the host side of the ethertap or slip device, UML won't do any setup on the host. So this is what is @@ -1785,7 +1785,7 @@ 192.168.0.251 and a UML-side IP of 192.168.0.250 - adjust to suit your own network): - +o The device needs to be configured with its IP address. Tap devices + o The device needs to be configured with its IP address. Tap devices are also configured with an mtu of 1484. Slip devices are configured with a point-to-point address pointing at the UML ip address. @@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ - +o If a tap device is being set up, a route is set to the UML IP. + o If a tap device is being set up, a route is set to the UML IP. UML# route add -host 192.168.0.250 gw 192.168.0.251 @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ - +o To allow other hosts on your network to see the virtual machine, + o To allow other hosts on your network to see the virtual machine, proxy arp is set up for it. @@ -1824,7 +1824,7 @@ - +o Finally, the host is set up to route packets. + o Finally, the host is set up to route packets. host# echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward @@ -1838,12 +1838,12 @@ - 77.. SShhaarriinngg FFiilleessyysstteemmss bbeettwweeeenn VViirrttuuaall MMaacchhiinneess + 7. Sharing Filesystems between Virtual Machines - 77..11.. AA wwaarrnniinngg + 7.1. A warning Don't attempt to share filesystems simply by booting two UMLs from the same file. That's the same thing as booting two physical machines @@ -1851,7 +1851,7 @@ - 77..22.. UUssiinngg llaayyeerreedd bblloocckk ddeevviicceess + 7.2. Using layered block devices The way to share a filesystem between two virtual machines is to use the copy-on-write (COW) layering capability of the ubd block driver. @@ -1896,7 +1896,7 @@ - 77..33.. NNoottee!! + 7.3. Note! When checking the size of the COW file in order to see the gobs of space that you're saving, make sure you use 'ls -ls' to see the actual @@ -1926,7 +1926,7 @@ - 77..44.. AAnnootthheerr wwaarrnniinngg + 7.4. Another warning Once a filesystem is being used as a readonly backing file for a COW file, do not boot directly from it or modify it in any way. Doing so @@ -1952,7 +1952,7 @@ - 77..55.. uummll__mmoooo :: MMeerrggiinngg aa CCOOWW ffiillee wwiitthh iittss bbaacckkiinngg ffiillee + 7.5. uml_moo : Merging a COW file with its backing file Depending on how you use UML and COW devices, it may be advisable to merge the changes in the COW file into the backing file every once in @@ -2001,7 +2001,7 @@ - 88.. CCrreeaattiinngg ffiilleessyysstteemmss + 8. Creating filesystems You may want to create and mount new UML filesystems, either because @@ -2015,7 +2015,7 @@ should be easy to translate to the filesystem of your choice. - 88..11.. CCrreeaattee tthhee ffiilleessyysstteemm ffiillee + 8.1. Create the filesystem file dd is your friend. All you need to do is tell dd to create an empty file of the appropriate size. I usually make it sparse to save time @@ -2032,7 +2032,7 @@ - 88..22.. AAssssiiggnn tthhee ffiillee ttoo aa UUMMLL ddeevviiccee + 8.2. Assign the file to a UML device Add an argument like the following to the UML command line: @@ -2045,7 +2045,7 @@ - 88..33.. CCrreeaattiinngg aanndd mmoouunnttiinngg tthhee ffiilleessyysstteemm + 8.3. Creating and mounting the filesystem Make sure that the filesystem is available, either by being built into the kernel, or available as a module, then boot up UML and log in. If @@ -2096,7 +2096,7 @@ - 99.. HHoosstt ffiillee aacccceessss + 9. Host file access If you want to access files on the host machine from inside UML, you @@ -2112,7 +2112,7 @@ files contained in it just as you would on the host. - 99..11.. UUssiinngg hhoossttffss + 9.1. Using hostfs To begin with, make sure that hostfs is available inside the virtual machine with @@ -2151,7 +2151,7 @@ - 99..22.. hhoossttffss aass tthhee rroooott ffiilleessyysstteemm + 9.2. hostfs as the root filesystem It's possible to boot from a directory hierarchy on the host using hostfs rather than using the standard filesystem in a file. @@ -2194,20 +2194,20 @@ UML should then boot as it does normally. - 99..33.. BBuuiillddiinngg hhoossttffss + 9.3. Building hostfs If you need to build hostfs because it's not in your kernel, you have two choices: - +o Compiling hostfs into the kernel: + o Compiling hostfs into the kernel: Reconfigure the kernel and set the 'Host filesystem' option under - +o Compiling hostfs as a module: + o Compiling hostfs as a module: Reconfigure the kernel and set the 'Host filesystem' option under @@ -2228,7 +2228,7 @@ - 1100.. TThhee MMaannaaggeemmeenntt CCoonnssoollee + 10. The Management Console @@ -2240,15 +2240,15 @@ There are a number of things you can do with the mconsole interface: - +o get the kernel version + o get the kernel version - +o add and remove devices + o add and remove devices - +o halt or reboot the machine + o halt or reboot the machine - +o Send SysRq commands + o Send SysRq commands - +o Pause and resume the UML + o Pause and resume the UML You need the mconsole client (uml_mconsole) which is present in CVS @@ -2300,28 +2300,28 @@ You'll get a prompt, at which you can run one of these commands: - +o version + o version - +o halt + o halt - +o reboot + o reboot - +o config + o config - +o remove + o remove - +o sysrq + o sysrq - +o help + o help - +o cad + o cad - +o stop + o stop - +o go + o go - 1100..11.. vveerrssiioonn + 10.1. version This takes no arguments. It prints the UML version. @@ -2342,7 +2342,7 @@ - 1100..22.. hhaalltt aanndd rreebboooott + 10.2. halt and reboot These take no arguments. They shut the machine down immediately, with no syncing of disks and no clean shutdown of userspace. So, they are @@ -2357,7 +2357,7 @@ - 1100..33.. ccoonnffiigg + 10.3. config "config" adds a new device to the virtual machine. Currently the ubd and network drivers support this. It takes one argument, which is the @@ -2378,7 +2378,7 @@ - 1100..44.. rreemmoovvee + 10.4. remove "remove" deletes a device from the system. Its argument is just the name of the device to be removed. The device must be idle in whatever @@ -2397,7 +2397,7 @@ - 1100..55.. ssyyssrrqq + 10.5. sysrq This takes one argument, which is a single letter. It calls the generic kernel's SysRq driver, which does whatever is called for by @@ -2407,14 +2407,14 @@ - 1100..66.. hheellpp + 10.6. help "help" returns a string listing the valid commands and what each one does. - 1100..77.. ccaadd + 10.7. cad This invokes the Ctl-Alt-Del action on init. What exactly this ends up doing is up to /etc/inittab. Normally, it reboots the machine. @@ -2432,7 +2432,7 @@ - 1100..88.. ssttoopp + 10.8. stop This puts the UML in a loop reading mconsole requests until a 'go' mconsole command is received. This is very useful for making backups @@ -2448,7 +2448,7 @@ - 1100..99.. ggoo + 10.9. go This resumes a UML after being paused by a 'stop' command. Note that when the UML has resumed, TCP connections may have timed out and if @@ -2462,10 +2462,10 @@ - 1111.. KKeerrnneell ddeebbuuggggiinngg + 11. Kernel debugging - NNoottee:: The interface that makes debugging, as described here, possible + Note: The interface that makes debugging, as described here, possible is present in 2.4.0-test6 kernels and later. @@ -2485,7 +2485,7 @@ - 1111..11.. SSttaarrttiinngg tthhee kkeerrnneell uunnddeerr ggddbb + 11.1. Starting the kernel under gdb You can have the kernel running under the control of gdb from the beginning by putting 'debug' on the command line. You will get an @@ -2498,7 +2498,7 @@ There is a transcript of a debugging session here , with breakpoints being set in the scheduler and in an interrupt handler. - 1111..22.. EExxaammiinniinngg sslleeeeppiinngg pprroocceesssseess + 11.2. Examining sleeping processes Not every bug is evident in the currently running process. Sometimes, processes hang in the kernel when they shouldn't because they've @@ -2516,7 +2516,7 @@ Now what you do is this: - +o detach from the current thread + o detach from the current thread (UML gdb) det @@ -2525,7 +2525,7 @@ - +o attach to the thread you are interested in + o attach to the thread you are interested in (UML gdb) att @@ -2534,7 +2534,7 @@ - +o look at its stack and anything else of interest + o look at its stack and anything else of interest (UML gdb) bt @@ -2545,7 +2545,7 @@ Note that you can't do anything at this point that requires that a process execute, e.g. calling a function - +o when you're done looking at that process, reattach to the current + o when you're done looking at that process, reattach to the current thread and continue it @@ -2569,12 +2569,12 @@ - 1111..33.. RRuunnnniinngg dddddd oonn UUMMLL + 11.3. Running ddd on UML ddd works on UML, but requires a special kludge. The process goes like this: - +o Start ddd + o Start ddd host% ddd linux @@ -2583,14 +2583,14 @@ - +o With ps, get the pid of the gdb that ddd started. You can ask the + o With ps, get the pid of the gdb that ddd started. You can ask the gdb to tell you, but for some reason that confuses things and causes a hang. - +o run UML with 'debug=parent gdb-pid=' added to the command line + o run UML with 'debug=parent gdb-pid=' added to the command line - it will just sit there after you hit return - +o type 'att 1' to the ddd gdb and you will see something like + o type 'att 1' to the ddd gdb and you will see something like 0xa013dc51 in __kill () @@ -2602,12 +2602,12 @@ - +o At this point, type 'c', UML will boot up, and you can use ddd just + o At this point, type 'c', UML will boot up, and you can use ddd just as you do on any other process. - 1111..44.. DDeebbuuggggiinngg mmoodduulleess + 11.4. Debugging modules gdb has support for debugging code which is dynamically loaded into the process. This support is what is needed to debug kernel modules @@ -2823,7 +2823,7 @@ - 1111..55.. AAttttaacchhiinngg ggddbb ttoo tthhee kkeerrnneell + 11.5. Attaching gdb to the kernel If you don't have the kernel running under gdb, you can attach gdb to it later by sending the tracing thread a SIGUSR1. The first line of @@ -2857,7 +2857,7 @@ - 1111..66.. UUssiinngg aalltteerrnnaattee ddeebbuuggggeerrss + 11.6. Using alternate debuggers UML has support for attaching to an already running debugger rather than starting gdb itself. This is present in CVS as of 17 Apr 2001. @@ -2886,7 +2886,7 @@ An example of an alternate debugger is strace. You can strace the actual kernel as follows: - +o Run the following in a shell + o Run the following in a shell host% @@ -2894,10 +2894,10 @@ - +o Run UML with 'debug' and 'gdb-pid=' with the pid printed out + o Run UML with 'debug' and 'gdb-pid=' with the pid printed out by the previous command - +o Hit return in the shell, and UML will start running, and strace + o Hit return in the shell, and UML will start running, and strace output will start accumulating in the output file. Note that this is different from running @@ -2917,9 +2917,9 @@ - 1122.. KKeerrnneell ddeebbuuggggiinngg eexxaammpplleess + 12. Kernel debugging examples - 1122..11.. TThhee ccaassee ooff tthhee hhuunngg ffsscckk + 12.1. The case of the hung fsck When booting up the kernel, fsck failed, and dropped me into a shell to fix things up. I ran fsck -y, which hung: @@ -3154,9 +3154,9 @@ The interesting things here are : - +o There are two segfaults on this stack (frames 9 and 14) + o There are two segfaults on this stack (frames 9 and 14) - +o The first faulting address (frame 11) is 0x50000800 + o The first faulting address (frame 11) is 0x50000800 (gdb) p (void *)1342179328 $16 = (void *) 0x50000800 @@ -3399,7 +3399,7 @@ on will be somewhat clearer. - 1122..22.. EEppiissooddee 22:: TThhee ccaassee ooff tthhee hhuunngg ffsscckk + 12.2. Episode 2: The case of the hung fsck After setting a trap in the SEGV handler for accesses to the signal thread's stack, I reran the kernel. @@ -3788,12 +3788,12 @@ - 1133.. WWhhaatt ttoo ddoo wwhheenn UUMMLL ddooeessnn''tt wwoorrkk + 13. What to do when UML doesn't work - 1133..11.. SSttrraannggee ccoommppiillaattiioonn eerrrroorrss wwhheenn yyoouu bbuuiilldd ffrroomm ssoouurrccee + 13.1. Strange compilation errors when you build from source As of test11, it is necessary to have "ARCH=um" in the environment or on the make command line for all steps in building UML, including @@ -3824,8 +3824,8 @@ - 1133..33.. AA vvaarriieettyy ooff ppaanniiccss aanndd hhaannggss wwiitthh //ttmmpp oonn aa rreeiisseerrffss ffiilleessyyss-- - tteemm + 13.3. A variety of panics and hangs with /tmp on a reiserfs filesys- + tem I saw this on reiserfs 3.5.21 and it seems to be fixed in 3.5.27. Panics preceded by @@ -3842,8 +3842,8 @@ - 1133..44.. TThhee ccoommppiillee ffaaiillss wwiitthh eerrrroorrss aabboouutt ccoonnfflliiccttiinngg ttyyppeess ffoorr - ''ooppeenn'',, ''dduupp'',, aanndd ''wwaaiittppiidd'' + 13.4. The compile fails with errors about conflicting types for + 'open', 'dup', and 'waitpid' This happens when you build in /usr/src/linux. The UML build makes the include/asm link point to include/asm-um. /usr/include/asm points @@ -3854,14 +3854,14 @@ - 1133..55.. UUMMLL ddooeessnn''tt wwoorrkk wwhheenn //ttmmpp iiss aann NNFFSS ffiilleessyysstteemm + 13.5. UML doesn't work when /tmp is an NFS filesystem This seems to be a similar situation with the ReiserFS problem above. Some versions of NFS seems not to handle mmap correctly, which UML depends on. The workaround is have /tmp be a non-NFS directory. - 1133..66.. UUMMLL hhaannggss oonn bboooott wwhheenn ccoommppiilleedd wwiitthh ggpprrooff ssuuppppoorrtt + 13.6. UML hangs on boot when compiled with gprof support If you build UML with gprof support and, early in the boot, it does this @@ -3878,7 +3878,7 @@ - 1133..77.. ssyyssllooggdd ddiieess wwiitthh aa SSIIGGTTEERRMM oonn ssttaarrttuupp + 13.7. syslogd dies with a SIGTERM on startup The exact boot error depends on the distribution that you're booting, but Debian produces this: @@ -3897,17 +3897,17 @@ - 1133..88.. TTUUNN//TTAAPP nneettwwoorrkkiinngg ddooeessnn''tt wwoorrkk oonn aa 22..44 hhoosstt + 13.8. TUN/TAP networking doesn't work on a 2.4 host There are a couple of problems which were name="pointed out"> by Tim Robinson - +o It doesn't work on hosts running 2.4.7 (or thereabouts) or earlier. + o It doesn't work on hosts running 2.4.7 (or thereabouts) or earlier. The fix is to upgrade to something more recent and then read the next item. - +o If you see + o If you see File descriptor in bad state @@ -3921,8 +3921,8 @@ - 1133..99.. YYoouu ccaann nneettwwoorrkk ttoo tthhee hhoosstt bbuutt nnoott ttoo ootthheerr mmaacchhiinneess oonn tthhee - nneett + 13.9. You can network to the host but not to other machines on the + net If you can connect to the host, and the host can connect to UML, but you cannot connect to any other machines, then you may need to enable @@ -3972,7 +3972,7 @@ - 1133..1100.. II hhaavvee nnoo rroooott aanndd II wwaanntt ttoo ssccrreeaamm + 13.10. I have no root and I want to scream Thanks to Birgit Wahlich for telling me about this strange one. It turns out that there's a limit of six environment variables on the @@ -3987,7 +3987,7 @@ - 1133..1111.. UUMMLL bbuuiilldd ccoonnfflliicctt bbeettwweeeenn ppttrraaccee..hh aanndd uuccoonntteexxtt..hh + 13.11. UML build conflict between ptrace.h and ucontext.h On some older systems, /usr/include/asm/ptrace.h and /usr/include/sys/ucontext.h define the same names. So, when they're @@ -4007,7 +4007,7 @@ - 1133..1122.. TThhee UUMMLL BBooggooMMiippss iiss eexxaaccttllyy hhaallff tthhee hhoosstt''ss BBooggooMMiippss + 13.12. The UML BogoMips is exactly half the host's BogoMips On i386 kernels, there are two ways of running the loop that is used to calculate the BogoMips rating, using the TSC if it's there or using @@ -4019,7 +4019,7 @@ - 1133..1133.. WWhheenn yyoouu rruunn UUMMLL,, iitt iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy sseeggffaauullttss + 13.13. When you run UML, it immediately segfaults If the host is configured with the 2G/2G address space split, that's why. See ``UML on 2G/2G hosts'' for the details on getting UML to @@ -4027,7 +4027,7 @@ - 1133..1144.. xxtteerrmmss aappppeeaarr,, tthheenn iimmmmeeddiiaatteellyy ddiissaappppeeaarr + 13.14. xterms appear, then immediately disappear If you're running an up to date kernel with an old release of uml_utilities, the port-helper program will not work properly, so @@ -4039,7 +4039,7 @@ - 1133..1155.. AAnnyy ootthheerr ppaanniicc,, hhaanngg,, oorr ssttrraannggee bbeehhaavviioorr + 13.15. Any other panic, hang, or strange behavior If you're seeing truly strange behavior, such as hangs or panics that happen in random places, or you try running the debugger to see what's @@ -4059,7 +4059,7 @@ If you want to be super-helpful, read ``Diagnosing Problems'' and follow the instructions contained therein. - 1144.. DDiiaaggnnoossiinngg PPrroobblleemmss + 14. Diagnosing Problems If you get UML to crash, hang, or otherwise misbehave, you should @@ -4078,7 +4078,7 @@ ``Kernel debugging'' UML first. - 1144..11.. CCaassee 11 :: NNoorrmmaall kkeerrnneell ppaanniiccss + 14.1. Case 1 : Normal kernel panics The most common case is for a normal thread to panic. To debug this, you will need to run it under the debugger (add 'debug' to the command @@ -4128,7 +4128,7 @@ to get that information from the faulting ip. - 1144..22.. CCaassee 22 :: TTrraacciinngg tthhrreeaadd ppaanniiccss + 14.2. Case 2 : Tracing thread panics The less common and more painful case is when the tracing thread panics. In this case, the kernel debugger will be useless because it @@ -4161,7 +4161,7 @@ backtrace in and wait for our crack debugging team to fix the problem. - 1144..33.. CCaassee 33 :: TTrraacciinngg tthhrreeaadd ppaanniiccss ccaauusseedd bbyy ootthheerr tthhrreeaaddss + 14.3. Case 3 : Tracing thread panics caused by other threads However, there are cases where the misbehavior of another thread caused the problem. The most common panic of this type is: @@ -4227,7 +4227,7 @@ - 1144..44.. CCaassee 44 :: HHaannggss + 14.4. Case 4 : Hangs Hangs seem to be fairly rare, but they sometimes happen. When a hang happens, we need a backtrace from the offending process. Run the @@ -4257,7 +4257,7 @@ - 1155.. TThhaannkkss + 15. Thanks A number of people have helped this project in various ways, and this @@ -4274,20 +4274,20 @@ bookkeeping lapses and I forget about contributions. - 1155..11.. CCooddee aanndd DDooccuummeennttaattiioonn + 15.1. Code and Documentation Rusty Russell - - +o wrote the HOWTO - +o prodded me into making this project official and putting it on + o prodded me into making this project official and putting it on SourceForge - +o came up with the way cool UML logo - +o redid the config process + o redid the config process Peter Moulder - Fixed my config and build @@ -4296,18 +4296,18 @@ Bill Stearns - - +o HOWTO updates + o HOWTO updates - +o lots of bug reports + o lots of bug reports - +o lots of testing + o lots of testing - +o dedicated a box (uml.ists.dartmouth.edu) to support UML development + o dedicated a box (uml.ists.dartmouth.edu) to support UML development - +o wrote the mkrootfs script, which allows bootable filesystems of + o wrote the mkrootfs script, which allows bootable filesystems of RPM-based distributions to be cranked out - +o cranked out a large number of filesystems with said script + o cranked out a large number of filesystems with said script Jim Leu - Wrote the virtual ethernet driver @@ -4375,176 +4375,176 @@ David Coulson - - +o Set up the usermodelinux.org site, + o Set up the usermodelinux.org site, which is a great way of keeping the UML user community on top of UML goings-on. - +o Site documentation and updates + o Site documentation and updates - +o Nifty little UML management daemon UMLd + o Nifty little UML management daemon UMLd - +o Lots of testing and bug reports + o Lots of testing and bug reports - 1155..22.. FFlluusshhiinngg oouutt bbuuggss + 15.2. Flushing out bugs - +o Yuri Pudgorodsky + o Yuri Pudgorodsky - +o Gerald Britton + o Gerald Britton - +o Ian Wehrman + o Ian Wehrman - +o Gord Lamb + o Gord Lamb - +o Eugene Koontz + o Eugene Koontz - +o John H. Hartman + o John H. Hartman - +o Anders Karlsson + o Anders Karlsson - +o Daniel Phillips + o Daniel Phillips - +o John Fremlin + o John Fremlin - +o Rainer Burgstaller + o Rainer Burgstaller - +o James Stevenson + o James Stevenson - +o Matt Clay + o Matt Clay - +o Cliff Jefferies + o Cliff Jefferies - +o Geoff Hoff + o Geoff Hoff - +o Lennert Buytenhek + o Lennert Buytenhek - +o Al Viro + o Al Viro - +o Frank Klingenhoefer + o Frank Klingenhoefer - +o Livio Baldini Soares + o Livio Baldini Soares - +o Jon Burgess + o Jon Burgess - +o Petru Paler + o Petru Paler - +o Paul + o Paul - +o Chris Reahard + o Chris Reahard - +o Sverker Nilsson + o Sverker Nilsson - +o Gong Su + o Gong Su - +o johan verrept + o johan verrept - +o Bjorn Eriksson + o Bjorn Eriksson - +o Lorenzo Allegrucci + o Lorenzo Allegrucci - +o Muli Ben-Yehuda + o Muli Ben-Yehuda - +o David Mansfield + o David Mansfield - +o Howard Goff + o Howard Goff - +o Mike Anderson + o Mike Anderson - +o John Byrne + o John Byrne - +o Sapan J. Batia + o Sapan J. Batia - +o Iris Huang + o Iris Huang - +o Jan Hudec + o Jan Hudec - +o Voluspa + o Voluspa - 1155..33.. BBuugglleettss aanndd cclleeaann--uuppss + 15.3. Buglets and clean-ups - +o Dave Zarzycki + o Dave Zarzycki - +o Adam Lazur + o Adam Lazur - +o Boria Feigin + o Boria Feigin - +o Brian J. Murrell + o Brian J. Murrell - +o JS + o JS - +o Roman Zippel + o Roman Zippel - +o Wil Cooley + o Wil Cooley - +o Ayelet Shemesh + o Ayelet Shemesh - +o Will Dyson + o Will Dyson - +o Sverker Nilsson + o Sverker Nilsson - +o dvorak + o dvorak - +o v.naga srinivas + o v.naga srinivas - +o Shlomi Fish + o Shlomi Fish - +o Roger Binns + o Roger Binns - +o johan verrept + o johan verrept - +o MrChuoi + o MrChuoi - +o Peter Cleve + o Peter Cleve - +o Vincent Guffens + o Vincent Guffens - +o Nathan Scott + o Nathan Scott - +o Patrick Caulfield + o Patrick Caulfield - +o jbearce + o jbearce - +o Catalin Marinas + o Catalin Marinas - +o Shane Spencer + o Shane Spencer - +o Zou Min + o Zou Min - +o Ryan Boder + o Ryan Boder - +o Lorenzo Colitti + o Lorenzo Colitti - +o Gwendal Grignou + o Gwendal Grignou - +o Andre' Breiler + o Andre' Breiler - +o Tsutomu Yasuda + o Tsutomu Yasuda - 1155..44.. CCaassee SSttuuddiieess + 15.4. Case Studies - +o Jon Wright + o Jon Wright - +o William McEwan + o William McEwan - +o Michael Richardson + o Michael Richardson - 1155..55.. OOtthheerr ccoonnttrriibbuuttiioonnss + 15.5. Other contributions Bill Carr made the Red Hat mkrootfs script -- cgit v1.2.3 From c039aff672a540f8976770e74599d350de1805cb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Jonathan=20Neusch=C3=A4fer?= Date: Mon, 15 Aug 2011 15:34:10 +0200 Subject: UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt: fix a typo MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Jonathan NeuschĂ€fer Signed-off-by: Richard Weinberger --- Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt index a7af9cf065e..77dfecf4e2d 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ - will cause serial line 3 to accept input on the host's /dev/tty3 and + will cause serial line 3 to accept input on the host's /dev/tty2 and display output on an xterm. That's a silly example - the most common use of this syntax is to reattach the main console to stdin and stdout as shown above. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9b272977e3b99a8699361d214b51f98c8a9e0e7b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Weiner Date: Wed, 2 Nov 2011 13:38:23 -0700 Subject: memcg: skip scanning active lists based on individual size Reclaim decides to skip scanning an active list when the corresponding inactive list is above a certain size in comparison to leave the assumed working set alone while there are still enough reclaim candidates around. The memcg implementation of comparing those lists instead reports whether the whole memcg is low on the requested type of inactive pages, considering all nodes and zones. This can lead to an oversized active list not being scanned because of the state of the other lists in the memcg, as well as an active list being scanned while its corresponding inactive list has enough pages. Not only is this wrong, it's also a scalability hazard, because the global memory state over all nodes and zones has to be gathered for each memcg and zone scanned. Make these calculations purely based on the size of the two LRU lists that are actually affected by the outcome of the decision. Signed-off-by: Johannes Weiner Reviewed-by: Rik van Riel Cc: KOSAKI Motohiro Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Daisuke Nishimura Cc: Balbir Singh Reviewed-by: Minchan Kim Reviewed-by: Ying Han Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 06eb6d957c8..cc0ebc5241b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -418,7 +418,6 @@ total_unevictable - sum of all children's "unevictable" # The following additional stats are dependent on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM. -inactive_ratio - VM internal parameter. (see mm/page_alloc.c) recent_rotated_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) recent_rotated_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) recent_scanned_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 48618fb4e522d9d02e217ac05f52749545c1af20 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexandre Bounine Date: Wed, 2 Nov 2011 13:39:09 -0700 Subject: RapidIO: add mport driver for Tsi721 bridge Add RapidIO mport driver for IDT TSI721 PCI Express-to-SRIO bridge device. The driver provides full set of callback functions defined for mport devices in RapidIO subsystem. It also is compatible with current version of RIONET driver (Ethernet over RapidIO messaging services). This patch is applicable to kernel versions starting from 2.6.39. Signed-off-by: Alexandre Bounine Signed-off-by: Chul Kim Cc: Kumar Gala Cc: Matt Porter Cc: Li Yang Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt | 49 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 49 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..335f3c6087d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/rapidio/tsi721.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +RapidIO subsystem mport driver for IDT Tsi721 PCI Express-to-SRIO bridge. +========================================================================= + +I. Overview + +This driver implements all currently defined RapidIO mport callback functions. +It supports maintenance read and write operations, inbound and outbound RapidIO +doorbells, inbound maintenance port-writes and RapidIO messaging. + +To generate SRIO maintenance transactions this driver uses one of Tsi721 DMA +channels. This mechanism provides access to larger range of hop counts and +destination IDs without need for changes in outbound window translation. + +RapidIO messaging support uses dedicated messaging channels for each mailbox. +For inbound messages this driver uses destination ID matching to forward messages +into the corresponding message queue. Messaging callbacks are implemented to be +fully compatible with RIONET driver (Ethernet over RapidIO messaging services). + +II. Known problems + + None. + +III. To do + + Add DMA data transfers (non-messaging). + Add inbound region (SRIO-to-PCIe) mapping. + +IV. Version History + + 1.0.0 - Initial driver release. + +V. License +----------------------------------------------- + + Copyright(c) 2011 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it + under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free + Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) + any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT + ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or + FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for + more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with + this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., + 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 088024b1deee206cd37eff980138e918837aabdb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alexandre Bounine Date: Wed, 2 Nov 2011 13:39:19 -0700 Subject: RapidIO: documentation update Update rapidio.txt to reflect changes from recent patch. See http://marc.info/?l=linux-kernel&m=131285620113589&w=2 for details. Signed-off-by: Alexandre Bounine Cc: Liu Gang Cc: Micha Nelissen Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt index be70ee15f8c..c75694b35d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt +++ b/Documentation/rapidio/rapidio.txt @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ and the default device ID in order to access the device on the active port. After the host has completed enumeration of the entire network it releases devices by clearing device ID locks (calls rio_clear_locks()). For each endpoint -in the system, it sets the Master Enable bit in the Port General Control CSR +in the system, it sets the Discovered bit in the Port General Control CSR to indicate that enumeration is completed and agents are allowed to execute passive discovery of the network. -- cgit v1.2.3 From c736de60aed869df8a9aba512cdaf89e32545b00 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: WANG Cong Date: Wed, 2 Nov 2011 13:39:25 -0700 Subject: sysctl: make CONFIG_SYSCTL_SYSCALL default to n When I tried to send a patch to remove it, Andi told me we still need to keep compabitlies for old libc, so we can't remove this completely. Then just make it default to n and remove the doc from feature-removal-schedule.txt. Signed-off-by: WANG Cong Cc: Eric Biederman Cc: Andi Kleen Cc: Alexey Dobriyan Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 35 ------------------------------ 1 file changed, 35 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 7c799fc5b88..3d849122b5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -133,41 +133,6 @@ Who: Pavel Machek --------------------------- -What: sys_sysctl -When: September 2010 -Option: CONFIG_SYSCTL_SYSCALL -Why: The same information is available in a more convenient from - /proc/sys, and none of the sysctl variables appear to be - important performance wise. - - Binary sysctls are a long standing source of subtle kernel - bugs and security issues. - - When I looked several months ago all I could find after - searching several distributions were 5 user space programs and - glibc (which falls back to /proc/sys) using this syscall. - - The man page for sysctl(2) documents it as unusable for user - space programs. - - sysctl(2) is not generally ABI compatible to a 32bit user - space application on a 64bit and a 32bit kernel. - - For the last several months the policy has been no new binary - sysctls and no one has put forward an argument to use them. - - Binary sysctls issues seem to keep happening appearing so - properly deprecating them (with a warning to user space) and a - 2 year grace warning period will mean eventually we can kill - them and end the pain. - - In the mean time individual binary sysctls can be dealt with - in a piecewise fashion. - -Who: Eric Biederman - ---------------------------- - What: /proc//oom_adj When: August 2012 Why: /proc//oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's -- cgit v1.2.3 From 842fa69f3e0c9a178b294e7af7c07f4c9d9e7af2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andrew Morton Date: Wed, 2 Nov 2011 13:39:33 -0700 Subject: include/linux/dma-mapping.h: add dma_zalloc_coherent() Lots of driver code does a dma_alloc_coherent() and then zeroes out the memory with a memset. Make it easy for them. Cc: Alexandre Bounine Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index fe232690661..66bd97a95f1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -50,6 +50,13 @@ specify the GFP_ flags (see kmalloc) for the allocation (the implementation may choose to ignore flags that affect the location of the returned memory, like GFP_DMA). +void * +dma_zalloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, + dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag) + +Wraps dma_alloc_coherent() and also zeroes the returned memory if the +allocation attempt succeeded. + void dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr, dma_addr_t dma_handle) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 55093284fb6f9009a339e522773417bdd54ec144 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Guennadi Liakhovetski Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2011 08:10:58 -0300 Subject: [media] V4L: document the new VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS and VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF ioctl()s [mchehab@redhat.com: remove emacs format crap at the end of the new files] Signed-off-by: Guennadi Liakhovetski Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml | 3 + Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml | 27 ++++ Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml | 2 + .../DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml | 139 +++++++++++++++++++++ .../DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml | 88 +++++++++++++ 5 files changed, 259 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml create mode 100644 Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml index 91410b6e7e0..b68698f96e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml @@ -2486,6 +2486,9 @@ ioctls. Flash API. + + &VIDIOC-CREATE-BUFS; and &VIDIOC-PREPARE-BUF; ioctls. + diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml index c57d1ec6291..3f47df1aa54 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml @@ -927,6 +927,33 @@ ioctl is called. Applications set or clear this flag before calling the VIDIOC_QBUF ioctl. + + V4L2_BUF_FLAG_PREPARED + 0x0400 + The buffer has been prepared for I/O and can be queued by the +application. Drivers set or clear this flag when the +VIDIOC_QUERYBUF, VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF, VIDIOC_QBUF or VIDIOC_DQBUF ioctl is called. + + + V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_INVALIDATE + 0x0400 + Caches do not have to be invalidated for this buffer. +Typically applications shall use this flag if the data captured in the buffer +is not going to be touched by the CPU, instead the buffer will, probably, be +passed on to a DMA-capable hardware unit for further processing or output. + + + + V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_CLEAN + 0x0800 + Caches do not have to be cleaned for this buffer. +Typically applications shall use this flag for output buffers if the data +in this buffer has not been created by the CPU but by some DMA-capable unit, +in which case caches have not been used. + diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml index 40132c27764..2ab365c10fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -469,6 +469,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list. &sub-close; &sub-ioctl; + &sub-create-bufs; &sub-cropcap; &sub-dbg-g-chip-ident; &sub-dbg-g-register; @@ -511,6 +512,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list. &sub-queryctrl; &sub-query-dv-preset; &sub-querystd; + &sub-prepare-buf; &sub-reqbufs; &sub-s-hw-freq-seek; &sub-streamon; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..73ae8a6cd00 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-create-bufs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + ioctl VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS + &manvol; + + + + VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS + Create buffers for Memory Mapped or User Pointer I/O + + + + + + int ioctl + int fd + int request + struct v4l2_create_buffers *argp + + + + + + Arguments + + + + fd + + &fd; + + + + request + + VIDIOC_CREATE_BUFS + + + + argp + + + + + + + + + Description + + This ioctl is used to create buffers for memory +mapped or user pointer +I/O. It can be used as an alternative or in addition to the +VIDIOC_REQBUFS ioctl, when a tighter control over buffers +is required. This ioctl can be called multiple times to create buffers of +different sizes. + + To allocate device buffers applications initialize relevant fields of +the v4l2_create_buffers structure. They set the +type field in the +v4l2_format structure, embedded in this +structure, to the respective stream or buffer type. +count must be set to the number of required buffers. +memory specifies the required I/O method. The +format field shall typically be filled in using +either the VIDIOC_TRY_FMT or +VIDIOC_G_FMT ioctl(). Additionally, applications can adjust +sizeimage fields to fit their specific needs. The +reserved array must be zeroed. + + When the ioctl is called with a pointer to this structure the driver +will attempt to allocate up to the requested number of buffers and store the +actual number allocated and the starting index in the +count and the index fields +respectively. On return count can be smaller than +the number requested. The driver may also increase buffer sizes if required, +however, it will not update sizeimage field values. +The user has to use VIDIOC_QUERYBUF to retrieve that +information. + + + struct <structname>v4l2_create_buffers</structname> + + &cs-str; + + + __u32 + index + The starting buffer index, returned by the driver. + + + __u32 + count + The number of buffers requested or granted. + + + &v4l2-memory; + memory + Applications set this field to +V4L2_MEMORY_MMAP or +V4L2_MEMORY_USERPTR. + + + &v4l2-format; + format + Filled in by the application, preserved by the driver. + + + __u32 + reserved[8] + A place holder for future extensions. + + + +
+ + + + &return-value; + + + + ENOMEM + + No memory to allocate buffers for memory +mapped I/O. + + + + EINVAL + + The buffer type (type field) or the +requested I/O method (memory) is not +supported. + + + + + diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7bde698760e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-prepare-buf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + ioctl VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF + &manvol; + + + + VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF + Prepare a buffer for I/O + + + + + + int ioctl + int fd + int request + struct v4l2_buffer *argp + + + + + + Arguments + + + + fd + + &fd; + + + + request + + VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF + + + + argp + + + + + + + + + Description + + Applications can optionally call the +VIDIOC_PREPARE_BUF ioctl to pass ownership of the buffer +to the driver before actually enqueuing it, using the +VIDIOC_QBUF ioctl, and to prepare it for future I/O. +Such preparations may include cache invalidation or cleaning. Performing them +in advance saves time during the actual I/O. In case such cache operations are +not required, the application can use one of +V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_INVALIDATE and +V4L2_BUF_FLAG_NO_CACHE_CLEAN flags to skip the respective +step. + + The v4l2_buffer structure is +specified in . + + + + &return-value; + + + + EBUSY + + File I/O is in progress. + + + + EINVAL + + The buffer type is not +supported, or the index is out of bounds, +or no buffers have been allocated yet, or the +userptr or +length are invalid. + + + + + -- cgit v1.2.3 From d26a6635b24210791cf4b71fd861738270c8cc3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sylwester Nawrocki Date: Sun, 4 Sep 2011 19:08:54 -0300 Subject: [media] v4l: Add AUTO option for the V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY control V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY control allows applications to instruct a driver what is the power line frequency so an appropriate filter can be used by the device to cancel flicker by compensating the light intensity ripple. Currently in the menu we have entries for 50 Hz and 60 Hz and for entirely disabling the anti-flicker filter. However some devices are capable of automatically detecting the frequency, so add V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_AUTO entry for them. Signed-off-by: Sylwester Nawrocki Signed-off-by: Kyungmin Park Acked-by: Laurent Pinchart Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml index 23fdf79f8cf..3bc5ee8b2c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/controls.xml @@ -232,8 +232,9 @@ control is deprecated. New drivers and applications should use the Enables a power line frequency filter to avoid flicker. Possible values for enum v4l2_power_line_frequency are: V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_DISABLED (0), -V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_50HZ (1) and -V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_60HZ (2). +V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_50HZ (1), +V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_60HZ (2) and +V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY_AUTO (3). V4L2_CID_HUE_AUTO -- cgit v1.2.3 From 02aac316abf436a7529d46a71f7083f9f9ef4b49 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rob Herring Date: Wed, 3 Nov 2010 21:04:59 -0500 Subject: ahci: add DT binding for Calxeda AHCI controller Add devicetree match table to ahci platform driver for Calxeda Highbank AHCI controller. Signed-off-by: Rob Herring Acked-by: Grant Likely Cc: Jeff Garzik Cc: linux-ide@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org Cc: devicetree-discuss@lists.ozlabs.org --- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt | 17 +++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..79caa5651f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/calxeda-sata.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +* Calxeda SATA Controller + +SATA nodes are defined to describe on-chip Serial ATA controllers. +Each SATA controller should have its own node. + +Required properties: +- compatible : compatible list, contains "calxeda,hb-ahci" +- interrupts : +- reg : + +Example: + sata@ffe08000 { + compatible = "calxeda,hb-ahci"; + reg = <0xffe08000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <115>; + }; + -- cgit v1.2.3 From eff7687d473c31cba3876c13e97eebc708eb8582 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 12:00:48 +0100 Subject: hwmon: (w83627ehf) Add support for the W83627UHG This is essentially a stripped down version of the W83627DHG. Noticeable difference is that it is still powered with +5V, as older models, even though the ADC resolution is 8 mV as newer models have. Thanks to Ulf Bruman (Saab Group) for doing all the testing. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Guenter Roeck --- Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf | 28 +++++++++++++++------------- 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf index 76ffef94ed7..3f44dbdfda7 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'w83627dhg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: not available + * Winbond W83627UHG + Prefix: 'w83627uhg' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: available from www.nuvoton.com * Winbond W83667HG Prefix: 'w83667hg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers @@ -42,14 +46,13 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF, W83627EHG, -W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG, W83667HG-B, W83667HG-I (NCT6775F), -and NCT6776F super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively as -Winbond chips. - -The chips implement three temperature sensors (up to four for 667HG-B, and nine -for NCT6775F and NCT6776F), five fan rotation speed sensors, ten analog voltage -sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins -for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms with beep warnings (control unimplemented), +W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83627UHG, W83667HG, W83667HG-B, W83667HG-I +(NCT6775F), and NCT6776F super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively +as Winbond chips. + +The chips implement 2 to 4 temperature sensors (9 for NCT6775F and NCT6776F), +2 to 5 fan rotation speed sensors, 8 to 10 analog voltage sensors, one VID +(except for 627UHG), alarms with beep warnings (control unimplemented), and some automatic fan regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode). The temperature sensor sources on W82677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F are @@ -86,17 +89,16 @@ follows: temp1 -> pwm1 temp2 -> pwm2 -temp3 -> pwm3 +temp3 -> pwm3 (not on 627UHG) prog -> pwm4 (not on 667HG and 667HG-B; the programmable setting is not supported by the driver) /sys files ---------- -name - this is a standard hwmon device entry. For the W83627EHF and W83627EHG, - it is set to "w83627ehf", for the W83627DHG it is set to "w83627dhg", - for the W83667HG and W83667HG-B it is set to "w83667hg", for NCT6775F it - is set to "nct6775", and for NCT6776F it is set to "nct6776". +name - this is a standard hwmon device entry, it contains the name of + the device (see the prefix in the list of supported devices at + the top of this file) pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range: 0 (stop) to 255 (full) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5fe69d7e258a17d825d982ac695c1db5c4bc4768 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Li Zefan Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:05 -0700 Subject: Documentation: update cgroups notes - ns cgroup has been removed. - it's true moving a task to another cgroup can fail. Signed-off-by: Li Zefan Acked-by: Paul Menage Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index cd67e90003c..9c452ef2328 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -454,8 +454,8 @@ mounted hierarchy, to remove a task from its current cgroup you must move it into a new cgroup (possibly the root cgroup) by writing to the new cgroup's tasks file. -Note: If the ns cgroup is active, moving a process to another cgroup can -fail. +Note: Due to some restrictions enforced by some cgroup subsystems, moving +a process to another cgroup can fail. 2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name -------------------------------- -- cgit v1.2.3 From 123aeec2ff5f749e92f8e3dd2d42f7a9948ca037 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kumar Appaiah Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:09 -0700 Subject: Documentation: thinkpad-acpi grammo fixes This adds minor grammatical fixes to the description of the keys in the thinkpad-acpi documentation. Signed-off-by: Kumar Appaiah Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 3ff0dad62d3..9d666828915 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -411,9 +411,9 @@ event code Key Notes 0x1004 0x03 FN+F4 Sleep button (ACPI sleep button semantics, i.e. sleep-to-RAM). - It is always generate some kind + It always generates some kind of event, either the hot key - event or a ACPI sleep button + event or an ACPI sleep button event. The firmware may refuse to generate further FN+F4 key presses until a S3 or S4 ACPI -- cgit v1.2.3 From d83fe6b6c54749a9b2d3198d62ec981024459425 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marcos Paulo de Souza Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:14 -0700 Subject: Documentation: fix inotify source file paths Fixes the path to find the source files of the inotify subsystem. Signed-off-by: Marcos Paulo de Souza Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt index 59a919f1614..cfd02712b83 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt @@ -194,7 +194,8 @@ associated with the inotify_handle, and on which events are queued. Each watch is associated with an inotify_watch structure. Watches are chained off of each associated inotify_handle and each associated inode. -See fs/inotify.c and fs/inotify_user.c for the locking and lifetime rules. +See fs/notify/inotify/inotify_fsnotify.c and fs/notify/inotify/inotify_user.c +for the locking and lifetime rules. (vi) Rationale -- cgit v1.2.3 From b218ab0a5af943441e1daa7dc811874ecd409229 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Antonio Ospite Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:19 -0700 Subject: Documentation: update CodingStyle use of braces After commit 38829dc9d7b4 ("Documentation/CodingStyle: flesh out if-else examples") highlight that if _only_one_ branch of a conditional statement is a single statement, then braces are to be used on both branches. Signed-off-by: Antonio Ospite Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/CodingStyle | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index c940239d967..2b90d328b3b 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -166,8 +166,8 @@ if (condition) else do_that(); -This does not apply if one branch of a conditional statement is a single -statement. Use braces in both branches. +This does not apply if only one branch of a conditional statement is a single +statement; in the latter case use braces in both branches: if (condition) { do_this(); -- cgit v1.2.3 From ab05210bcba83b1fe2702eac7d4d453a97855c26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marcos Paulo de Souza Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:22 -0700 Subject: Documentation: HFS is orphaned Removed the reference of Roman Zippel, last maintainer, of orphaned HFS filesystem. Signed-off-by: Marcos Paulo de Souza Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/hfs.txt | 9 ++++----- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.txt index bd0fa770403..d096df6db07 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/hfs.txt @@ -1,3 +1,4 @@ +Note: This filesystem doesn't have a maintainer. Macintosh HFS Filesystem for Linux ================================== @@ -76,8 +77,6 @@ hformat that can be used to create HFS filesystem. See Credits ======= -The HFS drivers was written by Paul H. Hargrovea (hargrove@sccm.Stanford.EDU) -and is now maintained by Roman Zippel (roman@ardistech.com) at Ardis -Technologies. -Roman rewrote large parts of the code and brought in btree routines derived -from Brad Boyer's hfsplus driver (also maintained by Roman now). +The HFS drivers was written by Paul H. Hargrovea (hargrove@sccm.Stanford.EDU). +Roman Zippel (roman@ardistech.com) rewrote large parts of the code and brought +in btree routines derived from Brad Boyer's hfsplus driver. -- cgit v1.2.3 From b670722009d52c79aea8ff7ed561365ee21ff58c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Marcos Paulo Souza Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:26 -0700 Subject: Documentation: Computone ip2 is orphaned Removed the email for support and fixes for orphaned ip2 driver. Signed-off-by: Marcos Paulo de Souza Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/serial/computone.txt | 2 -- 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/serial/computone.txt b/Documentation/serial/computone.txt index 60a6f657c37..39ddcdbeeb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/computone.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/computone.txt @@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ Version: 1.2.14 Date: 11/01/2001 Historical Author: Andrew Manison Primary Author: Doug McNash -Support: support@computone.com -Fixes and Updates: Mike Warfield This file assumes that you are using the Computone drivers which are integrated into the kernel sources. For updating the drivers or installing -- cgit v1.2.3 From ee31892aaf47f1b5fd1323c9397db5d3f22d8b9e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bryan Wu Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:29 -0700 Subject: Documentation: fix leds-class.txt duplicated word Fix a typo (duplicated word) in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt Signed-off-by: Bryan Wu Acked-by: Richard Purdie Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt index 4996586e27e..79699c20076 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt @@ -61,8 +61,8 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the blink_set() function (see ). To set an LED to blinking, -however, it is better to use use the API function led_blink_set(), -as it will check and implement software fallback if necessary. +however, it is better to use the API function led_blink_set(), as it +will check and implement software fallback if necessary. To turn off blinking again, use the API function led_brightness_set() as that will not just set the LED brightness but also stop any software -- cgit v1.2.3 From b31966816dcd3d8b16109f39d7c7501dc9abb010 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wang Sheng-Hui Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 11:22:33 -0700 Subject: Documentation: drop as block elevator reference in switching-sched.txt Remove 'as' for as is no longer supported, and we can not use 'elevator=as' any more. Signed-off-by: Wang Sheng-Hui Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: Jens Axboe Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt index 71cfbdc0f74..3b2612e342f 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ To choose IO schedulers at boot time, use the argument 'elevator=deadline'. -'noop', 'as' and 'cfq' (the default) are also available. IO schedulers are -assigned globally at boot time only presently. +'noop' and 'cfq' (the default) are also available. IO schedulers are assigned +globally at boot time only presently. Each io queue has a set of io scheduler tunables associated with it. These tunables control how the io scheduler works. You can find these entries -- cgit v1.2.3 From e9db50b839c592fcd22952d7f1dccbd0a56da57d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Srivatsa S. Bhat" Date: Thu, 3 Nov 2011 00:59:52 +0100 Subject: PM / Sleep: Update freezer documentation This patch: * Substitutes some obsolete references to kernel/power/process.c by kernel/freezer.c. * Mentions kernel/freezer.c as being part of the "freezer" code along with the rest of the files. * Fixes a trivial typo. Signed-off-by: Srivatsa S. Bhat Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt index 38b57248fd6..316c2ba187f 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt @@ -22,12 +22,12 @@ try_to_freeze_tasks() that sets TIF_FREEZE for all of the freezable tasks and either wakes them up, if they are kernel threads, or sends fake signals to them, if they are user space processes. A task that has TIF_FREEZE set, should react to it by calling the function called refrigerator() (defined in -kernel/power/process.c), which sets the task's PF_FROZEN flag, changes its state +kernel/freezer.c), which sets the task's PF_FROZEN flag, changes its state to TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE and makes it loop until PF_FROZEN is cleared for it. Then, we say that the task is 'frozen' and therefore the set of functions handling this mechanism is referred to as 'the freezer' (these functions are -defined in kernel/power/process.c and include/linux/freezer.h). User space -processes are generally frozen before kernel threads. +defined in kernel/power/process.c, kernel/freezer.c & include/linux/freezer.h). +User space processes are generally frozen before kernel threads. It is not recommended to call refrigerator() directly. Instead, it is recommended to use the try_to_freeze() function (defined in @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ after the memory for the image has been freed, we don't want tasks to allocate additional memory and we prevent them from doing that by freezing them earlier. [Of course, this also means that device drivers should not allocate substantial amounts of memory from their .suspend() callbacks before hibernation, but this -is e separate issue.] +is a separate issue.] 3. The third reason is to prevent user space processes and some kernel threads from interfering with the suspending and resuming of devices. A user space -- cgit v1.2.3 From 886486b792e4f6f96d4fbe8ec5bf20811cab7d6a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Thu, 3 Nov 2011 23:39:18 +0100 Subject: PM / Runtime: Automatically retry failed autosuspends Originally, the runtime PM core would send an idle notification whenever a suspend attempt failed. The idle callback routine could then schedule a delayed suspend for some time later. However this behavior was changed by commit f71648d73c1650b8b4aceb3856bebbde6daa3b86 (PM / Runtime: Remove idle notification after failing suspend). No notifications were sent, and there was no clear mechanism to retry failed suspends. This caused problems for the usbhid driver, because it fails autosuspend attempts as long as a key is being held down. Therefore this patch (as1492) adds a mechanism for retrying failed autosuspends. If the callback routine updates the last_busy field so that the next autosuspend expiration time is in the future, the autosuspend will automatically be rescheduled. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Tested-by: Henrik Rydberg Cc: Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki --- Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 10 ++++++++++ 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 0e856088db7..5336149f831 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -789,6 +789,16 @@ will behave normally, not taking the autosuspend delay into account. Similarly, if the power.use_autosuspend field isn't set then the autosuspend helper functions will behave just like the non-autosuspend counterparts. +Under some circumstances a driver or subsystem may want to prevent a device +from autosuspending immediately, even though the usage counter is zero and the +autosuspend delay time has expired. If the ->runtime_suspend() callback +returns -EAGAIN or -EBUSY, and if the next autosuspend delay expiration time is +in the future (as it normally would be if the callback invoked +pm_runtime_mark_last_busy()), the PM core will automatically reschedule the +autosuspend. The ->runtime_suspend() callback can't do this rescheduling +itself because no suspend requests of any kind are accepted while the device is +suspending (i.e., while the callback is running). + The implementation is well suited for asynchronous use in interrupt contexts. However such use inevitably involves races, because the PM core can't synchronize ->runtime_suspend() callbacks with the arrival of I/O requests. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 74cd4c67392c1cee0499ba0977ec843252c7af28 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wolfram Sang Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2011 15:40:13 +0200 Subject: Documentation: watchdog: add guide how to convert drivers to new framework Signed-off-by: Wolfram Sang Cc: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Wim Van Sebroeck --- .../watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt | 195 +++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 195 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ae1e90036d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ +Converting old watchdog drivers to the watchdog framework +by Wolfram Sang +========================================================= + +Before the watchdog framework came into the kernel, every driver had to +implement the API on its own. Now, as the framework factored out the common +components, those drivers can be lightened making it a user of the framework. +This document shall guide you for this task. The necessary steps are described +as well as things to look out for. + + +Remove the file_operations struct +--------------------------------- + +Old drivers define their own file_operations for actions like open(), write(), +etc... These are now handled by the framework and just call the driver when +needed. So, in general, the 'file_operations' struct and assorted functions can +go. Only very few driver-specific details have to be moved to other functions. +Here is a overview of the functions and probably needed actions: + +- open: Everything dealing with resource management (file-open checks, magic + close preparations) can simply go. Device specific stuff needs to go to the + driver specific start-function. Note that for some drivers, the start-function + also serves as the ping-function. If that is the case and you need start/stop + to be balanced (clocks!), you are better off refactoring a separate start-function. + +- close: Same hints as for open apply. + +- write: Can simply go, all defined behaviour is taken care of by the framework, + i.e. ping on write and magic char ('V') handling. + +- ioctl: While the driver is allowed to have extensions to the IOCTL interface, + the most common ones are handled by the framework, supported by some assistance + from the driver: + + WDIOC_GETSUPPORT: + Returns the mandatory watchdog_info struct from the driver + + WDIOC_GETSTATUS: + Needs the status-callback defined, otherwise returns 0 + + WDIOC_GETBOOTSTATUS: + Needs the bootstatus member properly set. Make sure it is 0 if you + don't have further support! + + WDIOC_SETOPTIONS: + No preparations needed + + WDIOC_KEEPALIVE: + If wanted, options in watchdog_info need to have WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING + set + + WDIOC_SETTIMEOUT: + Options in watchdog_info need to have WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT set + and a set_timeout-callback has to be defined. The core will also + do limit-checking, if min_timeout and max_timeout in the watchdog + device are set. All is optional. + + WDIOC_GETTIMEOUT: + No preparations needed + + Other IOCTLs can be served using the ioctl-callback. Note that this is mainly + intended for porting old drivers; new drivers should not invent private IOCTLs. + Private IOCTLs are processed first. When the callback returns with + -ENOIOCTLCMD, the IOCTLs of the framework will be tried, too. Any other error + is directly given to the user. + +Example conversion: + +-static const struct file_operations s3c2410wdt_fops = { +- .owner = THIS_MODULE, +- .llseek = no_llseek, +- .write = s3c2410wdt_write, +- .unlocked_ioctl = s3c2410wdt_ioctl, +- .open = s3c2410wdt_open, +- .release = s3c2410wdt_release, +-}; + +Check the functions for device-specific stuff and keep it for later +refactoring. The rest can go. + + +Remove the miscdevice +--------------------- + +Since the file_operations are gone now, you can also remove the 'struct +miscdevice'. The framework will create it on watchdog_dev_register() called by +watchdog_register_device(). + +-static struct miscdevice s3c2410wdt_miscdev = { +- .minor = WATCHDOG_MINOR, +- .name = "watchdog", +- .fops = &s3c2410wdt_fops, +-}; + + +Remove obsolete includes and defines +------------------------------------ + +Because of the simplifications, a few defines are probably unused now. Remove +them. Includes can be removed, too. For example: + +- #include +- #include (if MODULE_ALIAS_MISCDEV is not used) +- #include (if no custom IOCTLs are used) + + +Add the watchdog operations +--------------------------- + +All possible callbacks are defined in 'struct watchdog_ops'. You can find it +explained in 'watchdog-kernel-api.txt' in this directory. start(), stop() and +owner must be set, the rest are optional. You will easily find corresponding +functions in the old driver. Note that you will now get a pointer to the +watchdog_device as a parameter to these functions, so you probably have to +change the function header. Other changes are most likely not needed, because +here simply happens the direct hardware access. If you have device-specific +code left from the above steps, it should be refactored into these callbacks. + +Here is a simple example: + ++static struct watchdog_ops s3c2410wdt_ops = { ++ .owner = THIS_MODULE, ++ .start = s3c2410wdt_start, ++ .stop = s3c2410wdt_stop, ++ .ping = s3c2410wdt_keepalive, ++ .set_timeout = s3c2410wdt_set_heartbeat, ++}; + +A typical function-header change looks like: + +-static void s3c2410wdt_keepalive(void) ++static int s3c2410wdt_keepalive(struct watchdog_device *wdd) + { +... ++ ++ return 0; + } + +... + +- s3c2410wdt_keepalive(); ++ s3c2410wdt_keepalive(&s3c2410_wdd); + + +Add the watchdog device +----------------------- + +Now we need to create a 'struct watchdog_device' and populate it with the +necessary information for the framework. The struct is also explained in detail +in 'watchdog-kernel-api.txt' in this directory. We pass it the mandatory +watchdog_info struct and the newly created watchdog_ops. Often, old drivers +have their own record-keeping for things like bootstatus and timeout using +static variables. Those have to be converted to use the members in +watchdog_device. Note that the timeout values are unsigned int. Some drivers +use signed int, so this has to be converted, too. + +Here is a simple example for a watchdog device: + ++static struct watchdog_device s3c2410_wdd = { ++ .info = &s3c2410_wdt_ident, ++ .ops = &s3c2410wdt_ops, ++}; + + +Register the watchdog device +---------------------------- + +Replace misc_register(&miscdev) with watchdog_register_device(&watchdog_dev). +Make sure the return value gets checked and the error message, if present, +still fits. Also convert the unregister case. + +- ret = misc_register(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev); ++ ret = watchdog_register_device(&s3c2410_wdd); + +... + +- misc_deregister(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev); ++ watchdog_unregister_device(&s3c2410_wdd); + + +Update the Kconfig-entry +------------------------ + +The entry for the driver now needs to select WATCHDOG_CORE: + ++ select WATCHDOG_CORE + + +Create a patch and send it to upstream +-------------------------------------- + +Make sure you understood Documentation/SubmittingPatches and send your patch to +linux-watchdog@vger.kernel.org. We are looking forward to it :) + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2449b8ba0745327c5fa49a8d9acffe03b2eded69 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ben Hutchings Date: Mon, 24 Oct 2011 15:12:28 +0200 Subject: module,bug: Add TAINT_OOT_MODULE flag for modules not built in-tree Use of the GPL or a compatible licence doesn't necessarily make the code any good. We already consider staging modules to be suspect, and this should also be true for out-of-tree modules which may receive very little review. Signed-off-by: Ben Hutchings Reviewed-by: Dave Jones Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman Signed-off-by: Rusty Russell (patched oops-tracing.txt) --- Documentation/oops-tracing.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/oops-tracing.txt b/Documentation/oops-tracing.txt index 6fe9001b926..13032c0140d 100644 --- a/Documentation/oops-tracing.txt +++ b/Documentation/oops-tracing.txt @@ -263,6 +263,8 @@ characters, each representing a particular tainted value. 12: 'I' if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform firmware (BIOS or similar). + 13: 'O' if an externally-built ("out-of-tree") module has been loaded. + The primary reason for the 'Tainted: ' string is to tell kernel debuggers if this is a clean kernel or if anything unusual has occurred. Tainting is permanent: even if an offending module is -- cgit v1.2.3 From 362b646062b2073bd5c38efb42171d86e4f717e6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Thomas Renninger Date: Fri, 4 Nov 2011 03:33:46 +0100 Subject: ACPI: Export FADT pm_profile integer value to userspace There are a lot userspace approaches to detect the usage of the platform (laptop, workstation, server, ...) and adjust kernel tunables accordingly (io/process scheduler, power management, ...). These approaches need constant maintaining and are ugly to implement (detect PCMCIA controller -> laptop, does not work on recent systems anymore, ...) On ACPI systems there is an easy and reliable way (if implemented in BIOS and most recent platforms have this value set). -> export it to userspace. Signed-off-by: Thomas Renninger Acked-by: Rafael J. Wysocki Signed-off-by: Len Brown --- Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-acpi-pmprofile | 22 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 22 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-acpi-pmprofile (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-acpi-pmprofile b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-acpi-pmprofile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..964c7a8afb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-acpi-pmprofile @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/acpi/pm_profile +Date: 03-Nov-2011 +KernelVersion: v3.2 +Contact: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org +Description: The ACPI pm_profile sysfs interface exports the platform + power management (and performance) requirement expectations + as provided by BIOS. The integer value is directly passed as + retrieved from the FADT ACPI table. +Values: For possible values see ACPI specification: + 5.2.9 Fixed ACPI Description Table (FADT) + Field: Preferred_PM_Profile + + Currently these values are defined by spec: + 0 Unspecified + 1 Desktop + 2 Mobile + 3 Workstation + 4 Enterprise Server + 5 SOHO Server + 6 Appliance PC + 7 Performance Server + >7 Reserved -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5f11161675be1351cadb96c83850e20bf5bcdc48 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Rafael J. Wysocki" Date: Sun, 6 Nov 2011 22:00:20 +0100 Subject: Documentation: Fix typo in freezer-subsystem.txt Fix a typo in Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt. Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki Reviewed-by: Srivatsa S. Bhat Acked-by: Randy Dunlap --- Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt index c21d77742a0..7e62de1e59f 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/freezer-subsystem.txt @@ -33,9 +33,9 @@ demonstrate this problem using nested bash shells: From a second, unrelated bash shell: $ kill -SIGSTOP 16690 - $ kill -SIGCONT 16990 + $ kill -SIGCONT 16690 - + This happens because bash can observe both signals and choose how it responds to them. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 20db93c34095553a01a9c31136658917bf1fa5d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Dumazet Date: Tue, 8 Nov 2011 14:21:44 -0500 Subject: net: min_pmtu default is 552 Small fix in Documentation, since min_pmtu is 512 + 20 + 20 = 552 Signed-off-by: Eric Dumazet Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index cb7f3148035..f049a1ca186 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN default FALSE min_pmtu - INTEGER - default 562 - minimum discovered Path MTU + default 552 - minimum discovered Path MTU route/max_size - INTEGER Maximum number of routes allowed in the kernel. Increase -- cgit v1.2.3 From f7f9bdfadfda07afb904a9767468e38c2d1a6033 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Julian Wollrath Date: Wed, 9 Nov 2011 10:02:40 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - fix internal mic on Dell Vostro 3500 laptop Fix the not working internal mic on Dell Vostro 3500 laptop by introducing the new model dell-vostro-3500. Signed-off-by: Julian Wollrath Cc: Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 4f3443230d8..edad99abec2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -349,6 +349,7 @@ STAC92HD83* ref Reference board mic-ref Reference board with power management for ports dell-s14 Dell laptop + dell-vostro-3500 Dell Vostro 3500 laptop hp HP laptops with (inverted) mute-LED hp-dv7-4000 HP dv-7 4000 auto BIOS setup (default) -- cgit v1.2.3 From d0985394e7fee6b25a7cc8335d45bc1c1a8ab2d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tejun Heo Date: Thu, 10 Nov 2011 09:03:55 +0100 Subject: block: Revert "[SCSI] genhd: add a new attribute "alias" in gendisk" This reverts commit a72c5e5eb738033938ab30d6a634b74d1d060f10. The commit introduced alias for block devices which is intended to be used during logging although actual usage hasn't been committed yet. This approach adds very limited benefit (raw log might be easier to follow) which can be trivially implemented in userland but has a lot of problems. It is much worse than netif renames because it doesn't rename the actual device but just adds conveninence name which isn't used universally or enforced. Everything internal including device lookup and sysfs still uses the internal name and nothing prevents two devices from using conflicting alias - ie. sda can have sdb as its alias. This has been nacked by people working on device driver core, block layer and kernel-userland interface and shouldn't have been upstreamed. Revert it. http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.linux.kernel/1155104 http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.linux.scsi/68632 http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.linux.scsi/69776 Signed-off-by: Tejun Heo Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman Acked-by: Kay Sievers Cc: "James E.J. Bottomley" Cc: Nao Nishijima Cc: Alan Cox Cc: Al Viro Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block | 13 ------------- 1 file changed, 13 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index 2b5d56127fc..c1eb41cb987 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -206,16 +206,3 @@ Description: when a discarded area is read the discard_zeroes_data parameter will be set to one. Otherwise it will be 0 and the result of reading a discarded area is undefined. -What: /sys/block//alias -Date: Aug 2011 -Contact: Nao Nishijima -Description: - A raw device name of a disk does not always point a same disk - each boot-up time. Therefore, users have to use persistent - device names, which udev creates when the kernel finds a disk, - instead of raw device name. However, kernel doesn't show those - persistent names on its messages (e.g. dmesg). - This file can store an alias of the disk and it would be - appeared in kernel messages if it is set. A disk can have an - alias which length is up to 255bytes. Users can use alphabets, - numbers, "-" and "_" in alias name. This file is writeonce. -- cgit v1.2.3 From b2433d861eaf349f4dcdc9281e75b139c1809dd3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Geoff Thorpe Date: Wed, 2 Nov 2011 11:44:44 -0400 Subject: uio: documentation fixups The 'name' attribute of struct uio_mem wasn't documented, and the note about 'kobj' is stale and needs to be changed to 'map'. Signed-off-by: Geoff Thorpe Signed-off-by: "Hans J. Koch" Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl | 7 ++++++- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 54883de5d5f..ac3d0018140 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -520,6 +520,11 @@ Here's a description of the fields of struct uio_mem: + +const char *name: Optional. Set this to help identify +the memory region, it will show up in the corresponding sysfs node. + + int memtype: Required if the mapping is used. Set this to UIO_MEM_PHYS if you you have physical memory on your @@ -553,7 +558,7 @@ instead to remember such an address. -Please do not touch the kobj element of +Please do not touch the map element of struct uio_mem! It is used by the UIO framework to set up sysfs files for this mapping. Simply leave it alone. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 93f3350c46fa5dfcc9650eb19b186e71ffc924c3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Claudio Scordino Date: Wed, 9 Nov 2011 15:51:49 +0100 Subject: RS485: fix inconsistencies in the meaning of some variables The crisv10.c and the atmel_serial.c serial drivers intepret the fields of the serial_rs485 structure in a different way. In particular, crisv10.c uses SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND and SER_RS485_RTS_ON_SEND for the voltage of the RTS pin; atmel_serial.c, instead, uses these values to know if a delay must be set before and after sending. This patch makes the usage of these variables consistent across all drivers and fixes the Documentation as well. From now on, SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND and SER_RS485_RTS_ON_SEND will be used to set the voltage of the RTS pin (as in the crisv10.c driver); the delay will be understood by looking only at the value of delay_rts_before_send and delay_rts_after_send. Signed-off-by: Claudio Scordino Signed-off-by: Darron Black Acked-by: Jesper Nilsson Acked-by: Nicolas Ferre Acked-by: Alan Cox Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt | 14 +++++++++++--- 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt index 079cb3df62c..41c8378c0b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -97,15 +97,23 @@ struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; - /* Set RS485 mode: */ + /* Enable RS485 mode: */ rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_ENABLED; + /* Set logical level for RTS pin equal to 1 when sending: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_ON_SEND; + /* or, set logical level for RTS pin equal to 0 when sending: */ + rs485conf.flags &= ~(SER_RS485_RTS_ON_SEND); + + /* Set logical level for RTS pin equal to 1 after sending: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; + /* or, set logical level for RTS pin equal to 0 after sending: */ + rs485conf.flags &= ~(SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND); + /* Set rts delay before send, if needed: */ - rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_BEFORE_SEND; rs485conf.delay_rts_before_send = ...; /* Set rts delay after send, if needed: */ - rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; /* Set this flag if you want to receive data even whilst sending data */ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0007a4c90a11a5371c8b3f80b220fa402a399189 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Stephen M. Cameron" Date: Wed, 16 Nov 2011 09:21:49 +0100 Subject: cciss: auto engage SCSI mid layer at driver load time A long time ago, probably in 2002, one of the distros, or maybe more than one, loaded block drivers prior to loading the SCSI mid layer. This meant that the cciss driver, being a block driver, could not engage the SCSI mid layer at init time without panicking, and relied on being poked by a userland program after the system was up (and the SCSI mid layer was therefore present) to engage the SCSI mid layer. This is no longer the case, and cciss can safely rely on the SCSI mid layer being present at init time and engage the SCSI mid layer straight away. This means that users will see their tape drives and medium changers at driver load time without need for a script in /etc/rc.d that does this: for x in /proc/driver/cciss/cciss* do echo "engage scsi" > $x done However, if no tape drives or medium changers are detected, the SCSI mid layer will not be engaged. If a tape drive or medium change is later hot-added to the system it will then be necessary to use the above script or similar for the device(s) to be acceesible. Signed-off-by: Stephen M. Cameron Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt | 14 ++++++-------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt index 71464e09ec1..b79d0a13e7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt @@ -98,14 +98,12 @@ You must enable "SCSI tape drive support for Smart Array 5xxx" and "SCSI support" in your kernel configuration to be able to use SCSI tape drives with your Smart Array 5xxx controller. -Additionally, note that the driver will not engage the SCSI core at init -time. The driver must be directed to dynamically engage the SCSI core via -the /proc filesystem entry which the "block" side of the driver creates as -/proc/driver/cciss/cciss* at runtime. This is because at driver init time, -the SCSI core may not yet be initialized (because the driver is a block -driver) and attempting to register it with the SCSI core in such a case -would cause a hang. This is best done via an initialization script -(typically in /etc/init.d, but could vary depending on distribution). +Additionally, note that the driver will engage the SCSI core at init +time if any tape drives or medium changers are detected. The driver may +also be directed to dynamically engage the SCSI core via the /proc filesystem +entry which the "block" side of the driver creates as +/proc/driver/cciss/cciss* at runtime. This is best done via a script. + For example: for x in /proc/driver/cciss/cciss[0-9]* -- cgit v1.2.3 From 25d7d59d1f7321be85bda175c9a1bb85ca1b5881 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 16 Nov 2011 10:52:01 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Update URLs in document Some stuff was moved from kernel.org to other places. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index 03e2771ddee..91fee3b45fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Development Tree ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ The latest development codes for HD-audio are found on sound git tree: -- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tiwai/sound-2.6.git +- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tiwai/sound.git The master branch or for-next branches can be used as the main development branches in general while the HD-audio specific patches @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ is, installed via the usual spells: configure, make and make install(-modules). See INSTALL in the package. The snapshot tarballs are found at: -- ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tiwai/snapshot/ +- ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/tiwai/snapshot/ Sending a Bug Report @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ via hda-verb won't change the mixer value. The hda-verb program is found in the ftp directory: -- ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tiwai/misc/ +- ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/tiwai/misc/ Also a git repository is available: @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ operation, the jack plugging simulation, etc. The package is found in: -- ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tiwai/misc/ +- ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/tiwai/misc/ A git repository is available: -- cgit v1.2.3 From cbb44514048a250647c6c6b3df27ff62cb71f7d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Wed, 23 Nov 2011 11:33:07 +0100 Subject: i2c: Fix device name for 10-bit slave address 10-bit addresses overlap with traditional 7-bit addresses, leading in device name collisions. Add an arbitrary offset to 10-bit addresses to prevent this collision. The offset was chosen so that the address is still easily recognizable. Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Wolfram Sang --- Documentation/i2c/ten-bit-addresses | 36 +++++++++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/ten-bit-addresses b/Documentation/i2c/ten-bit-addresses index e9890709c50..cdfe13901b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/ten-bit-addresses +++ b/Documentation/i2c/ten-bit-addresses @@ -1,22 +1,24 @@ The I2C protocol knows about two kinds of device addresses: normal 7 bit addresses, and an extended set of 10 bit addresses. The sets of addresses do not intersect: the 7 bit address 0x10 is not the same as the 10 bit -address 0x10 (though a single device could respond to both of them). You -select a 10 bit address by adding an extra byte after the address -byte: - S Addr7 Rd/Wr .... -becomes - S 11110 Addr10 Rd/Wr -S is the start bit, Rd/Wr the read/write bit, and if you count the number -of bits, you will see the there are 8 after the S bit for 7 bit addresses, -and 16 after the S bit for 10 bit addresses. +address 0x10 (though a single device could respond to both of them). -WARNING! The current 10 bit address support is EXPERIMENTAL. There are -several places in the code that will cause SEVERE PROBLEMS with 10 bit -addresses, even though there is some basic handling and hooks. Also, -almost no supported adapter handles the 10 bit addresses correctly. +I2C messages to and from 10-bit address devices have a different format. +See the I2C specification for the details. -As soon as a real 10 bit address device is spotted 'in the wild', we -can and will add proper support. Right now, 10 bit address devices -are defined by the I2C protocol, but we have never seen a single device -which supports them. +The current 10 bit address support is minimal. It should work, however +you can expect some problems along the way: +* Not all bus drivers support 10-bit addresses. Some don't because the + hardware doesn't support them (SMBus doesn't require 10-bit address + support for example), some don't because nobody bothered adding the + code (or it's there but not working properly.) Software implementation + (i2c-algo-bit) is known to work. +* Some optional features do not support 10-bit addresses. This is the + case of automatic detection and instantiation of devices by their, + drivers, for example. +* Many user-space packages (for example i2c-tools) lack support for + 10-bit addresses. + +Note that 10-bit address devices are still pretty rare, so the limitations +listed above could stay for a long time, maybe even forever if nobody +needs them to be fixed. -- cgit v1.2.3